Mobile Odor Control Unit

Mobile Odor Control Unit

ITB # 1204-17

Exhibit A -- Specifications

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit Table of Contents

EXHIBIT A – SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 MILESTONES AND CONSTRAINTS 01020 SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACT TERMS AND CONDITIONS 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01031 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING 01200 CONTRACT MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS PROCEDURE 01500 CONTRACTOR’S FACILITIES 01600 SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY 01660 EQUIPMENT TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING 01720 RECORD DRAWINGS 01725 ASSET DATA 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 01740 GUARANTY AND WARRANTY 01750 SPARE PARTS 01999 STANDARD FORMS

DIVISION 5 - METALS

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05550 METAL HANDRAILS

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06510 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) 06540 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTICE (FRP) STRUCTURAL SHAPES 06630 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) GRATING 06660 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) GRATING AND HANDRAILS

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09900 COATING SYSTEMS 09901 FINISHES AND COLORS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10405 SIGNS 10520 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit Table of Contents

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT 11009 EQUIPMENT LIST 11020 VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS 11060 ELECTRIC MOTORS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13230 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS

13231 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) HORIZONTAL FLOW ODOR CONTROL TANK

13234 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK 13525 ACTIVATED CARBON 13585 MOBILE ODOR CONTROL UNIT (MOCU)

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15050 PIPING SYSTEMS 15064 PLASTIC PIPING 15828 CENTRIFUGAL FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FANS AND BLOWERS 15863 PROPELLER WALL FANS 15886 FOUL AIR SILENCERS 15902 RETRACTABLE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK 15911 DAMPERS AND BACKDRAFT DAMPERS 15990 HVAC SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTING 16110 RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS 16120 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16158 480 VOLT VAC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 5-500 HP 16421 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 16450 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 15460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 600VAC 16470 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS 16500 LIGHT FIXTURES

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01010 - 1 Summary of Work

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section contains a summary of the work in this Contract.

B. The work to be performed under this Contract consists of furnishing all tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles; furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications; and performing all work or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract, in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. Provide work complete. Provide all work, materials, and services not expressly indicated in the Contract Documents that may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the work and administration of the contract.

C. The purpose of this project is for fabrication, supply and delivery of three (3) mobile odor control units (MOCUs).

D. The MOCUs shall be completely assembled and tested in the contractor’s manufacturing factory. The units shall be shipped fully factory assembled as specified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

A. The work of this Contract includes, but is not limited to the following, as shown on the drawings and specified in the specification sections: 1. Provide three (3) Mobile Odor Control Units (MOCUs). 2. Each MOCU shall be a self-contained enclosed odor treatment system consisting of

two exhaust fans for capturing foul air from a variety of locations; two integrated mist and grease eliminators sections; two vertical carbon beds sections; and two fan and electrical rooms with all required electrical and instrumentation devices necessary for the MOCU to operate in remote locations; all mounted on a portable drop deck trailer unit capable of being transported over public roads.

3. Provide complete structural fabrication drawings, structural design and structural calculations, for the MOCU components, stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in Washington State.

4. Provide flexible FRP ductwork, manhole adapters, MOCU foul air inlet cover plates, and associated connection adapters, for each of the MOCUs.

5. Provide first time initial carbon for each of the MOCUs. 6. Provide three (3) sets of spare parts where specified. 7. Provide required documentation including Record Fabrication Drawings, Operation

and Maintenance Information, and Asset Data. 8. Provide training for County staff and the specified support during the County’s on-site

commissioning of the MOCUs after delivery.

B. Accomplishment of work shall be completed within the timeframes specified by Section 01014.

C. The above description is not intended to be complete. The work shall meet all the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. The summary in this Section is not intended to relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for reading and understanding the Drawings and Specifications.


D. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the structural design of the MOCU necessary to meet the performance requirements in the contract documents and to meet any applicable OSHA or other regulatory requirements. The MOCU components shown on the Drawings are not intended to include all necessary structural components. Minimum material dimensions shown on the Drawings are not intended to imply that those dimensions would provide the necessary structural support. If the Contractor’s computed dimensioning of any proposed structural component appears to conflict with dimension requirements shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall notify the County and request direction per Section 01020.

E. Federal, State and Local Laws, Statutes and Regulations are not individually referenced. This provision incorporates by reference the latest version of statutes, laws and regulations. In case of conflict between the requirements of the specifications and requirements of the statutes and regulations, the contractor shall bring them to the attention of the Project Representative. Lacking a specific response, the more stringent shall control. In no case can this contract be interpreted to override statutes and regulations of governing authorities.

F. National and industry codes cited, such as IBC, NEC, NFPA, shall include amendments and supplements by the local authority having jurisdiction whether stated or not.

1.03 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE

A. Specifications are written mostly in imperative and streamlined form. Unless indicated otherwise, this imperative language is directed to the Contractor. Additionally, the words "shall be" shall be included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. 1. Examples:

a. Aggregate: ASTM C33. b. Adhesive: spread with notched trowel.

B. Related sections: Individual Specification sections may include a reference to other sections. Specification sections referenced are intended only to assist in identifying associated work and are not intended and shall not be considered to be all inclusive. The Contractor is responsible to perform all the work in the Drawings and Specifications whether referenced in the specific specifications or not.

C. Whenever there is wording stating that an item is “as specified”, “as shown”, or “as indicated”, the reference is to all the Contract Documents. Stating “as specified”, “as shown”, or “as indicated” does not refer necessarily to a Drawing or Specification, but it refers to either.

D. The words “Provide” and “Furnish” shall mean supplying, installing, and incorporating into the Work including all labor, materials, supplies and equipment necessary to do so. The word “Supply” shall mean to acquire, deliver and transfer the item to the County as specified.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified and shall be new and free of defects.

F. Requirements for UL or FM label shall mean UL or FM label or other OSHA/Nationally Recognized Testing Lab [NRTL] agency when approved by Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

G. Except for submittals and documentation, whenever the contract documents refer to “MOCU” in the singular, the requirement shall apply to each of three (3) MOCU’s.

1.04 REFERENCED SPECIFICATION

A. Whenever a Specification in this Contract references the specifications of the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) or a Local Jurisdiction, it is


to define the technical standards to be met for this Contract; only the technical standards are referenced. Administrative provisions such as Measurement and Payment of the referenced specification shall not apply to this Contract in any instance.

1.05 STANDARDIZED EQUIPMENT

A. Pursuant to King County Code 2.93, the Wastewater Treatment Division has conducted a process to standardize certain equipment to achieve overall system efficiencies. Equipment designated as ‘sole source’ or allowing ‘no substitutions’ or with similar designation have been selected and specified in accordance with this code provisions.

1.06 PRODUCT REGISTRATION

A. Register King County, Wastewater Treatment Division with the equipment manufacturer to receive manufacturer’s notices on product quality, defect or safety issues. Register in the name of Alden Wyma, Asset Management, Wastewater Treatment Division, King County; 201 South Jackson Street; Seattle, WA 98104.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01014 - 1 Milestones and Constraints

SECTION 01014

MILESTONES AND CONSTRAINTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies completion times, liquidated damages, and scheduling submittals.

B. Schedule and conduct all work in a manner consistent with the Contract.

1.02 COMPLETION TIMES

A. Achieve County Final Acceptance of the work of the contract for three (3) Mobile Odor Control Units within 360 days after the effective date of Notice to Proceed.

B. County Final Acceptance of the work of the contract requires successful completion of field testing and commissioning of 3 MOCUs, and training of County staff, as specified in Section 01660.

C. County Final Acceptance of the work of the contract will not be given until: 1. All submittals are received and approved, per the various specifications. 2. All ancillary equipment and spare parts are received, per the various specifications. 3. All Final Record Fabrication Drawings are received and approved, per Section 01720. 4. All Asset Data is received and approved, per Section 01725. 5. All O&M Information is received and approved, per Section 01730.

1.03 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. Liquidated damages for failure to achieve County Final Acceptance of the work within the time specified in 01014-1.02A shall be in the amount of $350 per day.

1.04 SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS

A. Within 14 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit their schedule to meet the final completion date specified in Paragraph 01014-1.02A. The schedule shall be a bar chart showing, as a minimum, the schedule for the following activities: 1. Completion of submittals as specified in the specification sections. 2. Purchase and delivery of contractor-procured (buy-out) items including drop deck trailers,

exhaust fans, and VFD units. 3. Fabrication of FRP components and delivery to assembly facility. 4. Beginning of MOCU assembly including FRP components and fan and electrical rooms

enclosures, for each of three MOCUs. 5. Completion of assembly of three MOCUs ready for factory testing and delivery. 6. Factory testing. 7. Delivery of MOCUs. 8. Delivery of as built drawings and O&M manuals. 9. Field testing, commissioning, and owner operator training.

B. The Contractor shall provide biweekly updates of the project schedule. Include a narrative report of the work accomplished in the preceding 2 weeks, as well as a report outlining work to be accomplished in the upcoming month.

PART 2 PRODUCTS: Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION: Not Used.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01020 - 1 Supplemental Contract Terms and Conditions

SECTION 01020

SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACT TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.0 DEFINITIONS

A. “Addendum” or “Addenda” means alteration or clarification of the plans or specifications provided to bidders by the County prior to bid time, which becomes part of the Contract Documents when the Contract is executed.

B. “Change Order” means a written instrument designated to be a Change Order which alters the Contract, and identifies the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) a change in Contract Price; and/or (3) a change in Contract Time.

C. “Change Proposal” means a document prepared by the Contractor at the request of the County, which proposes changes to the Work and/or changes to the Contract Price and/or Contract Time. County initiates all requests for Change Proposals.

D. “Contract Price” means the total amount payable by the County to the Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract.

E. “Contractor’s Representative” is the individual who has authority to obligate the Contractor.

F. “Contract Work” or “Work” refers to the labor, materials, equipment, supplies, services, other items, and requirements of the Contract necessary for the execution, completion and performance of all work within the Contract by the Contractor to the satisfaction of King County.

G. “Contractor” means the individual, association, partnership, firm, company, corporation, or combination thereof, including joint ventures, contracting with King County to do the Contract Work.

H. “Day” means calendar day, unless otherwise specified. I. “Final Acceptance” and/or “Completion” is written acceptance of the Project by the

County. J. “King County” or “County” or “Owner” may be used interchangeably and refers to

the County of King, a municipal corporation and a home rule charter county of the state of Washington.

K. “Notice To Proceed” is a written directive issued by the County authorizing the Contractor to perform some or all of the Work.

L. “Parties” refers to the Contractor and King County. M. “Request for Change Order” means a document, designated as a Request For A

Change Order, prepared by the Contractor requesting either (1) a change in Contract Price; (2) a change in Contract Time; (3) a change in Contract Work; (4) a payment of money or damages; and/or, (5) any other relief arising out of or relating to this Contract.

N. “Request for Information” is a request from the Contractor to the County seeking an interpretation or a clarification of some requirement of the Contract Documents.


1.1 INTENT AND INTERPRETATION OF THE DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents constitute the entire and integrated agreement between the

parties hereto and supersede all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral.

B. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship between any parties other than the County and the Contractor. No contract between the County and a third party shall be construed to create any duty on the part of the County or such third party to the Contractor. The Contractor is not an intended or incidental beneficiary of any promises made in the County’s contract with a third party, if any.

C. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract shall be as binding as if required by all.

D. In the event there exists a conflict, inconsistency or ambiguity within the terms or conditions of the Contract Documents, the more stringent or more costly requirements shall be deemed to have been intended and to have been included in the original Contract Price.

E. Where the words “similar,” “typical” (or their equivalents) are used in the Contract, they shall mean nearly corresponding or having a likeness. Such words shall not be construed to mean that all parts of the Work referred to are identical or substantially identical, or that such elements of the Work are connected identically or substantially identically to the rest of the Work. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine all details of the Work in relation to their location and connection to other parts of the Work. Words importing the singular number may also be applied to the plural of persons and things; words importing the plural may be applied to the singular; and words importing the male gender may be extended to females also.

F. The organization of the specifications into divisions, provisions and articles and the organization of the drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

1.2 CLARIFICATION OF DRAWINGS AND DETAIL DRAWINGS A. Where on any drawing a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is

indicated in outline, the drawn out parts shall apply also to other similar portions of the Work. Where ornament or other detail is indicated by starting only, such detail shall be continued throughout the courses or parts in which it occurs and shall apply to all other similar parts of the Work, unless otherwise indicated.

B. With regard to drawings the following shall apply: 1. Written dimensions shall be followed; drawings may not be to scale. 2. Figure dimensions on drawings shall govern over scale dimensions; and detail

drawings shall govern over general drawings. ARTICLE 2: COUNTY 2.0 AUTHORITY

A. The County shall identify the Project Representative in the Contract prior to Contract Execution. 1. The Project Representative shall provide the Contractor with a written Notice of

delegation of authority, which identifies the person who has authority to sign


Change Orders and/or bind the County to changes in Contract Work, Contract Price, and Contract Time.

2. In the event the Project Representative is no longer assigned to the Contract, the County shall notify the Contractor in writing of the change providing the name of the new Project Representative and effective date of the change.

B. The Project Representative shall have the authority to administer the Contract. Administration of the Contract by the Project Representative includes but is not limited to: 1. Receiving all correspondence and information from the Contractor; 2. Issuing request for Change Proposals; 3. Responding to Requests For Information; 4. Reviewing the project schedules, submittals, testing and inspection reports,

substitution requests, and other documentation submitted by the Contractor; 5. Negotiating Change Proposals and Change Orders; 6. Issuing decisions with respect to Requests for Change Orders and Claims; 7. Transmitting executed Change Orders, amendments, and other Contract

correspondence to the Contractor, and 8. Performing all other contract administrative functions.

C. All correspondence, questions, and/or documentation shall be submitted to the Project Representative.

D. The Project Representative may designate Technical Representatives to perform functions under the Contract, such as review and/or inspection and acceptance of supplies, services, including construction, and other functions of a technical or administrative nature. 1. The Project Representative will provide a written Notice of its designation to the

Contractor. The designation letter will set forth the authority of the Technical Representatives under the Contract.

2. The Project Representative may add to or modify in writing these designations from time to time.

3. The Project Representative cannot grant a Technical Representative greater authority than the authority of the Project Representative.

ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR 3.0 DUTY TO INSPECT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare all Contract Documents and check the conditions, dimensions, and instructions as stated therein. Contractor will not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture and engineering except to the extent provided for in the technical specifications and drawings.

B. The Contractor shall immediately notify in writing the County of any: 1. Error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents that a reasonable

contractor knew or through the exercise of reasonable diligence should have discovered under the same and similar circumstances;


2. Requirement in the Contract Documents that conflict with any local, state, and federal laws, regulations and/or permits, licenses, and easement conditions that a reasonable contractor knew or through the exercise of reasonable diligence should have discovered under the same and similar circumstances.

C. The Contractor should not proceed with the work in question until the Contractor receives written direction from the Project Representative.

D. If the Contractor proceeds with the work in question without written direction from the Project Representative, the Contractor shall be responsible for any costs or damages associated with: 1. Fines or penalties; 2. Demolition, tear out, removal, cleanup, remediation, or fixing the work in

question; and 3. Delay, disruption, and loss of productivity.

E. The Contractor’s failure to timely discover and immediately report such reasonably ascertainable errors, inconsistencies, or omissions and conflicts in regulatory requirements, permits, license or easements to the County shall preclude the Contractor’s recovery of costs and time resulting from the Contractor’s failure to timely discover and/or immediately notify the County of such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions.

3.1 COMMUNICATIONS A. The Contractor must designate, in writing, its Contractor’s Representative who is

responsible for administering the Contract and has the authority to bind and obligate the Contractor in the performance of the Work.

B. Communication with the Contractor shall be through the Contractor’s Representative. C. The Contractor shall notify the County immediately if the Contractor’s Representative

is changed and identify the name of the new Contractor’s Representative and effective date of the change.

3.2 DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall not make an alteration, variation, addition, deviation, or

omission from the requirements of the Contract without the written consent of the Project Representative.

B. Any such alteration, variation, addition, deviation, or omission by the Contractor shall not result in any extra compensation or extension of time.

C. The County shall have the right to treat any alteration, variation, addition, deviation, or omission from the requirements of the Contract as a contract breach if prior written consent is not obtained from the Project Representative, which may be justification for the County to withhold payment, stop work, or terminate the Contract for default.

ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.0 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A. If the Contractor determines that some portion of the drawings, specifications or other Contract Documents require clarification or interpretation by the County because of an apparent error, inconsistency, omission, or lack of clarity in the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly submit a Request For Information (“RFI”) and, unless otherwise directed, shall not proceed with the affected Work until the


County has responded to the RFI. The Contractor shall plan its work in an efficient manner so as to allow for timely responses to RFIs.

B. RFIs shall only be submitted by the Contractor on a RFI Form provided by the County or in a form acceptable to the County. The Contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed by the County. In the RFI the Contractor shall set forth its own interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with reasons why it reached such an understanding.

C. The County will review RFIs to determine whether they meet the requirements identified above in paragraph B to qualify as an RFI. If the County determines that the document is not an RFI it will be returned to the Contractor unreviewed as to content. When appropriate the Contractor may resubmit the RFI on the proper form, with all required information and in the proper manner.

D. The County shall respond in writing with reasonable promptness to Contractor’s RFI. 1. At the request of the Project Representative, the Contractor shall prioritize its

RFIs, identify a date by which the Contractor prefers the RFI be answered, and reasons for such priority.

2. If the Contractor submits a RFI on an activity less than thirty (30) days prior to the commencement of that activity, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension or adjustment in Contract Price due to the time it takes the County to respond to the RFI provided that the County responds within thirty 30 days. No delay to the Contractor’s work or damages to the Contractor shall be attributable to the failure by the County to respond to the RFI until thirty (30) days after the County’s receipt of the RFI, and then only if the failure by the County to respond is unreasonable and affects the Contract completion date.

E. The County’s response to a RFI shall not be considered a change to the Contract requirements. To the extent the Contractor believes that the County’s response to the RFI constitutes changed work impacting Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall submit a Contractor’s Request For Change Order to the County in accordance with Articles 5, Changes to the Contract.

4.1 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS & PROCESSES A. Substitutions requested by the Contractor will be subject to the County’s prior written

acceptance and at the County’s sole discretion. B. Requests for substitution must specifically identify:

1. Material, equipment, and labor costs included in the Contractor’s bid associated with the original item to be substituted;

2. All costs for material, equipment, labor associated with the proposed substitution, including any impact costs;

3. Proposed change to the Contract Price and/or Contract Time; and, 4. Compatibility with or modification to other systems, parts, equipment or

components of the Project and Contract Work. C. Contractor shall provide all documentation supporting its request as requested by the

County.


D. All costs of any redesign or modification to other systems, parts, equipment or components of the Project or Contract Work, which result from the substitution, shall be borne by the Contractor.

E. When the County approves a substitution proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall guarantee the substituted article or materials to be equal to, or better than, those originally specified and shall be compatible with all other systems, parts, equipment or components of the Project and Contract Work. The County has the right to order an unaccepted, substituted article removed and replaced without additional cost to the County.

F. The County has a right to a deductive Change Order if the substituted product or process is less costly than the contractually required product or process.

G. If the County does not accept the substitution proposal the Contractor shall proceed, without delay or cost to the County, with the Contract Work as originally specified.

ARTICLE 5: CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT 5.0 GENERAL

A. All changes to the Contract must be made in writing and signed by the King County Executive or its designees. No oral statement by any person shall change or modify the Contract. All changes to the Contract shall be made in accordance with the provisions of this Article.

B. All Change Order work shall be performed in accordance with the original Contract requirements unless modified in writing by the County.

C. To the extent the Contractor believes it is entitled to any additional money or time for any reason the Contractor shall submit a Request For Change Order to the County.

D. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any change in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time under the following conditions or events: 1. They were foreseeable at the time the Contractor submitted its bid; 2. They were caused by the acts of the Contractor, Subcontractor and/or Supplier,

including but not limited to the choice of means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for the Work, failure to provide labor, materials or equipment in a timely manner, and failure to take reasonable steps to mitigate delays, disruptions, or conditions encountered.

5.1 CONTRACTOR’S REQUEST FOR A CHANGE ORDER A. Notice of Intent to Submit a Request for Change Order.

1. The Contractor shall provide the Project Representative with the written Notice that the Contractor intends to submit a Request For Change Order no later than seven (7) days, after any direction, instruction, interpretation, determination by the County and/or the onset of any event or impact to the Project.

2. The Contractor shall include the following information in the Notice of intent to Request a Change Order: a. The date, circumstances, and source of the direction, instruction,

interpretation, determination by the County and/or the event or impact to the Project.

b. Reasonable order of magnitude estimate of the change to the Contract Price;


c. Reasonable order of magnitude estimate of the time impact to the Contract Time; and

d. Contractual provisions and substantive basis to support the Request. B. Request for Change Order.

1. Within twenty-one (21) days after the Direction and/or the onset of the event or impact to the Project, the Contractor may request an extension of time for filing its Request for Change Order. The Contractor shall state the reasons for the request and identify a date certain when the Contractor shall provide all documentation required in its Request for Change Order.

2. Unless the Project Representative issues written Notice authorizing the Contractor additional time to submit the Request for Change Order, the Contractor shall provide, in writing, a detailed Request for Change Order to the Project Representative no later than thirty-five (35) days after the Direction and/or the onset of the event or impact to the Project.

3. The Request for a Change Order shall include: a. Specific dollar amount covering all costs associated; b. Specific request for time extension (number of days); c. A copy of the written Notice of intent, including all attachments; and d. All documentation supporting the Request for a Change Order, including but

not limited to all cost records, schedule analysis, and the documents that are in any way relevant to the Contractor’s Request for Change Order.

C. County’s Response to Contractor’s Request for Change Order. 1. The County will make a written determination with respect to the Contractor’s

Request For Change Order within thirty (30) days of receipt of said Request, unless one of the following activities occurs. a. The County may request additional information and specify a time period for

receipt of the information. The Contractor shall comply with the County’s request for additional information.

b. The County may inform the Contractor that additional time is needed to review the Contractor’s Request for Change Order and identify a date certain when a decision will be rendered.

2. If the County requests additional information, the County will make a written determination within thirty (30) days receipt of Contractor’s additional information.

3. If the County does not make a determination within the applicable time period, the Request For Change Order is deemed denied.

D. Approval of Request for Change Order and Execution of Change Order. If the County determines that a Change Order is necessary, the parties may negotiate acceptable terms and conditions and execute a Bilateral Change Order or the County may issue a Unilateral Change Order.

E. Contractor Procedure upon Denial or Deemed Denial of a Request for a Change Order. If the Contractor disagrees with the denial, the Contractor’s sole remedy shall be to file a fully documented Claim within thirty (30) days of deemed denial or the Contractor’s receipt of the denial.


F. Contractor’s Obligation to Continue to Work. Pending resolution of the Contractor’s Request for a Change Order, the Contractor shall continue to perform all Work including, at the written request of the County that work associated with the pending Request for Change Order. The Contractor shall maintain its progress with the Work.

G. Waiver. Failure to follow the provisions set forth herein shall constitute a waiver of the Contractor’s right to receive any additional time or money as a result of any alleged direction, instruction, interpretation, determination by the County and/or the event or impact to the Project.

5.2 CHANGE ORDERS A. Bilateral Change Orders

1. If the County and Contractor reach agreement on the terms and conditions of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Price and Contract Time, such agreement shall be incorporated into a Change Order and signed by both Parties. Such Bilateral Change Orders shall represent full and complete payment and final settlement of all changes, Claims, damages or costs related to any work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or related to the events giving rise to the Bilateral Change Order.

B. Unilateral Change Order 1. County’s Right to Issue Unilateral Change Order.

a. The County may unilaterally issue a Change Order in its sole discretion without invalidating the Contract and without notice to the sureties, making changes within the general scope of this Contract.

b. If any such Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Contract Work, the County may make an adjustment in the Contract Price, Contract Time, or both.

2. Contractor Disagreement with Unilateral Change Order. If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment to the Contract Price and/or Time as indicated in the Unilateral Change Order, the Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a fully documented Claim.

3. Contractor’s Obligation to Continue to Work. The Contractor is required to continue with performance of all Work, including work associated with the Unilateral Change Order.

C. Issuance of Change Order 1. Bilateral Change Order.

a. No later than 30 days from the Satisfactory Completion of any additional Work, the County shall prepare and issue to the Contractor a Bilateral Change Order in accordance with the agreed upon terms and conditions, including any adjustment in the Contract Price and Contract Time.

2. Unilateral Change Order. a. If the County proceeds, then no later than 30 days from the Satisfactory

Completion of any additional Work, the County shall prepare and issue to the Contractor a Unilateral Change Order, including any adjustment in the Contract Price and Contract Time.


3. Determination of Satisfactory Completion. a. As used herein, "Satisfactory Completion" means that the Project

Representative shall have confirmed in writing that all tasks have been completed to the reasonable satisfaction of the County, including submittal by the Contractor of all required time and cost documentation.

5.3 COUNTY REQUEST FOR A CHANGE PROPOSAL A. Request. The County may request a written Change Proposal from the Contractor

for a change in the Contract Work. B. Contractor’s Proposal. Contractor shall submit its written Change Proposal within

the time specified in the County’s request. The Change Proposal shall represent the Contractor’s offer to perform the requested work, and the pricing set forth within the proposal shall represent full, complete, and final compensation for the proposed change and any impacts to any other Contract Work, including any adjustments in the Contract Time.

C. County’s Acceptance of Contractor Proposal. 1. If the County accepts the Change Proposal as submitted by the Contractor or as

negotiated by the parties, the County shall notify the Contractor in writing of its acceptance of the Proposal and direct that the change in the Work be performed.

2. Contractor shall not perform the work identified in the Change Proposal until receipt of written authorization from the Project Representative.

3. Both parties shall acknowledge acceptance of the terms of a negotiated Change Proposal in writing.

D. Execution of a Bilateral Change Order. After acceptance of the Change Proposal or acceptance of the negotiated Change Proposal, the County shall direct the Contractor to perform the work in accordance with the agreed upon terms; thereafter, the Parties shall execute a bilateral Change Order in accordance with the terms of the Change Proposal or negotiated Change Proposal.

E. Execution of Unilateral Change Order. If the County does not accept the Change Proposal or the Parties cannot agree upon the appropriate price or terms for the Change Proposal, the County may issue a unilateral Change Order.

ARTICLE 6: TIME AND PRICE ADJUSTMENTS 6.0 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME

A. The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order. B. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Notice of

intent to submit a Request for Change Order, Request for Change Order, Change Proposal and Claim.

C. No change in the Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent the time of performance is changed due to the fault, act, or omission of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts or omissions the Contractor is responsible.

D. Contractor is not entitled to a change in Contract Time unless the progress of the Work on the Critical Path is delayed and completion of the Contract Work within Contract Time is delayed.


6.1 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT PRICE A. The Contract Price shall only be changed by a Change Order. B. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Price in its:

1. Change Proposal; 2. Notice of intent to submit a Request for Change Order; 3. Request For A Change Order; and 4. Claim, provided the related Request for Change Order and/or Change Proposal

included a request to adjust the Contract Price. C. No change in the Contract Price shall be allowed when:

1. Contractor’s changed cost of performance is due to the fault, acts, or omissions of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts or omissions Contractor is responsible;

2. The change is concurrently caused by Contractor and County; or 3. The change is caused by an act of Force Majeure.

D. A Request for Change Order that includes a request for an adjustment in Contract Price shall: 1. Be in writing and delivered to the County within the applicable time period

specified in Changes to the Contract. 2. Identify the following information:

a. The event or condition which caused the Contractor to submit its request for an adjustment in the Contract Price;

b. The nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any; and, c. The amount of the adjustment in Contract Price requested.

3. Any requests by Contractor for an adjustment in the Contract Price and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event or conditions shall be submitted together.

ARTICLE 7: PAYMENT AND COMPLETION 7.0 PAYMENT WITHHELD

A. Without waiver of any other available remedies, the County has the right to withhold, nullify, or back-charge, in whole or in part, any payment or payments due or that have been paid to the Contractor as may be necessary to cover the County’s costs or to protect the County from loss or damage for reasons including but not limited to: 1. Defective or non-conforming Work; 2. Costs incurred by the County to correct, repair or replace defective or non-

conforming Work, or to complete the Work; 3. A reasonable concern by the County that the materials, equipment or component

parts are not in proper operating condition; 4. Assessment of Liquidated Damages; 5. Failure to perform in accordance with the Contract;


6. Cost or liability that may occur to the County as the result of the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s acts, omissions, fault, or negligence;

7. Deduction in Contract Work; 8. Failure of Contractor to repair damaged materials, equipment, property, or Work; 9. Failure of the Contractor to provide or obtain review of Submittals; 10. Failure to keep Record Documents;

B. The withholding, nullification, or back-charge of any payment(s) by the County shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations under this Contract.

7.1 FINAL INSPECTION AND FINAL PUNCH LIST A. County shall promptly perform a final inspection of the Work and, if necessary,

prepare a Final Punch List (a list of items to be completed or corrected by the Contractor prior to the County granting Final Acceptance).

B. Punchlist items may include but are not limited to: Copies of the warranties and guarantees required by the Contract; Operation and Maintenance Manuals; Record Set of Drawings and Specifications; and any other documents called for elsewhere in the Contract;

C. The Contractor shall complete or correct the items identified in the Final Punch List within the time period as required. Should the Contractor fail to complete or correct all remaining Final Punch List items within the required time, the County may assess liquidated damages against the Contractor for failure to achieve Final Acceptance in a timely manner.

D. After the Contractor completes all items identified in the Final Punch List(s), the Contractor shall notify the County in writing that the Final Punch List items have been successfully completed. After verification by the County that such completion was satisfactory, the Contractor shall submit a Final Application for Payment.

7.2 COMPLETION/FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Completion/Final Acceptance shall be achieved when all the obligations of the

Contract have been successfully performed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract and accepted by the County.

B. Neither Final Acceptance, nor Final Payment, shall release Contractor or its sureties from any obligations under this Contract, or constitute a waiver of any claims by the County arising from or related to Contractor’s performance or failure to perform the Work and to meet all Contractual obligations in accordance with the Contract, including but not limited to: 1. Unsettled liens, security interests or encumbrances; 2. Damaged, non-conforming, or defective Work discovered by the County; 3. Terms of any warranties or guarantees required by the Contract; and, 4. Payments made in error.

ARTICLE 8: MISCELLANEOUS 8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AGAINST CONTRACTOR

A. The liquidated damage amounts, set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents, will be assessed for Contractor’s failure to achieve within the Contract Time Final


Acceptance. These Liquidated Damages are not a penalty, but will be assessed against the Contractor for failure to achieve these Contract requirements. These Liquidated Damage amounts are fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the County because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the County would in such events sustain. These amounts shall be construed as the actual amount of damages sustained by the County, and may be retained by the County and deducted from payments to the Contractor. Assessment of Liquidated Damages shall not release the Contractor from any further obligations or duties pursuant to the Contract Work.

8.1 SHAREPOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT A. SUMMARY

1. This Section provides the requirements for transmitting all Contract Administrative Records, as defined in this Section, and documents to the County using the Contract SharePoint Site.

2. The requirements of this Section are applicable to all Sections of the Contract. B. SUBMITTALS

1. Procedures: Section 01300. 2. Any updates as to user information for the Contractor Representative. 3. Proposed schedule of attendance for SharePoint system training sessions. 4. Signed verification of training attendance for all users.

C. DEFINITIONS 1. Contract Administrative Records: All documentation and communications

required by the Contract including, but not limited to; correspondence, reports, notices, submittals, transmittals, Requests for Information, requests for change proposals, meeting agendas, meeting minutes, Requests for Change Orders, substitution requests, test reports, monitoring reports, punch lists, and all other Contract communications.

2. Contract SharePoint Site: Is a SharePoint Site hosted by the County for this Contract.

3. SharePoint: Is a Microsoft Office web application platform. The County will develop, manage and host a SharePoint site for this Contract.

D. USER IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION 1. A single user account shall be established for transmittal of all Contract

Administrative Records and communications from the Contractor’s Representative. The user account shall be established with an e-mail account associated with a “Microsoft account.” A Microsoft account is the combination of an email address and a password that is used to sign in to services, for example Hotmail, Messenger, SkyDrive, Windows Phone, Xbox LIVE, or Outlook.com.

E. CONTRACT DOCUMENTATION 1. The Contractor’s Representative shall be responsible for the content of all

Contract Administrative Records and communications and the transmittal of Contract Administrative Records submitted by the Contractor using the Contract SharePoint Site.

2. Unless otherwise specified, all Contract Administrative Records transmitted from the Contractor’s Representative shall be submitted and processed using the Contract SharePoint Site. Unless otherwise indicated, in writing, no other form of


Contract Administrative Records or contractually required written communication will be recognized.

3. Contract Administrative Records that are not to be transmitted through the

Contract SharePoint Site include the following: a. Executed Change Orders to the Contract must be transmitted as paper

copies. b. Record drawings as specified in Section 01720 c. Product samples d. Color samples e. Full size shop drawings

F. ACCESS REQUIREMENTS 1. The County will maintain user access for the Contractor’s Representative. 2. The Contractor and all agents of the Contractor’s Representative shall protect

the security of the Contract SharePoint Site. 3. Access will only be permitted to certain modules, in accordance with permission

levels configured by the County. The Contract Representative will be granted read and write access to necessary modules. Agents to the Contractor’s Representative that are approved by the County, will only be provided ‘read only’ access to necessary modules of the Contract SharePoint Site.

G. USE REQUIREMENTS 1. Use the Contract SharePoint Site as the Contract document file storage system

according to the file structure provided by the County. 2. Abide by all policies, procedures, and standards established by the County for

the use and application of the Contract SharePoint Site. H. DOWNTIME

1. In the event that the Contract SharePoint Site is temporarily unavailable, continue with contract document communications utilizing other electronic means (email) or hard copies to transmit and receive Contract Administrative Records.

2. Retain all Contract Administrative Records during the Contract SharePoint Site downtime and upload the documents to SharePoint when it is operational.

3. Immediately notify the County by telephone or email when the Contract SharePoint Site is not functional.

I. TRAINING 1. Submit a proposed schedule of attendance for the SharePoint training sessions

that may be needed to use the Contract SharePoint Site. 2. The County provided training shall be completed by the Contract Representative

and any ‘read only’ agents of the Contractor’s Representative within 10 days following the County’s issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

3. The County training is expected to be about two hours in duration. J. CONTRACT DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

1. The County may implement minor modifications to the format of the Contract SharePoint Site during the time of this Contract.

2. Software, Hardware, and Internet Access: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing access for their use and all costs to provide the necessary software,


hardware and Internet access. At a minimum the following shall be provided at all locations needed for the execution of the Contract Work.

a. Minimum software requirements are as follows: 1) A 32-bit operating system such as Windows 7 second edition or

later. 2) An Internet browser Explorer Version 9 or later.

b. Minimum hardware requirements are as follows: 1) Intel Core based (or equivalent) workstation or laptop with a

minimum of 4 GB of RAM. 2) A scanning device capable of scanning a minimum of 11-inch x

17-inch color document into electronic Portable Document Format (PDF) with a minimum density of 300 dpi.

c. Minimum access requirements are as follows: 1) Broadband data connection. 2) For remote locations, a 4G based connection is acceptable only

with the written approval of the County Project Representative. d. Software necessary to create documents in format compatible with

SharePoint or to convert non-electronic documents to such formats. Compatible formats include: Word, Excel, AutoCAD, and PDF.

K. RESTRICTIONS AND LIMITATIONS 1. All Contract Administrative Records submitted to the County through SharePoint

after 3:00 PM, Monday through Friday, will be acknowledged no earlier than the following business day.

2. For Contract document management purposes, business days and hours are defined as Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Pacific Time, excluding the County’s holidays.

L. COUNTY RESPONSIBILITY 1. Provide the Contractor’s Representative necessary user access to the

SharePoint Site for the duration of the Contract. 2. Manage the permission levels for all users of the system. 3. Provide training for personnel using the system for the Contractor’s

Representatives and County approved agents of the Contractor’s Representative. The training will include guidelines regarding the organization and format of the SharePoint modules and the access permission requirements for each module or element thereof.

4. Allow the Contractor’s Representative to upload, download, view, and markup files, based on the County’s assigned permission levels.

5. Track history of revisions and activities with respect to each document submitted or managed within SharePoint.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01025 - 1 Measurement and Payment

SECTION 01025

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Measurement and Payment for the various items on the Bid, as further specified herein, shall include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the work all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto and including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including safety and health requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U. S. Department of Labor (OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Bidding Schedule, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bidding Schedule for the various appurtenant items of work.

B. Indirect costs, such as supervision and overheads, profit, the general conditions specified in the Contract, all shall be allocated to each bid item as applicable for work defined in the bid item. No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for these items.



END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01031 - 1 Seismic Anchorage and Bracing

SECTION 01031

SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the seismic anchorage and bracing requirements for mounted and suspended MOCU equipment on trailer.

B. This Section specifies engineered design requirements for seismic anchorage and bracing for installation of MOCU equipment on trailer.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title IBC International Building Code ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Building Structures SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Equipment

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01300.

B. Anchorage details for MOCU equipment on trailer.

C. Sway bracing details for MOCU equipment on trailer, such as fan and electrical room ceilings and walls, fans, electrical panels, FRP odor control tank components, etc.

D. Provide engineered seismic anchorage design for the MOCU equipment installation and assembly. The required anchorage and bracing drawings and calculations shall bear the stamp of a professional structural or mechanical engineer licensed in Washington State; show the criteria used to determine seismic coefficients and forces applied to the equipment.

1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. In accordance with IBC or local code, whichever is more stringent, all equipment and components of the MOCU shall be anchored and braced to resist seismic forces prescribed in the code and ASCE 7, Chapter 13. All equipment includes equipment which is supported by the trailer floor, anchored to walls, anchored to ceiling, and anchored trailer floor.

B. Seismic anchorage and bracing for equipment shall be designed by a State of Washington Registered Engineer using the King County seismic criteria.

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01031 - 2 Seismic Anchorage and Bracing

1.05 SITE SEISMIC CRITERIA

A. Unless otherwise indicated, the SDS value (design, 5 percent damped, spectral response acceleration parameter for short periods) shall be determined for the equipment installation using the USGS Ground Motion Parameter Calculator found at:

http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps/ Using the latitude and longitude of the location of the equipment installation expressed to two

decimal points. A Site Class D shall be assumed unless otherwise noted.,

B. Importance Factor: I[p] = 1.5

C. Component Amplification Factor: from ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1.

D. Component Response Modification Factor: from ASCE 7, Table 13.6-1.



END OF SECTION

http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps/

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01200 - 1 Contract Meeting

SECTION 01200

CONTRACT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies Contract meetings prior to and during the work of the contract.

B. Contract meetings can, by mutual agreement of the County and the Contractor, be conducted by telephone.

1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The Project Representative will chair a meeting of representatives of the Contractor and the County, prior to beginning the work. The purpose of the meeting will be to: 1. Establish lines of authority and communication within the Contract team. 2. To discuss the administrative requirements of the Contract. 3. Address project issues if needed. 4. To define the duties and responsibilities of all parties.

B. Agenda: 1. Schedules. 2. Mobilization plans. 3. Administrative procedures of the Contract. 4. Other issues agreed between Contractor and County.

C. Ensure that the Contractor’s Representative and representatives of all major subcontractors are present at the meeting.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. General 1. Attend bi-weekly progress meetings to discuss the issues and progress of the project.

Meetings may be more or less frequent depending on the progress and status of the work. 2. Arrange for attendance of subcontractors as necessary to discuss job progress. 3. Meeting location, type and time to be mutually agreed to between the Project

Representative and Contractor Representative.

B. ATTENDANCE AT PROGRESS MEETINGS 1. Attendance may be required from:

a. Project Representative and other County staff. b. Contractor's Representative and other Contractor staff. c. Subcontractors, as pertinent to agenda.

C. AGENDA FOR PROGRESS MEETINGS 1. In general the agenda for each meeting is to be agreed by Contractor and Project

Representative and may include items such as: a. Review progress on action items from prior meetings. b. Review work progress since last meeting compared to the look ahead schedule. c. Look ahead schedule for upcoming period. d. Identification of problems that might impede planned progress. e. Construction deficiencies. f. Contract administrative deficiencies including:

1) RFI status 2) Submittal status 3) RCO status 4) RCP status 5) Progress Record Drawings status.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01200 - 2 Contract Meeting

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MEETING RECORD

A. The Project Representative will record: 1. List of issues discussed. 2. Agreements. 3. Follow-on action items required by either the Contractor or the County.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01300 - 1 Submittals Procedure

SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS PROCEDURE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies procedures and requirements for all submittals, substitutions, deviations, and the master submittal list required by the Specifications.

B. In addition to submittals required by individual Section specifications, submit information on Contractor chosen items to be included in the work, including items shown on the drawings but not specified.

C. Submit information on all repair and corrective work required of or generated by the Contractor such that the acceptability of the quality of the repair or correction can be assessed before it is performed.

D. Submit descriptive information that will enable the Project Representative to assess whether the proposed materials, equipment, or methods of work are in general conformance with the work and in compliance with the Contract.

E. Specifically identify and annotate any deviation or substitutions in the submittal. If deviations or substitutions are not clearly identified or annotated, the original contract provisions shall prevail; if the item has been installed without specific acceptance of the deviation or substitution it shall be removed and the contract required item installed in its place.

F. No fabrication or construction work shall occur on a specific submittal item without a submittal Review Action of “1” NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN or “2” NOTE MARKINGS. Any procurement or construction activity undertaken by the Contactor absent such a submittal Review Action will not be progress on project schedule or schedule of values.

G. Unless specified otherwise in this Contract, preparation, and revisions of submittals is to be an incidental expense and not a pay item.

1.02 MASTER SUBMITTAL LIST

A. Prepare and submit within 20 days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed, a Master Submittal List listing of all items for which submittals are required by the Specifications. Organize the Master Submittal List by Specification Section number and include the following information for all listed items: 1. Item identification. 2. Specification Section number. 3. Planned submittal date 4. Identification of those items that are substitutions or contain deviations from the

Specifications. 5. Identification of those items that require other jurisdictional agency review and approval. 6. The List shall include columns for future use as information becomes available shall be

provided for the following items: a. Trade name, model, and catalog designation. b. The scheduled need dates for control purposes. c. Date submitted. d. The date approval is needed. e. The date on which material is needed.

1.03 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each


submittal. The cost to review the initial submittal and the first revised submittal shall be borne by the County. The cost to review all additional revised submittals shall be charged to the Contractor.

B. Verify that the material and equipment described in each submittal conforms to the requirements of the Contract prior to submittal.

C. Ensure that the material, equipment and methods of work used are described in the submittal.

D. Coordinate and integrate all submittal dates with the Baseline Schedule.

E. Annotate on the Submittal Transmittal Form 01300-A if the submittal conflicts or may affect the work with other submittals.

F. Ensure coordination of submittals among the suppliers, related crafts, subcontractors, and with the planned work. The Contractor will be held responsible for any cost or schedule impact caused by a submittal coordination failure.

G. Submit a request for all substitutions using Form 01300-B received from the Project Representative.

H. Call out all deviations from the Contract on the Submittal Form 01300-A transmitted to Project Representative and note where applicable in the body of the submittal.

I. Include Preliminary Operations and Maintenance information as required in Section 01730.

1.04 SUBMITTALS ON ITEMS DIFFERING FROM THAT REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. APPROVED EQUAL 1. Definition: An item of material or equipment proposed by the Contractor that has the same

function, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics equal to that named, that meets the requirements of the Specification, and is sufficiently similar so that no change in related work is required. The item of material or equipment shall reliably perform at least equally well for the function imposed by the design concept of the completed work as a functioning whole. In general, approved equal applies to manufactured items.

2. Clearly note on the submittal Form 01300-A if any items are submitted as an equal 3. Acceptance is at the Project Representative’s sole discretion and the decision regarding

acceptance or rejection shall be final. If the Contractor disagrees, a Request for a Change Order shall be filed in accordance with contract provisions. Do not assume acceptance at any time prior to the rendering of decision by the Project Representative.

B. SUBSTITUTION 1. Definition: An item of difference in materials, equipment, means, method, technique,

dimension, sequence, or procedure which functionally meets the Contract requirements, but does not meet the Specification(s) and is equal to or better than the specified item.

2. A submittal shall be provided for each substitution request, must be submitted using Form 01300 – B, and shall address all items on the form. The request shall include complete specifications or means and methods for the item including procurement, operational and maintenance cost data. Substitution Request forms shall be numbered sequentially beginning with the number No. 1.

3. Any Substitution not identified on a submittal is not accepted or approved regardless of any action taken on the submittal by the County. Action taken by the County on the submittal shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the original Contract requirements.

4. Acceptance is at the Project Representative's sole discretion and the decision regarding acceptance or rejection of the substitution shall be final. If the substitution is rejected, proceed with the contract specifications without delay. Do not assume acceptance at any time prior to the rendering of a written decision by the Project Representative.


C. DEVIATIONS 1. Definition: A minor change or omission to a specified material, procedure or product

proposed by the Contractor that does not fully conform to the requirements specified, but conforms to dimensional, operational, and maintenance requirements and can be shown to accomplish the functional and operational and maintenance performance of the specified item.

2. Annotate in the submittal all deviations from stated requirements in the Contract. Any deviation not identified on the submittal is not accepted or approved regardless of any subsequent action on the submittal by the County. Failure of the County to comment on the deviation shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the original Contract requirements.

3. Acceptance is at the Project Representative's sole discretion and the decision regarding acceptance or rejection shall be final. Do not assume acceptance at any time prior to the rendering of a decision by the Project Representative.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. General: 1. Submittals shall be accompanied by Submittal/Transmittal Form 01300-A. An electronic

blank copy of this form will be provided by the Project Representative. Equipment numbers shall be listed on Form 01300-A for items being submitted. A separate form shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections for which a submittal is required. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package, or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review the group or package as a whole. No multiple-Section submittals will be allowed except where previously approved by the Project Representative.

2. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: “XXX”; where “XXX” is the sequential number assigned by the Contractor. Resubmittals shall have the following format: “XXX-Y”; where “XXX” is the originally assigned submittal number and “Y” is a sequential letter assigned for re submittals, i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for example, is the second resubmittal of Submittal 25.

3. Submit all proposed approved equals as a part of the submittal process. 4 Transmit one electronic pdf document of each submittal or resubmittal to the Project

Representative. The electronic document must be accompanied with a completed Submittal/Transmittal Form 01300-A and include all submittal materials. The electronic documents maybe attached to an e-mail, The Project Representative will provide the e-mail address. Digital files in excess of 5 MB will not be transmitted via e-mail and may be sent using a King County FTP site. The Project Representative will provide instructions for use of the King County FTP site.

5. Transmit one reproducible exact replica of the electronic documents via hand delivery or mail to King County within seven days from transmittal of the electronic submittal document. The reproducible documents shall not exceed 22 inches x 34 inches. Product samples and color samples may not be transmitted electronically.

B. Samples: Submit the number requested in the Specification Section with the submittal form. C. Certificates: Will be considered as information. No copy shall be returned.


D. “Submit for information only”: No copy shall be returned

3.02 REVIEW PROCEDURE

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Technical Specifications, within 30 days after receipt of each submittal or resubmittal, the submittal or resubmittal one electronic copy of the County’s identified Review Action and any review comments will be transmitted to the Contractor. This will be followed with one paper replica of the electronic document within seven days from the transmittal of the electronic document.

The returned submittal will indicate one of the following actions: 1. If the review indicates that the submittal is in general conformance with the Contract, the

submittal copies shall be marked "No Exceptions Taken" and given a Review Action of "1." In this case, implement the work covered in the submittal.

2. If the review indicates that the submittal requires limited corrections, the submittal copies will be marked "Note Markings" and given a Review Action of "2." In this case, begin to implement the work covered in the submittal in accordance with the markings noted. Where submittal information is to be incorporated in O&M data, a corrected copy shall be resubmitted; otherwise, no further action is required.

3. If the review reveals the submittal is insufficient and contains incorrect data and the comments are of a nature that can be confirmed, the submittal copies shall be marked "Comments Attached --Confirm" and given a Review Action of "3." . A Review Action “3” does not allow implementation of the work covered by the submittal until the information requested to be confirmed in the submittal has been revised, submitted, and returned to the Contractor with a Review Action of either "1" or "2.”

4. If the review reveals the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data and the comments require that the submittal be revised and resubmitted, the submittal copies shall be marked "Comments Attached --Resubmit" and given a Review Action of "4.” . A Review Action “4” does not allow implementation of the work covered by the submittal until the information in the submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned to the Contractor with a Review Action of either "1" or "2.”."

5. If the review reveals that the submittal is not in general conformance with the Contract, or if the submittal is incomplete, the submittal copies shall be marked "Rejected" and given a Review Action of "5." Submittals containing deviations or substitutions from Contract which have not been clearly identified by the Contractor fall into this category. A Review Action “5” does not allow implementation of the work covered by the submittal until the information in the submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned with a Review Action of either "1" or "2.”

3.03 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS

A. Review of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for errors or omission therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the County.

B. Unless Contractor specifically identifies and the County accepts a Deviation or Substitution on the submittal, no disposition of the submittal by the County changes the requirements of the Specification and Drawings.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01500 - 1 Contractor’s Construction Facilities

SECTION 01500

CONTRACTOR’S FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies following requirements for the contractor’s facilities for completion of the work, and for FRP fabrications, and for the MOCUs assembly facility spaces. 1. Utilities such as electric power, heating, ventilation, water, and sanitary facilities. 2. Controlled environment, access and security. 3. Contractor’s office and telephone.

B. Unless otherwise noted, be responsible for all costs for utility usage and permitting associated with the work and the requirements of this Section.

C. Unless otherwise noted, the County will not furnish any materials, facilities, utilities, or services.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. A layout plan drawing of fabrication spaces to meet each of the requirements of this Section.

C. MOCUs fabrication and assembly site plan and location.

1.03 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY SPACES

A. The FRP fabrication and MOCU assembly facility spaces shall be enclosed as required for heating, ventilation, weather protection and controlled environment.

1.04 UTILITIES

A. Provide space heating as needed for MOCU fabrication and assembly.

B. Provide ventilation as needed for MOCU fabrication and assembly per local code requirements.

C. Provide electrical power as needed.

D. Provide water as needed.

E. Provide toilet and wash-up facilities for the work force. Comply with applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to the public health and sanitation.

1.05 CONTRACTOR'S SECURITY

A. Provide security and facilities to protect the work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

1.06 CLEANING

A. Remove debris and rubbish from the fabrication and assembly areas as needed. Broom and vacuum clean interior work areas to eliminate dust.

B. Clean the interior and exterior exposed surfaces of MOCUs and equipment before covering, painting, or enclosing.

1.07 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE

A. Maintain a suitable Contractor’s office at or near the MOCU assembly facility to be the headquarters of the Contractor’s Representative authorized to receive drawings, instructions or other communication or articles.

B. Communications given by the Project Representative or delivered at the Contractor’s office in

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01500 - 2 Contractor’s Construction Facilities

the Contractor Representative's absence shall be deemed to have been delivered to the Contract Representative.

C. Copies of the Drawings, Specifications, permits, regulatory required items, and other documents related to the contract shall be kept at the Contractor’s office and available for use at all times.

1.08 TELEPHONE

A. Provide for Contractor's own use, telephone service at the Contractor’s office.

B. Provide the Project Representative with a single telephone number for the Contractor’s Representative, to be used for contract communication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION: Not Used

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01600 - 1 Shipment and Delivery

SECTION 01600

SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies requirements and procedures necessary for the shipment and delivery of the MOCUs and equipment.

B. All 3 MOCUs being provided under this contract shall be shipped and delivered to the designated location at the same time. The field inspection activities described in this Section shall be conducted for all 3 MOCUs at the same time.

C. MOCUs shall not be shipped while containing carbon or used to transport carbon. Carbon used for factory testing shall be removed from the MOCUs prior to shipment of the MOCUs, as specified in section 13231.

D. An entire MOCU including its trailer shall be packaged as specified and transported on a separate shipping trailer. Substituting direct towing of a MOCU trailer rolling on its own wheels will not be allowed under any circumstances.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Advance Notice of Delivery as specified in this Section.

B. Contractor’s designated representative to witness removal of the accelerometer per 3.02-C and perform the initial condition inspection per 3.05-A.

PART 2 PRODUCTS: NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NOTICE OF DELIVERY

A. Prior to shipping, the Contractor shall provide a 14-calendar-day advance Notice of Delivery for the Project Representative’s approval. In addition, the Contractor shall provide the County a 48-hour advance Notice prior to the expected delivery time at the County’s designated delivery location. 1. The 14-day Notice shall include: a. Method of shipment and carrier’s name. b. Carrier’s phone number. c. List of products to be shipped. d. List of all unassembled pieces to be shipped. 2. The 48-hour Notice shall include: a. The approximate hour of delivery.

B. Shipping will not be approved until after the Factory Testing Phase per Section 01660 has been

completed, documented and accepted by the Project Representative. C. Contractor is responsible for off-loading of MOCU and all delivered components at the County’s

designated delivery location. D. Expenditures and/or damages resulting from the Contractor’s failure to adhere to, and comply with,

the specified delivery times, coordination, and delivery requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

A. The MOCUs shall be factory assembled and ready for complete unit shipments.

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01600 - 2 Shipment and Delivery

1. The MOCU and separate components that are, of necessity, shipped unassembled shall be furnished with an assembly plan and instructions. The list of all unassembled pieces shall be approved by the Project Representative prior to shipment. All of the unassembled pieces shall be field installed by the Contractor.

2. The separate parts and assemblies shall be match-marked or tagged in a manner to facilitate field assembly of the product.

3. The MOCU assemblies and all of the separate components shall be protected from exposure to elements during shipment with an application of a strippable protective coating or approved equal.

4. The MOCU assembly components shall be secured internally and externally during shipment to prevent any damages and impacts to the MOCU assemblies.

B. Package or crate products to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage.

Each assembly, subassembly, and parts shipped separately shall be packaged appropriately to protect it from damage, including, but not limited to, damage due to the weather, moisture, impact and abrasion.

C. Special monitoring: Provide recording accelerometers for MOCUs shipping and delivery, designed to record the magnitude of sudden impacts in 3 directions (X, Y, Z) in continuous strip charts with both time and “g” force scales. Shipped with and fixed to MOCU assemblies or its packing crate. Upon arrival of each shipment, immediately notify the Project Representative; the accelerometer shall be removed in the presence of the Project Representative and the Contractor. If the magnitude of the maximum acceleration exceeds 3.0 g, the MOCU and any subassembly shall be inspected for damage.

D. Spare Parts: All required spare parts shall be delivered along with the delivery of the equipment. E. Activated Carbon: The required carbon shall be delivered along with the delivery of the equipment.

3.03 THE COUNTY’S ADDRESS FOR RECEIPT OF SHIPMENT

A. Material shall be delivered F.O.B. destination, with freight and insurance paid by the Contractor to the location indicated below:

King County Department of Natural Resources and Parks Wastewater Treatment Division South Treatment Plant 1200 Monster Road S.W. Seattle, Washington 98055

3.04 DELIVERY TIME

A. Delivery shall be restricted to the hours between 7:30 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. on weekdays. 3.05 DEFICIENCIES

A. Upon delivery of the MOCU, the Contractor and the County will jointly perform a detailed field inspection of the MOCU’s condition and to confirm the visible condition of all items. See Section 13585 for additional information. Any defects or omissions will be noted in writing. The Contractor shall promptly remedy any defects or omissions at its sole expense.

B. County and Contractor will conduct a thorough inspection during field testing of the MOCU as specified in section 13585. The Contractor shall promptly remedy any defects or omissions at its sole expense.

C. Any defects or omissions shall be satisfactorily completed within 2 weeks of field inspection. Before acceptance and before final payment will be made, all defects or omissions noted on this inspection must be completed by the Contractor and inspected and approved by the County.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01660 - 1 Equipment Testing, Training, and Commissioning

SECTION 01660

EQUIPMENT TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for achieving, verifying, and documenting the working condition of the MOCU, according to its planned function and operation, including the training of operating personnel. This process includes, but is not limited to, documentation and procedures, pre-installation and component testing, system and operational testing, commissioning, and possession and use by the County. The process is applicable to structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation systems as completed work, functioning as a complete operational MOCU.

B. Provide: power, temporary facilities and all other necessary items and work required to complete the tests and inspections specified herein, unless otherwise specified.

C. If, under test, a portion of the work fails to meet the Contract requirements and is adjusted, altered, renewed, or replaced, tests on that portion, together with other portions of the work affected, shall be repeated within a reasonable time and in accordance with the specified conditions.

D. Test results to be within the tolerances set forth in the Specifications. If no tolerances have been specified, conform to tolerances established by recognized industry practice.

E. Where, in the case of an otherwise satisfactory factory or field test, doubt or dispute arises between the Project Representative and the Contractor regarding the test results or the methods or equipment used in the performance of such test, then the Project Representative may order the test to be repeated. The repeat test using such modified methods or equipment will be paid per the following: 1. If the test results confirm the satisfactory installed test results, costs for the repeat test will be paid

by the County. 2. If the test results of an installed test fail to comply with the Contract requirements, all costs

associated with the repeat tests and equipment necessary to achieve the Contract requirements are at the Contractor's expense.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. 1. References

a. American Society for Testing and Materials b. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers c. Instrument Society of America

2. Install testing equipment and apparatus with personnel trained in the trades and professions required to assure competent workmanship.

3. Supervise the installation of specific equipment testing items specified to be accomplished by factory-trained installation specialists furnished or certified by the equipment manufacturers.

4. Document the skills and training of workers engaged in the installation of testing equipment furnished by the Contractor.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. 30 days after Notice to Proceed, submit a listing and schedules of all individual component testing and complete MOCU testing to be performed.


C. Test phases: 1. Factory Test phase (Where MOCU is assembled)

a. Pre-installation test b. Component test c. Complete Assembled MOCU test d. Assembled MOCU Operational test

2. Field Test phase (Where MOCU is delivered, King County Facility) a. Component test b. Complete Assembled MOCU test c. Assembled MOCU Operational test d. Commissioning

D. Factory Tests results report submittals. 1. Pre-installation tests. 2. Component tests. 3. Complete Assembled MOCU tests 4. Complete MOCU Operational tests

E. Field Tests results report submittals 1. Component tests 2. Complete Assembled MOCU tests 3. Complete MOCU Operational tests 4. Commissioning

F. Training Program submittals 1. Listing of all individual equipment and MOCU 2. Training Plans 3. Training Schedule 4. Documentation of training performed

1.04 TEST ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Designate the Test Engineer; submit the qualifications of a designated Test Engineer showing competence to perform the responsibilities. 1. The Test Engineer shall be responsible for the following:

a. Develop test procedures and forms for demonstration and documentation of all tests as indicated in the paragraph 01660-1.03. The test procedures shall be appropriately documented so that another party can repeat the test to verify test results.

b. Review as-built drawings for verification with as-built conditions. c. Oversee training for the MOCU specified in the Specifications. d. Participate in all tests and document that the equipment is completely tested and within

contract limits or identify non-compliant elements. 2. The Test Engineer shall be responsible for all factory tests and field tests.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. MOCU: Mobile Odor Control Unit as shown on the drawings and specified in the specification. MOCU consists of arrangement of the following items, but not limited to: 1. FRP odor control tank, as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13231. 2. MOCU fan and electrical rooms’ enclosures, as shown on the drawings and specified in section

13585. 3. Drop Deck Trailer, as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585. 4. FRP exhausts fans, as shown on the drawings and specified in Section 15828. 5. Electric Power system, as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585 and division 16 6. VFDs, Variable Frequency Drives as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585 and

Division 16. 7. Drainage and Neutralization system as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585.


8. Roof folding guard rails, access ladder, and life point anchors as shown on the drawings and specified in Division 13.

9. Activated Carbon, as specified in section 13525.

B. Factory Test Phase: Factory tests shall be conducted at the contractor’s factory where the MOCU will be assembled and prior to shipment. The factory test includes the following tests: 1. Pre-installation test: Test and inspect components prior to installation or assembly. 2. Component Test: Tests and inspections of installed components. 3. Complete Assembled MOCU Test: Test the complete assembled MOCU to demonstrate the

assembled MOCU is as specified. 4. Assembled MOCU Operational Test: Operational testing of the entire MOCU with all equipment

assembled to demonstrate the MOCU operation is as specified.

C. Field Test Phase: Field tests shall be conducted at the King County facility after shipment of the MOCU to King County facility and after the delivery field inspection as specified in Section 01600. The field test includes the following tests: 1. Component test: Test and inspection of installed components. 2. Complete Assembled MOCU Test: Test the complete assembled MOCU to demonstrate the

assembled MOCU is as specified. 3. Assembled MOCU Operational Test: Operational Testing of the entire MOCU equipment. 4. Commissioning: Commissioning takes place after the successful Field Assembled MOCU

Operational test and approval of that test by the Project Representative. The commissioning phase is for 30 continuous days of successful operation of the MOCU in service under designed operating conditions and environment. The MOCU is operated by County personnel with the Contractor providing maintenance, repairs, replacements and correction of deficiencies as required. During Commissioning, the MOCU may be operated throughout its specified ranges and modes of operation to demonstrate required performance are met.

1.06 TESTING - GENERAL

A. Prepare and submit test procedures and schedules.

B. Document and submit test results.

C. The Factory Test Phase of all 3 MOCUs shall be completed, documented and accepted by the Project Representative prior to the shipment of the 3 MOCUs per Section 01600.

D. The Contractor shall arrange and conduct the witnessed factory testing of all 3 MOCUs per Paragraph 1.07 in the same session, with the County representative making a single trip to the testing location.

E. The Contractor may at its option, with the approval of the Project Representative, arrange and conduct the witnessed factory testing of one MOCU in one session and the other two (2) MOCUs in one (1) separate session. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional costs of that approach, including the costs of additional County representative witnessing per Paragraph 1.07-A. The Contractor’s election of that approach shall not change the requirement that all 3 MOCUs are to be delivered at the same time per Section 01600.

F. The Field Test Phase specified in this Section including commissioning shall be initiated for all 3 MOCUs at approximately the same time, except where necessary to address repairs by the Contractor and approved by the Project Representative.

1.07 WITNESSED FACTORY TESTING

A. All factory tests of the MOCUs per Section 13585 shall be witnessed by a representative of the County. 1. Provide a minimum of 6 weeks’ notice. 2. The Contractor shall coordinate arrangements and pay costs for witnessing of testing (and

retesting if necessary) as follows: a. Round trip coach airfare for one County representative to the location of the factory tests. b. Single rental automobile for the duration of the tests.


c. One single occupancy room for the duration of the tests in a moderate hotel/motel in the vicinity of the factory test facility where the MOCU is assembled.

d. Per diem, meeting King County standards, for meals for the duration of the tests. 3. In the case of a factory located within 90 minutes’ one-way driving time from Seattle, the

requirements of 1.07 regarding airfare, rental automobile, single occupancy room, and per diem for meals shall not apply, and the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 weeks’ notice.

1.08 TRAINING

A. Submit schedule and training for operations and maintenance staff. 1. Scheduling of 3 sessions of one-day training to comply with 01660-3.06 and 13585-3.02. 2. Schedule to include:

a. Dates and time. b. Target date for Commissioning period. c. Do not schedule training on weekends or holidays observed by County. d. Coordinate training scheduling with applicable County staff work schedule. e. After each training, submit completed Form 01660-B and Form 01660-C received from the

Project Representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Comply with the requirements of this Contract and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.

B. Provide test gauges, meters, recorders and monitors as required to supplement or augment the instrumentation system provided under this Contract to properly demonstrate that equipment fully satisfies the specified requirements. Specifically select devices employed for the purpose of measuring the performance of the equipment and systems to be consistent with the variables to be monitored. Instruments are to be recently calibrated.

C. Demonstrate through re-calibration the accuracy of instruments employed for testing purposes.

D. Calibration procedures are in accordance with applicable standards of ASTM, ISA, and IEEE to insure the adequacy and calibration of gauges, meters, recorders and monitors .

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install test equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Notify the Project Representative of conflict between a manufacturer's installation recommendations and specific requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.03 TESTING

A. General requirements: 1. Test and inspect equipment and partially completed or fully completed portions of the work to prove

compliance with the Contract requirements. 2. Unless otherwise noted, pay all costs of testing, including temporary facilities and connections. 3. Receive Project Representative approval for the application of all tests only after Project

Representative inspection of equipment for conformance with the Specifications. 4. Tests and inspections, unless otherwise specified or accepted, are in accordance with the

recognized standards of the industry. 5. Procedures:

a. Design testing procedures to duplicate, as nearly as possible, conditions of operation to insure that the equipment is not damaged. Once the testing procedures have been reviewed and


approved by the Project Representative, organize by system into test packages and include the proper checkout, alignment, adjustment, and calibration signoff forms for each item of equipment and system.

b. Jointly use forms with the Project Representative to ensure that documentation for each electrical, mechanical, and instrumentation equipment item has been properly recorded for installation and testing. Failure to follow the Project Representative approved procedure will result in non-acceptance of the equipment.

c. Fulfillment of the test and inspection requirements are by either of the following: 1) Tests and inspections carried out in Project Representative's presence, or: 2) Certificates or reports of tests and inspections carried out by Project Representative

approved persons or organizations. d. Maintain the systems test packages, which contain tests and sign-off forms including, but not

limited to, piping, equipment, electrical, and instrumentation. Submit test packages to the County for inspection upon request.

3.04 TESTING BY PHASES

A. Test Phase: 1. Factory and Field Component Test Phase:

a. General: 1) Obtain approval of Initial Operation and Maintenance Submittal as specified in Section

01730 prior to Factory Component testing. 2) Equipment to be tested to the specified requirements before a system is placed into

operation. 3) Incorporate requirements of the Specifications into the installed tests and inspection

procedures and proceed in a logical, step-wise sequence to ensure that the installed equipment has been properly assembled, serviced, aligned, adjusted, connected, and calibrated prior to operation.

4) Perform all changes, adjustments, or replacements required to make the equipment operate.

2. Factory and Field Assembled MOCU Operational Test Phase: a. After the Project Representative has approved the Component Test Phase for each

component within the MOCU and has not found deficiencies in that portion of the work, test and operate the MOCU under operating conditions to determine as comprehensively as possible whether the equipment and system meet the requirements of the Specifications.

3.05 COMMISSIONING

A. After completion of the MOCU Field Test and certification by the Project Representative that the MOCU tests meet performance requirements, that the required training is complete and that all required documents are submitted, the County will begin operating the MOCU for the Commissioning Period.

B. The Commissioning Period is defined as 30 continuous days of full operation without equipment failures. During this period the MOCU may be required to operate throughout its specified operating and performance ranges.

C. The MOCU is operated by County personnel with the Contractor providing maintenance, repairs, replacements and correction of deficiencies as required.

3.06 TRAINING

A. Conduct the 3 days of County personnel training per Section 13585 after completion of the Field Component Test Phase for the MOCUs and prior to Commissioning: 1. Notify the Project Representative of the time of the training at least ten days prior to the first day of

the training.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01720 - 1 Record Drawings

SECTION 01720

RECORD DRAWINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies providing MOCU Record Fabrication Drawings.

B. Maintain and provide Record Fabrication Drawings in both mark-up format and in CAD format.

C. Each Record Fabrication Drawing shall depict work in all disciplines prepared by the Contractor and all of its subcontractors and suppliers in accordance with this and other specific Sections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit hard copies of Final Mark-Up Record Drawings on 22 x 34 inch sheets.

C. Submit hard copies Final CAD Record Drawings on 22 x 34 inch sheets.

D. Submit files of the Final CAD Record Drawings in “dwg” format on an external USB flash drive.

E. Submit files of the Final CAD Record Drawings in Portable Document Format (PDF) files on an external USB flash drive.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PROGRESS MARK-UP AND CAD RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor’s approved submitted fabrication drawings shall replace or supplement the County’s original Contract Drawings where appropriate, as the starting point for the Record Fabrication Drawings.

B. Mark-up any changes on the approved submitted fabrication drawings during fabrication and assembly of the MOCU. Continuously maintain, update and correct mark-up information per 3.01.A on 22 x 34 inch sheet of approved submitted fabrication drawings to reflect the "as constructed" conditions. Progress record drawings shall be continuously updated to show: 1. Field changes of dimensions and details made by contractor. 2. Changes made by Change Order. 3. Dimensional location of all components shall be recorded and provided on the mark-up

drawings and submitted to the County as prescribed in this Section.

C. Apply all progress mark-up record drawing changes to progress CAD record drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MARKING DEVICES

A. Waterproof felt tip pens as required to maintain mark-up drawings described in this section using the following color coding: 1. Red: Document changes 2. Orange: Dimensional and other notations 3. Green: Work deleted

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01720 - 2 Record Drawings

3.02 ELECTRONIC MEDIA DRAWINGS

A. The CAD record fabrication drawings shall be provided on an external USB flash drive in AutoCAD, Release 2010 or newer, in "dwg" and in PDF format. All drawings shall be provided with borders and title blocks matching those of the contract drawings and clearly identifying the ITB number and drawing number. Each drawing file shall include the drawing number and drawing title in the filename. The equipment and the scope of the drawing shall be as required in specific specification sections.

B. Drawing quality and size of presentation legible at a 50 percent reduction of such drawings; reduced drawings will be used for insertion in operations and maintenance manuals.

C. Text size: 0.125 inch for 22 x 34 inch drawings, 0.063 inch for 11 x 17 inch drawings.

D. When requested by the Contractor, the Project Representative will provide the electronic copies of the original Contract Drawings in AutoCAD “dwg” format.

3.03 RECORDING

A. Progress mark-up drawings and information shall be prepared concurrently with construction progress. No work shall be concealed until the required information is recorded. Payment may not be made for the concealed items.

B. Concurrently up-date the progress CAD fabrication drawings by applying all mark-up changes to the CAD fabrication drawings as electronic record drawings.

C. The following actual construction items shall be recorded on the drawings: 1. Dimensions specified on the contract drawings. 2. Horizontal and vertical dimensions and locations of all components of the MOCU. 3. The actual arrangement and routing of conduit and piping relative to visible structural

items. Conduit and piping shall be dimensioned for sizes and locations.

3.04 RECORD DRAWINGS DELIVERY TO PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

A. Commissioning will not begin until copies of fully up-to-date Progress CAD Record Drawings in PDF format are received and approved by the Project Representative. Revise the Progress Record Drawings as a result of any changes made or discovered during commissioning.

B. Prior to County Final Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall transmit all Final Record Fabrication Drawings in all formats specified in 1.02.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01725 - 1 Asset Data

SECTION 01725

ASSET DATA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies providing asset data as specified in Part 3 for equipment and instruments installed under this contract

B. For this Section, Assets are defined as those items in the Equipment List, section 11009.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Completed Data files on external USB memory device as specified herein.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Asset Data Form 01725-A 1. A listing of data required to be provided is included in Part 3. 2. The Project Representative will provide an electronic version of Form 01725-A. 3. Provide data required in electronic format readable by Excel.

B. Removed Asset Data Forms: Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ELECTRONIC DATA FORM 01725A

A. ASSET DATA FORMS: 1. Obtain the electronic form from Project Representative. 2. Complete applicable information required in items 15 through 87. Items 1 through 13 and

Items 88 through 105 on all Asset Data Forms 01725-A will be completed by the County and shall not be changed by the Contractor.

3. For all assets: Items in columns 14 through 22 are required for all assets. Provide data as follows: a. Fill in Item 14 with the submittal number under which the equipment was approved. b. Fill in Item 15 to identify the equipment manufacturer's name. c. Fill in Item 16 with the equipment's model number. d. Fill in Item 17 with the equipment's serial number. e. Fill in Item 18 with supplier or vendor information including:

1) The supplier's or vendor's name. 2) The supplier's or vendor's current phone number.

f. Fill in Item 19 with the equipment list price from the manufacturer, not what was actually paid for it.

g. Fill in Item 20 with the equipment installation date. h. Fill in Item 21 with the equipment warranty expiration date. i. Fill in Item 22 with the equipment weight, in pounds.


4. For different equipment/asset categories: Fill in items 23 through 87 as required for the specific equipment categories as follows:

a. Pump, Blower or Compressor:

1) Item 23 - Rated Flow in gallons per minute or cubic feet per minute. 2) Item 24 - Type (for example, centrifugal, positive displacement, reciprocal, rotary,

lobe). 3) Item 25 - Drive Type (for example, shaft, belt, gear). 4) Item 26 - Orientation (vertical, horizontal). 5) Item 27- Size of Inlet X Outlet Flange Size (in inches) 6) Item 28 - Number of Stages 7) Item 29 - Impeller Size (in inches) and Material 8) Item 30 - Rated Nominal RPM 9) Item 31 - Rated Total Dynamic Discharge Head, Pressure (in feet or PSI)

b. Valves: 1) Item 32 - Valve Size (in inches) 2) Item 33 - Function (regulating, isolation, control) 3) Item 34 - Operator Type (hydraulic, motor, pneumatic, manual) 4) Item 35 - Valve Type (globe, gate, needle, ball, plug) 5) Item 36 - Body Material (brass, 304L, CS) 6) Item 37 - Disc or Gate Material 7) Item 38 - Packing Material (Teflon, graphitic) 8) Item 39 - Fail Position (as-is, FO, FS) 9) Item 40 - Relief Set Point (relief and vacuum valves only)

c. Other Mechanical Equipment, as applicable: 1) Item 41 - Nameplate Rated CFM 2) Item 42 - Nameplate Rated PSI 3) Item 43 - Rated RPM 4) Item 44 - Gear Drive Ratio 5) Item 45 - Pressure in Inches of Water Column (in inches). 6) Item 46 - Fan Diameter, Scroll Diameter, Gearbox size (in inches). 7) Item 47 - HVAC Heating/Cooling Capacity (BTU, tons) 8) Item 48 - System Relief Set Point 9) Item 49 - Rated Lifting Capacity for Cranes and Lifting Equipment (in pounds).

d. Motors and Generators: 1) Item 50 - Motor Type (squirrel cage, induction) 2) Item 51 - Rated Horsepower 3) Item 52 - Nominal voltage required or produced (in VAC or VDC) 4) Item 53 - Unit of Measure of volts (VAC or VDC) 5) Item 54 - Nominal Rotation Speed (in RPM) 6) Item 55 - Rated Amps at Full Load 7) Item 56 - Rated Kilowatts for generators (in KW or KVA) 8) Item 57 - Unit of Measure for Kilowatts (KW or KVA) 9) Item 58 - Number of Phases required or produced (in PH) 10) Item 59 - Actual Service Factor of the motor (in SF) 11) Item 60 - Frame Size 12) Item 61 - Number of Poles


e. VFDs and VSDs: 1) Item 62 - Control Signal (range) 2) Item 63 - HP Rating 3) Item 64 - Input-Output Voltage Rating 4) Item 65 - Output Amps (min, max) 5) Item 66 - Frequency (min, max) 6) Item 67 - Speed (min, max)

f. Electrical Equipment: 1) Item 68 - Nominal Voltage Required for Equipment Listed, (in VAC) 2) Item 69 - Secondary Voltage Provided, if transformer (in VAC) 3) Item 70 - Number of Phases Required or Produced (in PH) 4) Item 71 - Nameplate KVA, if appropriate. 5) Item 72 - Motor Starter Class 6) Item 73 - Control Fuse Numbers, for all switchgear 7) Item 74 - Overload Type 8) Item 75 - Transformer, specify if it is oil filled or air cooled 9) Item 76 - Transformer, specify if “Y” or Delta

g. Instrumentation and Controls: 1) Item 77 - Scale 2) Item 78 - Input Signal Range, Impulse, or Contact State 3) Item 79 - Output Signal Range, Impulse or Contact State 4) Item 80 - Engineering Unit (PSI, degrees, feet, etc.) 5) Item 81 - Device Input Connection Type (ex. ¼” NPT) 6) Item 82 - Unit of Measure for Device Input 7) Item 83 - Device Output Connection Type (ex. 4-20 mA shielded) 8) Item 84 - Unit of Measure for Device Output 9) Item 85 - Power Required (in VAC or VDC) 10) Item 86 - UOM for Power Required (VAC, VDC) 11) Item 87 - Absolute Elevation in Inches that the sensing area of equipment is

installed (in inches)

3.02 SUBMIT TO PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

A. Submit an initial completed Form 01725-A for all installed assets prior to Factory Operational Testing of MOCU. Factory Operational Testing may proceed during the County's review of the 01725-A Submittal and any required resubmittals.

B. Commissioning shall not commence on any equipment until the 01725-A Submittal has received a Review Action of either “1” (No Exceptions Taken) or “2” (Note Markings).

C. Prior to final acceptance, update Form 01725-A for any review markings and asset changes during testing or commissioning and submit the final version in electronic format. Final Acceptance for the contract shall not be granted until the final 01725-A Submittal has received a Review Action of “1” (No Exceptions Taken).

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01730 - 1 Operation and Maintenance Information and Manuals

SECTION 01730

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION AND MANUALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies operating and maintenance (O&M) information and manuals.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide O&M Information from the original equipment manufacturer at these project development phases. 1. Provide preliminary O&M information with the original equipment product data submittal for

all assets listed on the Asset Data Form 01725-A (Section 01725). 2. Prior to beginning the Factory Component Testing per Section 01660, provide Initial O&M

Submittal including all components being tested. 3. After completion of commissioning but prior to final acceptance by the County, provide

complete Final O&M Manuals for all components including MOCU being accepted.

1.03 CONTENT

A. Where specified, provide O&M information for equipment and material. Provide the following items of information: 1. Names and addresses of the manufacturer, the nearest representative of the

manufacturer, and the nearest supplier(s) of the manufacturer's equipment and parts. 2. Significant design criteria including pertinent calculations used in designing, selecting, or

verifying the suitability of the installed equipment. 3. Performance data and curves: manufacturer's certified performance data and curves when

specified in the Contract; otherwise, manufacturer's catalog performance data and curves. 4. Lubrication information: manufacturer's recommendations regarding the lubricants to be

used and lubrication schedule to be followed. 5. Control diagrams: include diagrams for internal and connection wiring. 6. Installation and startup procedures: manufacturer's recommendations for installation,

adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting. 7. Operating procedures: manufacturer's recommended step-by-step procedures for starting,

operating, and stopping the equipment under specified modes of operation. 8. Preventive maintenance procedures: manufacturer's recommended steps and schedules

for maintaining the equipment. 9. Overhaul instructions and required parts and materials: manufacturer's directions for the

disassembly, repair, and reassembly of the equipment, parts and any safety precautions that must be observed while performing the work. a. Overhaul parts list: manufacturer's recommendations of manufacturer's part numbers

and quantity of parts which should be stored by the County and special storage precautions which may be required for a complete overhaul, as well as the generic title, description and manufacturer's part number of each component part of the equipment.

b. Exploded view or plan and section views: detailed plan and section views of equipment shall be provided when exploded views are not available. All views shall have detailed part callouts matching those callouts of the manufacturer's overhaul parts list. Exploded or cut views of equipment shall be provided, if available, as a standard item of the manufacturer's information.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BINDER MATERIALS

A. Binders for final bound O&M manuals: 1. 3-post. 2. Durable covers with metal piano hinges and locking slide bar assembly. 3. Capable of extending to a maximum 5-inch thickness. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers

a. Specialty Loose Leaf Inc. Model 98086 b. Oxford Esselte C619-3 c. Approved Equal

2.02 ELECTRONIC MATERIALS

A. Electronic copies of material on USB flash drive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY O&M INFORMATION SUBMITTAL

A. Provide O&M information adequate to insure the equipment: 1. is packaged and shipped correctly, 2. is stored and maintained properly per manufacturer’s recommendations, 3. is installed per manufacturer’s recommendations, 4. is maintained properly prior to commissioning 5. is fully tested and started per manufacturer’s recommendation, 6. Is maintained properly until accepted by the County.

B. Maintain and provide all records documenting the maintenance provided by the Contractor prior to commissioning.

3.02 INITIAL O&M SUBMITTAL

A. Manufacturer's standard brochures and O&M manuals, used to describe the equipment and the O&M procedures, shall be modified to reflect only the model or series of equipment used. Extraneous material shall be crossed out neatly or otherwise annotated or eliminated.

B. Photocopies of manufacturer's standard brochures and manuals will not be approved for the final bound sets.

C. Facsimile paper or photocopies of facsimile information will not be allowed.

D. Disposition of O&M information will be noted on the returned submittals. Only O&M information with a disposition of “1” or “2” shall be included in the O&M final bound sets.

E. Operational Testing of MOCU shall not start until Initial O&M information of MOCU equipment is submitted and receives a disposition of "1" or "2".

3.03 FIELD CHANGES

A. Following the accepted operational testing of MOCU equipment, the item's instructions and procedures shall be modified and supplemented to reflect field changes or additional field data information.


3.04 FINAL SUBMISSIONS

A. Provide: 1. Three complete individually bound sets of the approved O&M information 2. Two complete copies in a bookmarked and searchable PDF file on USB flash drive of the

approved, bound O&M information. Bookmarks shall be the same as the items in the Table of Contents.

3. The information shall be organized in the binders in numerical order by the Specification Sections. All brochures and manuals contained therein shall be appropriately labeled with the applicable equipment name and equipment number as it appears in the Contract Documents, and shall also indicate the Specification Section.

4. Each complete bound set and electronic file shall contain a table of contents and spare parts information and shall be provided with tab sheets to permit easy location of the desired sections of the manual.

5. Each complete bound set and electronic file shall contain an index that includes a complete equipment list in alpha-numerical order by the equipment numbers assigned in the Contract Documents with the information required in Section 01725. Each equipment number shall be cross-referenced to the applicable Specification Section tab located in the manuals.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01740 - 1 Guaranty and Warranty

SECTION 01740

GUARANTY AND WARRANTY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies Contractor responsibilities and procedures for product and equipment guaranty/warranty under this Contract. Requirements below are supplemental to those stated in ITB Section 4 Specific Contractual Terms and Conditions.

B. Specific guaranty/warranty beyond the one year guaranty/warranty period is indicated in the individual Specification sections.

C. For the purpose of this Contract, the terms Warranty and Guaranty are interchangeable and use of one term shall mean the other as if it were used.

1.02 DETERMINATION OF WARRANTY DATES

A. The guaranty/warranty date(s) shall be upon Final Acceptance.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DOCUMENTATION

A. Warranty dates and the durations of the warranty period shall be recorded and submitted on the New Assets Information form 01725-A as specified in section 01725.

B. The warranty information shall be documented by Specification section in the same order as presented in the operations and maintenance manuals.

C. Vendor information including point-of-contact, company name, company address, and company emergency phone number shall be included for applicable equipment and components of the facility.

3.02 WARRANTY RESPONSE

A. The Project Representative shall be the point-of-contact for response to warranty related issues during the warranty period.

B. Upon notification of need for warranty response, provide written notification to the King County initiator, indicating scheduled time of response, so that King County personnel may be scheduled to be on hand to provide assistance, and witness the response and/or repair.

C. Items requiring warranty response within the warranty period will have a completely new warranty period established from the time of repair. Upon completion of the repair, provide written verification of the newly established warranty period to the Project Representative.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01750 - 1 Spare Parts

SECTION 01750

SPARE PARTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section summarizes the requirements for turnover of spare parts listed in Division 5 through Division 16. More specific information pertaining to types and quantities of the spare parts is provided in the individual Sections.

B. All the following sections contain requirements for spare parts. 1. Section 13231, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Horizontal Flow Odor Control Tanks 2. Section 13585, Mobile Odor Control Unit (MOCU) 3. Section 15828, Centrifugal Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Fans and Blowers 4. Section 16158, 480 VAC Variable Frequency Drive 5-500 Horsepower.

1.02 STORAGE

A. Until delivery, be responsible for the storage and protection of spare parts and equipment required in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Store on pallets or shipping skids, and identify as follows: 1. The pallets or skids shall be sequentially numbered, by ITB number. Each pallet or skid

shall have a single, unique numerical designation. 2. Items or containers on each skid shall be alphabetically ordered and identified by a tag with

the following information. The containers or items on each pallet or skid shall always begin with "A", and proceed in alphabetical order. (Example: If pallet #007 has five items on it, the items would be individually tagged and identified as 007-A, 007-B, 007-C, 007-D, and 007-E.)

3. The information recorded on the tags shall be in the same order in which the spare parts are turned over. Any reorganization of parts or containers on pallets must be reflected in accurate identification tags. Pallets, parts, or equipment with inaccurate, incomplete, or missing tags, will not be accepted.

4. Spare parts subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical components shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. The quality of protection shall be equal to that required for shipment overseas and storage in humid, tropical climates.

5. Those spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2'-0"W x 1'-6"H x 3'-0"L shall be stored in a heavy wooden boxes, with a hinged wooden cover. The hinges shall be heavy-duty strap types. Paint and identify boxes with stenciled lettering indicating "Spare Parts". A neatly typed inventory of the parts contained within shall be taped inside in a heavy-duty plastic protective sleeve to the underside of the cover. The boxes shall be identified as per Paragraph 01750-1.02B.2, and the parts description shall reference the typed inventory list taped to the cover.

6. Provide access to spare parts for inspection while in storage.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY AND TURNOVER OF SPARE PARTS

A. All required spare parts shall be delivered at the same time and location as the MOCUs. See Section 01600.

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 01750 - 2 Spare Parts

B. Provide 2 weeks written advance notification of intent to turn over all spare parts. The written notification shall be accompanied by a completed Spare Parts Release Form 01750-A.

C. Provide off-loading of spare parts at a County location, as determined by the Project Representative.

D. Jointly inspect spare parts with the Project Representative and verify condition and quantities. Mutual agreement and signoff on the Spare Parts Release Form 01750-A shall constitute turnover of the spare parts.

3.02 DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide an electronic copy of the Spare Parts Release Form in Microsoft Excel software 2010 or newer and one hard copy to the Project Representative with the spare parts.

B. Include the Spare Parts Release Form in the final bound operations and maintenance (O&M) manual. Include mention of the Spare Parts Release Form in the manual Table of Contents.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobil Odor Control Unit 01999 - 1 Standard Forms

SECTION 01999

STANDARD FORMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Be responsible for completing the documentation forms for tests and evaluations required of the Contract.

B. Contractor-generated forms as otherwise required to document the work shall follow the format established on Form 01999A.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Completed forms as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMS

THE FORMS LISTED BELOW ARE REFERENCED FROM OTHER SECTIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENT AND ARE TO BE USED TO DOCUMENT THE CONTRACT WORK AS NEEDED. FORMS ARE NOT ATTACHED TO THIS SECTION. FORMS CAN BE OBTAINED FROM THE PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE UPON REQUEST.

A. Division 1 3. 01300-A Submittal/Transmittal Form 4. 01300-B Substitution Request Form 6. 01660-A Equipment Test Data Form 7. 01660-B Training Attendance Form 8. 01660-C Training Procedure Documentation Form 9. 01660-D System Testing Deficiency Documentation Form 10. 01660-E System Punch-list Documentation Form 11. 01725-A New Assets Data Form 12. 01740-A Guarantee Documentation Form 13. 01750-A Spare Parts Release Form 14. 01999-A Standard Form Format

B. Division 9 1. 09900 Daily Paint Inspection Form

C. Division 11 1. 11000-A Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form 2. 11000-B Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form 3. 11000-C Unit Responsibility Form 4. 11060-A Motor Data Form

D. Division 15 1. 15050 Pipe Test Data Form

E. Division 16 1. 16000-A Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form 2. 16000-B Installed Motor Test Data Form 3. 16000-C Dry Transformer Test Form 4. 16000-D Motor Control Center Test Form 5. 16000-E Medium Voltage Starter Test Form 6. 16000-F Medium Voltage Switchgear Test Form

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobil Odor Control Unit 01999 - 2 Standard Forms

7. 16000-G Protective Relay Test Form 8. 16000-H Low Voltage Switchgear Test Form 9. 16000-L Neutral Grounding Resistor Test Form

F. As Required for full documentation of the work


END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 05500 - 1 Metal Fabrications

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies fabricated metal items and other miscellaneous metalwork, steel galvanized or coated, stainless steel, and aluminum.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531-00 Metal Bar Grating Manual ASME BPVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Welding and Brazing

Qualifications ASTM A36 Structural Steel ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and

Seamless ASTM A108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanize) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,

Sheet and Strip ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-

Temperature Service ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and

High-Temperature Service, or Both ASTM A240 Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet

and Strip for Pressure Vessels ASTM A242 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A312 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless steel Pipes ASTM A320 Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service ASTM A325 Structural Bolt, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum

Tensile Strength ASTM A479 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Pressure Vessels ASTM A496 Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A588 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, up to 50 Ksi{345 Mpa}

Minumum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance ASTM A606-04 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-rolled and

Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistence ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized

Coatings


Reference Title ASTM A786 Rolled Steel Floor Plates ASTM A793 Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel ASTM A847 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, Low Alloy

Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B210 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes ASTM B211 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless

Extruded Tube ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM B632 Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate ASTM B695 Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel ASTM F844 Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code of the American Welding Society AWS D1.2 Aluminum AWS D1.6 Stainless steel AWS E70 Filler Material SSPS SP-5 White Metal Blast Cleaning ASTM F593 Stainless steel Fasteners

B. Shop and field welding shall conform to the requirements of: 1. Tanks: ASME BPVC for low pressure. 2. All other fabrications: AWS D1.1, AWS D1.2, and AWS D1.6 minimum.

C. The use of salvaged, reprocessed or scrap materials will not be permitted.

D. All welding: by: 1. Tanks: ASME Section IX certified welders. 2. All other fabrications: ASME Section IX or WABO certified welders.

E. Observation of Work: The Project Representative shall have access to any fabrication site or shop for the purpose of observing fabrication of items, structures, equipment, piping, electrical and other components which will be used in or incorporated in the work.

F. Notification of Start of Work: Notify the Project Representative in advance of the start of fabrication. For fabrication sites within 200 miles of Seattle, provide 7 days notice. For fabrication sites greater than 200 miles from Seattle, provide schedule of start of work for the Project Representative’s approval.

G. Notification of Finish Work: Notify the Project Representative in advance of applying finish. For fabrication sites within 200 miles of Seattle, provide 7 days notice. For fabrication sites greater than 200 miles from Seattle, provide schedule of start of finish work for the Project Representative’s approval.


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specifications.

C. Detailed shop drawings for fabrication. Including dimensions and materials.

D. Welding/welding operator ASME Section IX and WABO certificates and qualifications for the work being performed.

E. Welding procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Sheets, plates and shapes ASTM A36 Pipe ASTM A53, Grade B Square/rectangular tubing ASTM A500, Grade B Headed Anchor Studs ASTM A108 Deformed anchor bars ASTM A496 or A615 Bolts ASTM A307, Grade A Nuts ASTM A563 Washers ASTM F844

B. Stainless Steel: Sheets and plates ASTM A240, Type 316 or 316L Shapes, bars, and similar items ASTM A479, Type 316 or 316L Pipe ASTM A312, Type 316 or 316L Headed Anchor Studs ASTM A193 or A320, Type 316 Bolts ASTM A193 or A320, Type 316 Nuts ASTM A194, Type 316 Washers Type 316

C. Aluminum: Sheets and plates ASTM B209, Type 6061-T6 Bars, flats and similar items ASTM B211 or B221, Type 6061-T6 Shapes ASTM B221 or B308, Type 6061-T6 Round tubing and pipe ASTM 210 or B221, Type 6061-T6 Square and rectangular tubing Type 6063-T52 Pipe ASTM B211 or B241, Type 6061-T6* Bolts ASTM A193 or A320, Type 316 Nuts ASTM A194, Type 316 Washers Type 316

D. Checkered Plate: Steel ASTM A786 Stainless steel ASTM A793, Type 304 Aluminum ASTM B632, Type 6061-T6


E. Weathering Steel: Structural shapes, plates and bars ASTM A588 A242 (AR400) Steel plates less than ½ IN thick ASTM A242 (AR200), ASTM A588 Steel sheet and coil ASTM A606-04 Steel tube and pipe ASTM A500, Grade B, ASTM A847 Fasteners Stainless Steel Grade 410 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers ASTM A325, Type 3 bolts (COR-TEN X) Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded

F. Metal Bar Grating: 1. Metal Bar Grating shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 for galvanized

welded steel grating. All grating: banded unless noted otherwise. 2. NAAMM MBG 531. 3. Minimum depth: 2 IN. 4. Minimum rectangular bearing bar size:

a. 1/8 IN. b. Maximum 1-3/16 IN OC spacing. c. Align bearing bars horizontally. d. Align bearing bars between adjacent panels. e. Maximum deflection: 1/300 of span under a superimposed live load of 50 psf.

5. Cross bars: a. Pressure locked to bearing beam. b. Maximum spacing 4 IN/OC. c. Install cross bars on side away from view.

6. Finish: a. All components, clips, bolts and angles to be powder coated. b. Color: Bronze, as selected by Engineer.

2.02 ANCHORAGE

A. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication.

2.03 LIFTING LUGS

A. Individual equipment and/or each field disassemblable part weighing in excess of 50 pounds: fitted with lifting lugs for easy handling.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. As listed in Section 05500, 2.01.

B. Finish: unless otherwise indicated, steel bolts, screws, nuts, washers and all other steel fasteners: mechanically zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 50.

C. Thread lubricant for stainless steel fasteners: where stainless steel bolts and threaded fasteners are used, apply anti-seizing lubricant to the threads prior to making up the connections. Lubricant: manufactured and labeled for use with stainless steel and shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc or copper.


2.05 FINISH

A. Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Steel items: coated as indicated in Section 09900. 2. Stainless steel: none. 3. Aluminum: coated as indicated in Section 09900.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify measurements at the site.

B. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

C. Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.

3.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabrications: Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 for steel, AWS D1.2 for aluminum, and AWS D1.6 for stainless steel minimum.

B. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt-tight, flush, and hairline. Remove all burrs and weld splatter. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

C. Punch holes 1/16-inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Whenever needed because of the thickness of the metal, subpunch and ream or drill holes.

D. Perform fabrication including cutting, drilling, punching, threading and tapping required for miscellaneous metal or adjacent work prior to hot-dip galvanizing.

3.03 FINISH

A. Welds and adjacent are to be prepared such that there are: 1. No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld beads. 2. No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted. 3. No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead.

B. All embedded pieces of electrode or wire and the adjacent weld: removed and replaced with new welds.

C. Obtain Project Representatives approval before applying finish.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb, level and square, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Allow for erection loads and provide temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Fieldwork shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Drilling of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be allowed.

D. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators.


E. Seat angles, supports and guides: Set seat angles for grating and supports for floor plates so that they maintain the grating and floor pates flush with the floor.

3.05 FIELD REPAIR OF COATINGS

A. Galvanized: 1. Maximum area to be repaired: no more than 1/2 of 1 percent of the surface area or 36 sq. in. per

ton of piece weight, whichever is less. Damage in excess of this requirement: repaired by stripping and recoating entire piece.

2. Clean damaged areas to SSPC-SP5. Repair with zinc-rich paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with ASTM A780, Annex A2. Minimum thickness requirements: in accordance with ASTM A123, Paragraph 6.2.3.

3. Use zinc-rich repair paint. 4. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. ZRC Galvilite. b. LPS Cold Galvanize c. Approved equal.

B. Painted: after installation, clean and touch up damaged areas of with the same materials used for the shop coat.

3.06 ELECTROLYTIC CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Coat all surfaces of aluminum that are to be in contact with dissimilar metals as specified in Section 09900.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 05520 - 1 Metal Handrails

SECTION 05520

METAL HANDRAILS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies aluminum folding handrails (guard rails), roof access ladder, and access steps fabrication as shown.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ASTM B241 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and

Seamless Extruded Tube IBC International Building Code SSPC Society for Protective Coatings OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration WISHA Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide MOCU’s roof folding handrails, access ladder, and access steps layout, fabrication and installation detail drawings, as shown on the drawings. Fabrication drawings shall include handrails folding mechanism, support base attachment system to the roof of FRP odor control tank and metal enclosures, as shown on the drawings.

C. Provide MOCU’s roof access ladder fabrication and installation shop drawings. Drawings to include ladder dimensions, support base attachment system to the metal enclosure, ladder extension folding handle details as shown on the drawing.

D. Provide list of materials.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Folding handrails, roof access ladder, and steps shall meet the requirements of the standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the Division of Industrial Safety and Health of the State of Washington, and the IBC.

B. Folding handrails shall be designed to operate manually and shall be locked in flat or up-right positions, as shown on the drawings.

C. All fabrication drawings shall be prepared and signed by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington.


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Prevent modules and components from scratching and denting during delivery, fabrication, storage, and installation. Cushion wrap complete rails, leave wrap intact, insofar as possible, until railing is completely installed for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide kik-plates at handrails of materials matching the guardrails.

B. Handrails fabrication and dimensions shall fit the MOCU roof layout per approved fabrication submittals. The handrails shall be fabricated prior to installation and attachment to base connections.

C. Handrails folding mechanism and attachment to the FRP odor control tank and fan and electrical rooms metal enclosure shall be per approved fabrication submittals.

2.02 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEM

A. Handrails shall be custom design and fabrication as needed for the MOCUs roof layout, as shown. Contractor shall submit the handrails design drawings for Project Representative’s approval prior to fabrication.

B. Materials: 1. Rails and posts: ASTM B241, Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6. 2. Fittings: cast aluminum elbows, T-shapes, floor brackets, escutcheons. 3. Splice connectors: aluminum concealed spigot. 4. Bolts, nuts, washers: ASTM A320, Type 304 stainless steel.

C. Finishes: clear anodized in accordance with the Aluminum Association AA-M32-C22-A41. Anodize exposed components, except stainless steel fasteners, after fabrication.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fit the folding handrails to the MOCUs roof layout.

B. Pipe cuts shall be clean, straight, square, and accurate for minimum joint gap. Perform work in conformance with the handrail manufacturing standards. Work shall be free from blemishes, defects, and misfits that can affect durability, strength, or appearance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, punch holes 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts. Whenever needed because of the thickness of the metal, subpunch and ream or drill holes. Replace pieces with mismatched holes. No drifting of bolts or enlargement of holes will be allowed to correct misalignment.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication.

E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt-tight, flush and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small, uniform radius.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify measurements, verify folding handrails locking mechanisms, verify the folding handrails operation for both flat and up-right positions.

B. Provide handrails (guardrails) push on safeguards as needed to have supports for the handrails where there are conflicts with the MOCUs roof access hatches, as shown on the drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators.

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 06510-1 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

SECTION 06510

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP)

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general requirements for fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) including items fabricated with both polyester and epoxy resins.

B. Equipment-specific requirements are detailed in other sections of the contract documents pertaining to specific equipment. This section is to be used in conjunction with the other related equipment specification sections and the drawings. If conflict, the specific equipment specification shall govern.

C. FRP materials and associated hardware shall be suitable for continuous operation with air containing corrosive and flammable vapors and gases generated from the treatment and conveyance of municipal wastewater and stabilization and dewatering of solids from municipal wastewater treatment processes. Vapors and gases may be expected to include methane, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide, gasoline vapors, ammonia, and water-saturated air. The airstream also may be expected to contain droplets of diluted sulfuric acid. Air temperatures are expected to vary between 50 degrees F and 130 degrees F

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following

documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section X, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels Pressure Vessel Code

ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service

ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics

ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

ASTM D883 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics

ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor

ASTM D3299 Specification for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

NIST PS 15-6 Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical-Resistant Process Equipment

ASTM D4097 Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks


NIST PS15-69 Thermoset Resin Chemical-Resistant Tanks The Society of the Recommended

Practice for Shipping and Installation of Plastics Industry, Inc. Reinforced Plastic Pipe, Duct, and Tanks

NFPA No. 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Test Tolerances:

a. The average value of each of the tests performed on sample specimens for each individual FRP item shall satisfy the requirements set forth in: 1) Table A, Hardness Requirements for Resins. 2) Table B, Minimum Requirements for Laminate Fabrication, ASTM D3299 and PS 15-69.

b. Should an individual FRP item be found deficient in any of the tests, the testing laboratory shall select a second series of sample specimens as specified in Paragraph 06510-1.02C.1.a and shall perform all tests on these specimen coupons. Failure of the second series of coupons to satisfy the physical requirements shall constitute cause for rejection of that individual FRP item.

Table A - Hardness Requirements for Resins a Barcol hardness, c Resins b minimum average Type A (non-fire resistant) Atlac 382 30 Atlac 382 (4010A) d 35 Atlac 580 30 Derakane 411-45d 30 Derakane 470-36 40 Dion Cor-Res 6694 30 Dion Cor-Res 7000d 30 Hetron 197 40

Type A (fire-resistant)

Atlac 711-05A plus 3% antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 30 Atlac 797AT plus 3% antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 40 Derakane 510N 30 Derakane 510A-40 plus 5% antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 30 Dion Cor-Res 6695 plus 3% antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 30 Hetron 92 FR 40 Hetron 197 plus 5% antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 40 Hetron 800 FR 40

Type B (fire-resistant)

Aropol 7240 40 Atlac 400 35 Dion/SO 6631 40


Type B (fire-resistant)

Atlac 793 plus 5 percent antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 30 Dion Cor-Res 6693 plus 5 percent antimony trioxide (Sb2O3) 30

Notes: 1) For resins not listed, Barcol hardness shall be at least 90 percent of the resin manufacturer's

minimum specified hardness for the cured resin. 2) For description of Types A and B resins, refer to Paragraph 06510-2.01A. 3) Determined with Barcol impressor, Model GYZJ 934-1 calibrated at 2 points in accordance

with ASTM D2583. 4) Resins that shall be used for filament-winding construction.

Table B - Minimum Requirements for Laminate Fabrication by Contact Molding, Matched Die Molding, and Filament Winding

Method of Laminate Fabrication

Property Laminate Thickness, inches

3/16 & less

1/4 5/16 3/18 & up

Contact molded, and matched die molded

Glass content percent0 25-30 30-34 34-38 38-42

Filament wound process Glass content percent 25-30 30-34 34-38 38-42 Ultimate tensile

strength, a psi 40,000 40,000 40,000 40,000

Modulus of elasticity (tangent), b psi

3x10 6 3x10 6 3x10 6 32x10 6

NOTES: 5) Minimum hoop tensile strength. 6) Minimum hoop tensile modulus of elasticity.

2. Product Tolerances: a. General: Reject any FRP specialty item that does not satisfy the tolerances specified in this

Section. b. Section Uniformity: Wall, flange and edge thickness shall be uniform to within +1/32 of an inch in

12 inches. c. Color: Items of a similar nature or subassemblies of a single unit shall be similar in color. d. Out-of-Round and Parallel:

1) Unless otherwise indicated, the out-of-round tolerance for cylindrical sections 12 inches in diameter and greater shall be 1/2 that listed in NBS PS-15 for ductwork. The out-of-round tolerance for cylindrical sections smaller than 12 inches in diameter shall be as listed in NBS PS-15.

2) Out-of-parallel tolerance for rectangular and square sections shall be as specified for out-of-round.

e. Flanges: 1) Flange faces shall be flat and true to a tolerance of +1/32-inch for tanks, and 1 percent of

the nominal diameter or 1/8-inch for ducts, whichever is less. 2) Variation in manhole flange thickness shall be within +1/16-inch. Variations in all other

flanges shall be within +1/32-inch. Tolerance in bolt hole locations and in bolt circle diameter shall be within +1/16-inch.


f. Surfaces: Tolerances for defects on the surface of FRP items are specified in Table C of this a Section.

Table C - Allowable Product Surface Tolerances Defect Surface Inspected Cracks Process Side Non-process Side Crazing (fine surface cracks)

None Max. length: /2-inch Max. density: 5 per sq. ft. Min. separation: 2-inch

Blisters (rounded elevations of the laminate surface over bubbles)

None Max. dimension: 1/4-inch dia x 1/8-inch high Max. density: 1 per sq ft. Min. separation: 2-inch apart

Wrinkles and solid blisters Max. deviation: 10% of wall thickness, but not exceeding 1/8-inch

Max. deviation: 10% of wall thickness, but not exceeding 1/8-inch

Pits (craters in the laminate surface)

Max. dimension: 1/8-inch dia. x 1/32-inch deep Max. number: 10 per sq. ft.

Max. dimension: 1/8-inch dia. x 1/16-inch deep Max. density: 10 per sq.ft.

Surface porosity (pin holes or pores in the laminate surface)

None None

Chips None Max. Dimension of break: 1/4 inch and thickness no greater than 10% of wall thickness Max. density: 1 per sq ft

Dry spot (nonwetted reinforcing)

None Max. dimension: 2 sq inch per sq ft Max. dimension of break: 1/4-inch and thickness no greater than 10% of wall thickness

Entrapped air (bubbles or voids in the laminate)

Max. dia.: 1/16-inch Max. density: 10 per sq. inch but none to a depth of 1/32 -inch

Max. dia. and density: /8-inch and 4 sq inch or 1/16-inch and 10 per sq inch

Exposed glass None None Burned areas None None Exposure of cut edges None None Scratches None Max. length: 1 inch

Max. depth: 0.010-inch Foreign matter None None

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer and method of fabrication.

C. Materials selected for laminates to be furnished for project.

D. Manufacturer's shop drawings.

E. Installation procedures, including field-jointing techniques.


1.04 PRODUCT SHIPPING, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Be responsible for proper packaging and protection of all materials to prevent damage during shipping,

handling and storage.

B. As material arrives on site, it will be inspected for compliance with "Recommended Practices for Shipping and Installation of Reinforced Plastic Pipe, Duct and Tanks". The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Resins: 1. General:

a. Resins used for FRP specialties exposed to view shall contain antimony compounds or other fire retardant agents and shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less based on ASTM E84.

b. No thixotropic agent shall be added to resins used for a corrosion barrier. 1) Up to 2 percent by weight of thixotropic agent may be added for viscosity control of resins

not used for a corrosion barrier. The quantity of thixotropic agent added, however, shall not interfere with visual inspection of the laminate.

2) No other fillers to the resin, including pigments, dyes and colorants, shall be permitted, unless approved in writing by the Project Representative.

2. Type A Resin: a. Shall provide sufficient chemical resistance under the corrosive environments listed in the

detailed specifications for FRP structures and equipment. b. Where specified, shall also meet flame spread requirements as given in Paragraph 06510-

2.01A.1. c. Shall be selected from the resins listed in Table A of this Section.

3. Type B Resin: a. Shall be suitable for weather-resistant, non-corrosive chemical service and, where specified,

shall meet flame spread requirements as given in Paragraph 06510-2.01A.1. b. Shall be selected from the resins listed in Table A of this Section. c. Type A resins may be substituted for Type B resins.

B. Reinforcement: 1. General: Glass reinforcement shall be Type C, chemical glass, or Type E, electrical glass, as

specified. 2. Surfacing Veil:

a. Type C glass surfacing mat with silane finish and styrene-soluble barrier. b. Thickness: 10 to 20 mils for all applications, except those involving exposure to chlorine or

hypochlorite solutions, where a minimum 20-mils thickness shall be employed. c. Surfacing veils for applications where the glass may be attacked by compounds in the process

shall be a suitable spun-laced synthetic organic entangled fiber fabric, such as Nexus, not less than 20 mils in thickness, backed by chopped strand in a Type A resin.

3. Chopped Strand Mat: Type E glass, 1-1/2 oz/sq ft with silane finish and a styrene-soluble binder. 4. Continuous Roving:

a. That used in chopper guns for spray-up shall be Type E glass with chrome finish or silane coupling agent.

b. Continuous roving used for filament winding shall be Type E glass with silane-type finish. 5. Woven Roving: Type E glass, 24 oz/sq yd, 4 by 5 weave, with silane-type finish. 6. Woven Cloth: Type E glass with silane-type finish.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Stainless Steel: Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel nuts, bolts, washers, hangers and

miscellaneous fabricated parts shall be ANSI Type 316. 2. Gaskets: Unless otherwise indicated, gaskets shall be neoprene.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Ship, install, join and erect FRP specialties under the direction of factory-trained specialists.

B. Where jointing is required, employ workers who have been trained in proper jointing techniques by the FRP manufacturer's representative.

C. Affix to fabricated equipment a warning reading "Plastic Equipment Handle with Care", stenciled on two sides in letters a minimum of 2 inches high.

3.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate FRP items by the contact molding, filament winding, or pultrusion method.

1. Contact Molding: Unless otherwise indicated, contact-molding fabrication shall be in conformance with NBS PS-15. Perform lay-up in the following sequence: a. Provide an interior surface corrosion barrier consisting of the laminate specified in Paragraphs

2 and 3. Laminate thickness shall be 100-mils minimum. Do not use a separately cured, unreinforced gel coat.

b. Make the interior surface resin-rich, smooth and reinforced with a 10- to 20-mil Type C glass-surfacing veil saturated with Type A resin.

c. Cover the interior surface layer with a minimum of 3 ounces per square foot of chopped strand mat and resin in 2 plies of 1 1/2-ounce mat saturated with Type A resin.

d. Allow corrosion liner laminate consisting of the layers specified in Paragraphs 2 and 3 to gel. e. For laminates of 3/16-inch nominal thickness, continue mat plies or spray- as required with

adequate rollout between the application of each chopped pass or mat. f. For laminates of 1/4-inch nominal and thicker, apply mat (1-1/2 ounces per square foot) or

spray-up and woven roving (24-1/2 ounces per square yard, 5 x 4 weave) to the total required to achieve the desired nominal thickness. 1) Two adjacent plies of woven roving will not be permitted. 2) Roll out each ply or pass. 3) Include at least 1 ply of woven roving for reinforcement for laminates having a nominal

thickness of 1/4-inch. 4) If interruption of laminate buildup is required for exotherm, such interruption shall be

permitted only after every third ply of woven roving has been laid. g. Provide an exterior surface corrosion barrier of 100 mils minimum thickness for buried FRP

storage tanks and for FRP specialties exposed to corrosive exterior environments. 1) Corrosion barrier shall consist of a 2-pass chop, Type C glass veil and Type A resin as

specified in Paragraphs 2 and 3. 2) Exterior surfaces of FRP specialties not exposed to corrosive environments shall be Type

C glass veil and Type A resin, 15 mils minimum thickness. h. Make the outer surface of the fabricated product relatively smooth and such that no glass

fibers are exposed. i. Incorporate paraffin for full cure in the final coat of resin. j. Lap all edges of reinforcement material to a minimum of 1 inch for mat and 2 inches for woven

roving. Stagger lapped edges of adjacent layers. k. For all cut edges on parts that will make up a secondary joint or will be incorporated into a

finished product, first apply a seal with at least 2 coats of lay-up resin.

B. Filament Winding: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, filament-winding fabrication shall be in conformance with ASTM

D3299. Sequence of laminate construction shall be as follows: a. Provide an interior surface corrosion barrier consisting of the laminate specified in Paragraphs

2 and 3. Laminate thickness shall be 100 mils minimum. Do not use a separately cured unreinforced gel coat.

b. Make surfaces exposed to the fluids to be resin rich, smooth and reinforced with a 10- to 20-mil thick Type C glass veil mat saturated with Type A resin.

c. Follow the inner surfacing layer with a minimum of 3 ounces per square foot or more of


chopped strand mat and resin in a minimum of 2 plies saturated with Type A resin. Glass content of this portion of the laminate shall be 25 to 30 percent by weight. For laminates 1/2-inch and thicker, the nominal 100-mil layer shall have a thickness of at least 90 mils after curing.

d. Subsequent reinforcing shall be resin-saturated, continuous roving, as may be required to satisfy all other requirements of this Specification.

e. Additional chopped roving and resin may be sprayed up between winding cycles to provide improved resistance to interlaminar shear.

f. For underground FRP storage tanks and for FRP specialties exposed to corrosive exterior environments: 1) Provide an exterior surface corrosion barrier of 100 mils minimum thickness. 2) Corrosion barrier shall consist of a 2-pass chop, Type C glass veil and Type A resin as

specified in Paragraphs 2 and 3. 3) Exterior surfaces of FRP specialties not exposed to corrosive exterior environments shall

be Type C glass veil saturated with Type A resin, 15-mils minimum thickness. g. Allow no glass fibers to be exposed on the outer surface. h. Incorporate paraffin for full cure in the final coat of resin. i. Provide a chemical resistant liner consisting of 2 mats and a veil for cut edges exposed to the

chemical environment. Do not use cloth or woven roving for this purpose. j. For all cut edges on parts that will make up a secondary joint or be incorporated into a finished

product, first apply a seal with at least 2 coats of lay-up resin.

3.03 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION PLANS A. Prior to assembly and erection of FRP towers, tanks, stacks and similar structures, provide assembly

and erection plans prepared by the FRP manufacturer.

B. The plans shall provide details on handling, field connections and final installation.

3.04 FIELD JOINTS A. Bell and spigot or butt-strap type.

1. Bell and spigot: a. The provisions of this Section and the detailed specification with respect to surface veils,

laminate thickness and design shall apply to both the bell and spigot without regard to any consideration that they will ultimately be joined to each other.

b. Design bell and spigot to be airtight and watertight. c. Upon completion of jointing, wrap bell and spigot joints with a butt-strap joint as described

below. 2. Butt-strap:

a. Thickness: Not less than 1-1/2 times the longest cross-sectional dimension of the FRP specialty.

b. Shall develop at least 200 percent of the strength of the parent laminate. Notwithstanding this requirement, butt-strap joints shall be comprised of at least 2 layers of surfacing veil plus sufficient reinforcing glass impregnated in the specified barrier resin.

c. Surface preparation, methods of curing, and ultraviolet light protection shall be as specified for the parent laminate.

3.05 DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE AREAS A. Repair damaged or defective areas that are otherwise acceptable.


3.06 TESTING A. Sampling:

1. Cut sample specimens at locations selected by testing laboratory personnel from items fabricated for the project.

2. Take sample specimens at a rate of 1 per 1,000 square feet of surface area, with a minimum of 5 specimens per individual item.

3. An individual FRP item shall be defined as an FRP product that is unique in fabrication and dimension from all other FRP products.

4. Identify sample specimens by item sampled and sampling location. 5. Save cuttings required for nozzles, openings or connections and submit as sample specimens to

be used for testing.

B. Tests: Tests to be performed on each sample specimen may consist of the following from the NIST PS 15:

Glass Content: Subsection 4.3.1 Tensile Strength: Subsection 4.3.2 Flexural Strength: Subsection 4.3.3 Modulus of Elasticity (Tangent): Subsection 4.3.4 Hardness: Subsection 4.3.5

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 06540 - 1 FRP Structural Shapes

SECTION 06540

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) STRUCTURAL SHAPES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) structural shapes including angles, channels, wide-flange beams, I-beams, round tubes, square and rectangular tubes, round rod, and square bar.

B. FRP structural shapes and associated hardware shall be suitable for continuous operation with air containing corrosive and flammable vapors and gases generated from the treatment and conveyance of municipal wastewater and stabilization and dewatering of solids from municipal wastewater treatment processes. Vapors and gases may be expected to include methane, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide, gasoline vapors, ammonia, and water-saturated air. The airstream also may be expected to contain droplets of diluted sulfuric acid. Air temperatures are expected to vary between 50 degrees F and 130 degrees F.


documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ASTM D883 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics ASTM D3647 Standard Practice for Classifying Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes

According to Composition ASTM D3917 Standard Specification for Dimensional Tolerance of Thermosetting

Glass-Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Shapes ASTM D3918 Standard Terminology Relating to Reinforced Plastic Pultruded

Products ASTM D4385 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Thermosetting

Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products ASTM D-638 Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D-790 Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics ASTM D-2344 Apparent Interlaminar Shear Strength of Parallel Fiber Composites by

Short Beam Method ASTM D-696 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion for Plastics ASTM E-84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials NSF/ANSI (National Sanitation Foundation/American National Standards Institute)

STANDARD 61

IBC International Building Code


B. Qualifications: 1. All items to be provided under this Section shall be furnished by a manufacturer having a

minimum of ten (10) years of experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems. Additionally, a record of at least five (5) previous, separate, similar successful installations in the last five (5) years shall be provided.

2. Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001-2008 standard.

3. Manufacturer shall offer a 3 year limited warranty on all FRP products against defects in materials and workmanship.

4. Manufacturer shall provide proof, via independent testing less than six months old, that materials proposed for the intended use do not contain heavy metals in amounts greater than that allowed by current EPA requirements.

5. Manufacturer shall provide test data that demonstrates the FRP pultruded structural shapes comply with the minimum ultimate longitudinal mechanical coupon properties listed below in TABLE B for each lot of material to be used in the final structure.

6. Manufacturer shall provide independent testing data verifying that FRP shapes exhibit good corrosion resistance for exposure to a variety of corrosive liquids and gases normally encountered in the wastewater facility for which the product is intended to be used, taking into account the provision that temperatures may range from 30 to 100 degrees F.

7. FRP Structural Installer: Experience in erecting and installing similar FRP products for at least two similar projects in the last five years.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01300.

B. Qualifications certifications of the FRP structural shapes as specified in this specification section.

C. Qualifications certifications of FRP structural installer as specified in this specification section.

D. Shop drawings clearly showing material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers. Shop drawings to show complete details for the fabrication of and erection of components including, but not limited to, location, lengths, type and sizes including fasteners, clip angles, member sizes, and connection details.

E. Submit structural design data, structural properties data, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports as applicable, and design calculations for systems designed in the contract documents, sealed by a Professional Structural Engineer licensed in Washington State.

F. Shop drawings of all fabricated structural systems and accessories.

G. Certification that the FRP materials supplied under this section are appropriate for application in environment as described in the Paragraph 06540-1.01B.

1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Be responsible for implementation of a comprehensive in-house quality control procedure by the

fabricator of the FRP shapes. The minimum requirements are as follows:

1. Cause the FRP beam fabricator to designate personnel to inspect all equipment while in process and after completion to assure compliance with all aspects of the Contract Documents. Inspection shall include, as a minimum, checks for visual defects, dimensional tolerances, adherence to construction details, surface preparation, and environmental conditions. Submit fabricator's report of findings for each separate assembly.


2. Submit documentation for resin used in manufacturer of FRP shapes, including resin type, resin manufacturer, batch and lot number, drum number; complete listing of all additives with amounts added, and description and manufacturer of each additive.

3. Inspect all glass reinforcement, prior to use in fabrication. Do not use any glass that does not meet the manufacturer's acceptance standards. For each type of glass and lot number used, fabricator shall record the manufacturer, product description, binder type, product code, production date, and lot number.

C. Inspections: 1. The Project Representative shall be permitted access to the FRP structural shapes

fabrication and installation sites during fabrication and installation for the purpose of verifying compliance to the specified requirements. The inspection of any products shall in no way relieve the Contractor of compliance with specified requirements. A final inspection will be performed by the Project Representative when the Contractor certifies that all terms and requirements of the Contract Documents have been satisfied. At least 14 days notice shall be given the Project Representative prior to this inspection.

2. Evidence of poor workmanship or lack of compliance with any requirement of the Contract Documents during inspections will be grounds for rejection of the products.

D. Visual Defects: The visual quality of the pultruded shapes shall conform to ASTM D4385.

E. Product Dimensional Tolerances: The product dimensional tolerances shall conform to ASTM D3917.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured FRP structural shape materials shall be delivered for the

installation in original, unbroken pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility.

B. Storage of Products: All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion, cracking, chipping, twisting, and other types of damage. Store adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit (21 to 29 degrees Celsius) until they are required.


A. All structural shapes are to be manufactured by the pultrusion process with a glass content minimum of 45%, maximum of 55% by weight. The structural shapes shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents and a per approved installation shop drawings submittals.

B. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be a combination of continuous roving, continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application and/or physical properties required.

C. Resins shall be VEFR, fire retardant vinyl ester, with chemical formulation necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as required.

D. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering.


E. All pultruded structural shapes shall be further protected from ultraviolet (UV) attack with 1) integral UV inhibitors in the resin and 2) a synthetic surfacing veil to produce a resin rich surface.

F. Structural Shapes supplied shall meet the minimum dimensional requirements as shown or specified on the Contract Documents including approved installation shop drawings submittals.

G. All FRP products shall have a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test.

2.02 MECHANICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES: A. Pultruded structural shapes shall comply with the minimum ultimate longitudinal mechanical

coupon properties listed below in Table B:

TABLE B - MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Property ASTM Method Value Units

Ultimate Tensile Stress D-638 30,000 (206) psi (MPa)

Tensile Modulus D-638 2.5 x 106 (17.2) psi (GPa)

Ultimate Flexural Stress D-790 30,000 (206) psi (MPa)

Flexural Modulus D-790 1.6 x 106 (11.0) psi (GPa)

Ultimate Short Beam Shear (Transverse)

D-2344 4,500 (31) psi (MPa)

Shear Modulus (Transverse) N/A 4.25 x 105 (2.93) psi (GPa)

Ultimate Compressive Stress D-695 30,000 (206) psi (MPa)

Compressive Modulus D-695 2.5 x 106 (17.2) psi (GPa)

B. Flammability for pultruded structural shapes shall comply with a value of 25 or less when tested per ASTM E84, Tunnel test 1/8” thickness.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. “Dynaform” FRP Structural Shapes as manufactured by Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc., 5151 Belt Line Road, Suite 1212, Dallas, TX.

2. “EXTREN” FRP Structural Shapes as manufactured by Strongwell Corporation, 400 Commonwealth Ave., Bristol, VA.

3. Or Approved Equal.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide and/or verify measurements for the fabrication to fit field conditions to complete the work.

Determine correct size and locations of required cuts, holes or coping from field dimensions before structural shape installation.

B. All shop fabricated cuts or drilling shall be coated with vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance. All field fabricated cuts or drilling shall be coated similarly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Hardware: Provide AISI Type 316 stainless steel hardware for all connections, including rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. unless noted otherwise.


D. Mark and match mark materials for field assembly.

E. Fabricate to agree with field measurements of previously constructed portions of the structure to which FRP members must be attached.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION

A. Install Contractor-designed temporary construction bracing to provide necessary support until components are in place and construction is complete.

B. Establish permanent benchmarks necessary for the accurate erection of the FRP members. Set structural members accurately to lines and elevations shown in Contract Documents and approved shop drawings submittals.

C. Check elevations of all bearing surfaces, coordinate installation of connectors required for securing FRP members to in-place work. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for minor discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

D. Connections: 1. Install bolts, nuts, and washers in accordance with approved shop drawings and

manufacturer’s instructions. Tighten bolted connections per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, immediately notify Project Representative and submit proposed correction method. Correction method shall be approved by the Project Representative prior to proceeding with construction.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 06630 - 1 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Grating

SECTION 06630

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) GRATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) grating.

B. Fabricate grating provided under this section by the flooded-mold process. Grating manufactured by any other method will not be acceptable.

C. FRP grating and associated hardware shall be suitable for continuous operation with air containing corrosive and flammable vapors and gases generated from the treatment and conveyance of municipal wastewater and stabilization and dewatering of solids from municipal wastewater treatment processes. Vapors and gases may be expected to include methane, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide, gasoline vapors, ammonia, and water-saturated air. The airstream also may be expected to contain droplets of diluted sulfuric acid. Air temperatures are expected to vary between 50 degrees F and 130 degrees F


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service

ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics


ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials



ASTM D3299 Specification for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks


National Bureau of Chemical-Resistant

Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester

Standards Voluntary

Process Equipment Standards PS 15-6

ASTM D4097 Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks

NIST PSl5-69 Thermoset Resin Chemical-Resistant Tanks replacement) The Society of the Recommended Practice for Shipping and Installation of Reinforced Plastics Plastic Pipe, Duct, and Tanks Industry, Inc

NFPA No. 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer and method of fabrication.

C. Materials selected for laminates to be furnished for project.

D. Shop drawings of the FRP grating used for MOCUs.

E. Installation procedures, including field-jointing techniques.

F. Manufacturer’s certificate for materials supplied in this section meets the requirements of Paragraph 06630-1.01C.

1.04 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design: 1. Design FRP grating in accordance with the following:

a. A minimum structural safety factor of 5. b. Unless otherwise indicated, design loads for FRP grating shall be as follows:

1) 100 psf 2) Maximum deflection shall be the quotient of the grating span divided by 180 or 1/2-inch,

whichever is less. c. Unless otherwise indicated, FRP grating shall have a maximum deflection of 1 percent when

supported at 2-foot centers and subjected to a uniform load of 110 pounds per square foot. d. Type A resin shall be used for all grating.

2. The thickness of all FRP grating shall be as shown on the drawings and in the approved shop drawings submittal. Grating sheet sizes shall be compatible with the support spans shown on the Drawings and in the approved shop drawings submittals and shall require a minimum of field cutting.

B. Corrosion Resistance: FRP grating shall be suitable for continuous service under the following conditions:

Service Concentration by weight, percent

Maximum temperature, degrees F

Chlorine gas (a) 10 130 Chlorine solution Saturated 130 Hydrogen sulfide (a) 5 130 Hypochlorite solution 5 130 Hypochlorous acid 10 130 Potassium permanganate 10 130 Sodium hydroxide 50 130 Sulfuric acid 10 130

(a) Wet or dry.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. In accordance with section 06510.

B. All hold-down attachments and metal fasteners shall be stainless steel type 316.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide FRP grating with hold-down attachments, end panel attachments, and appurtenances to make the work complete and operable.

B. Adequate quantities of resin sealing kits comprised of pre-measured quantities of thixotropic resin and catalyst, mixing containers, chip brushes, and stirring sticks shall be provided by the fabricator.

C. Installation of FRP grating shall be as recommended by the FRP grating fabricator.

3.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate FRP grating by the flooded mold process with the reinforcing glass of the bearing bars interwoven with the reinforcing glass of the cross bars.

B. Assembled and glued bar grating will not be acceptable.

C. The resin shall completely wet the glass surface to prevent infiltration of corrosives into the glass reinforcement.

D. FRP grating used as walking surfaces shall be slip resistant.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 09900-1 Coating Systems

SECTION 09900

COATING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies coatings and their surface preparation for field and shop-applied coating systems.

B. Furnish all labor, equipment, including safety equipment, superintendence, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to prepare and coat the work as specified in this Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Coating systems: Includes surface description, surface preparation, required dry film thickness,

and the number and application procedure of the prime and finish coatings. Systems are as specified within this Section on the Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC).

B. Field coating: The application of the coating system after installation of the surface at the work site.

C. Dry film thickness (DFT): The thickness of a fully cured coating or coating system.

D. Wet film thickness (WFT): The thickness of a coating while wet.

E. Volatile organic content (VOC): The portion of the coating that is a compound of carbon, is photo-chemically reactive and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter or pound per gallon as defined in ASTM D3960.

F. Shop coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to the site.

G. Lead containing: Any coating that contains any detectable amount of lead.

H. Stripe coat: A coat of the specified coating, applied prior to the final coat by brush to all edges (cut or fabricated) on steel shapes, crevices, projections, welds, nuts, bolts, pits, flanges, and splice plates.

I. Hard to reach: Areas that may not be accessible with spray equipment but can be reached by brush, mitt or roller.

J. Inaccessible areas: Areas such as back-to-back angles, skip welds, and other areas that a brush, mitt, or roller cannot contact the surface.

K. pH: A measure indicating whether a solution is acidic, neutral, or alkaline.


document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods to Measure Adhesion by Tape Test ASTM D3960 Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

Content of Paints and Related Coatings ASTM D4263 Standard Test Method Indicating Moisture in the Concrete by the Plastic

Sheet Method ASTM D4285 Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air ASTM D4417 Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast

Cleaned Steel


ASTM D4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-off Adhesion ASTM E329 Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies

for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction ASTM E337 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity With a Psychrometer ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Technical Guidelines MIL-A-22262A (SH) Military Specification, Abrasive Blasting Media, Ship Hull Blast Clean NACE Std RP-0188 Recommended Practice Low, High Voltage Electrical Inspection of

Coatings, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council, Volume 1 - Good Painting Practices SSPC-Paint Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Type 2 Gauges Application-PA-2 SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC SP-5 White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC SP-7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SSPC SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SSPC SP-13/NACE 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete SSPC-VIS 1-67T Visual Plates Used to Determine Blasting Standards SSPC - Guide 6 Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal

Operations SSPC - Guide 15 Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Substrates SSPC Coating and Lining Inspection Manual Publication 91-12

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) FOR SHOP AND FIELD A. General:

1. Manufacturer's printed instructions: Deviations from the manufacturer's printed instructions will not be allowed unless approved in writing by the manufacturer's representative and the Project Representative before execution of said change.

2. Test result disagreement: In the event of a discrepancy between the Contractor and Project Representative's testing equipment, both parties shall check equipment in question for proper function and calibration.

3. Make available all locations and phases of the work for access for inspection by the Project Representative or the manufacturer's representative. Contractor shall provide ventilation, egress, staging and whatever other means are required to access the work area.

4. Contractor QC personnel shall be certified as National Association of Corrosion Engineers, (NACE) CIP, Level 1.

B. Contractor's responsibilities: 1. Quality control: responsible for the quality control of the coatings applied and performing

check points as specified in 1.03D. 2. Schedule: prepare a schedule that is updated weekly or as necessary to show QC and QA

Check Points as specified herein, and distribute to all parties related to installation of the coating system. The schedule shall allow time for remedial work to be completed as identified by inspection at the given checkpoints. The Project Representative shall be informed within 24 hours prior to the Contractor performing the tests specified.

3. Reports: prepare daily inspection reports when any work is performed on site. Project Representative may ask that ambient conditions be recorded as often as needed to insure specified application conditions are met, but not less than twice daily. Use the “Daily Inspection Report” form found in Specification 01990. Submit copies of this report within 24 hours of coating application to the Project Representative for signature to acknowledge the report was timely produced. Submit all reports in bound form at the completion of coating


work. 4. Over coating: verify coating compatibility and primer quality to be equal to the specified

primer when over-coating a primer or coating that was applied by others. 5. Provide testing equipment required in this Section and as required to verify compliance with

the Specifications. Record of equipment calibration must also be provided.

C. Project Representative's responsibility: 1. QA: determine acceptance or rejection of a coating based on the given specifications. 2. Testing: may conduct tests on ambient conditions, surface temperature, coating(s) applied,

target mil thickness, coating type (i.e. stripe coat), and coating batch numbers.

D. Checkpoints: Contractor is responsible to perform the checkpoints specified below and as required in COATSPEC. The Project Representative may perform any or all of the checkpoints listed in addition to, but not replacement of, the requirement for the Contractor to perform the inspection checkpoints as specified below. 1. Blotter test: Upon start up of abrasive blasting, compressed air shall be checked daily for oil

and water by blotter test per ASTM D4285. 2. Anchor profile: Anchor profile of an abrasively blasted surface shall be tested using Testex

tape per ASTM D4417. Test shall be conducted on the start up of the blasting operation to insure proper selection of blast media and prior to prime coat application.

3. Intermediate DFT readings: DFT readings shall be taken between coats to check consistency of the application and progress toward total system thickness.

4. Final DFT readings: DFT readings shall be taken per SSPC PA-2 on total system thickness as criteria for final acceptance of a coating. If recoat time has been exceeded or if recommended by the manufacturer, deficient areas shall be scarified prior to top coating. Dry film thickness measurements in excess of the amounts specified in SSPC PA-2 may be acceptable if approved by the Project Representative.

5. Holiday testing: Perform for the entire coating per NACE RPO 188 in the presence of the Project Representative. Any holidays detected shall be repaired and retested after cure of the coating is complete.

6. Surface preparation: Shall be accepted by the Project Representative prior to the application of a coating.

7. Ambient conditions: Perform tests for relative humidity, surface temperature, dew point and ambient temperature to ensure compliance for materials applied.

8. Adhesion: perform adhesion tests per ASTM D3359. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to repair any damage to the coating resulting from adhesion testing.

9. Test to Determine Salt Contamination: Using the Bresle Method, the Contractor shall take 3 random tests each day during surface preparation prior to coating application. For immersed surfaces, the reading shall not exceed 30 microsiemens/cm (30 us/cm). For non-immersed surfaces, the reading shall not exceed 70 microsiemens/cm (70 us/cm). If conductivity measurements exceed the respective values, the affected surfaces shall be cleaned until conductivity levels are acceptable.

10. Moisture in Concrete: perform ASTM 4263-88, Standard Test Method Indicating Moisture in the Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. If the presence of moisture is indicated, dry the substrate prior to coating application. Perform this test once for every 200 square feet of area to be coated and more frequently at darkened concrete areas. Perform Calcium Chloride Moisture Vapor Emissions Tests in accordance with ASTM F-1869 for all floors, containment, below grade applications or any other moisture tests required by the manufacturer.

11. Test for de-passivation of galvanized steel: After cleaning galvanized steel by pressure wash and soap or other manufacturer-approved method, test every 100 square feet by applying a drop of Copper Sulfate test solution. Black color indicates that the galvanized steel has been de-passivated. Refer to Section 09900 3.01 B.5.

E. Disputes: If questions arise concerning the acceptability of an applied coating, Tooke, adhesion, and other destructive/non-destructive tests may be performed to aid in resolution of the dispute. If the coating is determined to be defective: the Contractor will be responsible for the cost of repairs resulting from testing. If the coating is shown to be properly applied, the County will be


responsible for the cost of inspection repairs.


B. A list of materials shall be provided before materials are delivered to the worksite.

C. A Waste Disposal Plan.

D. For each primer and finish coating, provide the manufacturer's application instructions, which shall include the following: 1. Surface preparation recommendations. 2. Primer type, where required. 3. Maximum dry and wet mil thickness per coat. 4. Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for

each. 5. Curing time before submergence in liquid. 6. Thinner to be used with each coating. 7. Ventilation requirements. 8. Allowable application methods. 9. Maximum storage life. 10. Material safety data sheets. 11. Interpretation of batch code numbers. 12. Minimum and maximum relative humidity requirements. 13. Minimum and maximum surface temperature requirements. 14. Minimum and maximum ambient temperature requirements. 15. Manufacturer's recommended application procedure. 16. LEED Submittal. 17. When color is not specified, provide manufacturer's range of standard colors. 18. Contractor QC personnel qualifications.

E. Provide information on blasting media including coating manufacturer's recommended grit/shot size for coating systems specified.

F. For each prime and finish coating, furnish a 12-inch square sample that shall match sample provided in color, texture and sheen. Field and/or samples may be requested by the Project Representative.

G. For Systems A-2, B-2 and C-3, submit manufacturer's details for construction joints, penetrations, crack repair, and details at floor penetrations, wall bases, equipment bolts, embedded angle frames, transitions and terminations of the system and all other details specific to the structure being coated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials for field application to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each

container shall bear the manufacturer's name brand, batch number, date of manufacture, and storage life.

B. Coatings shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold. Coatings, exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer or that have been visibly damaged shall be removed from the site. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes.

1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Coatings shall be applied only to surfaces that are dry, and only under such combination of

humidity and temperatures of the atmosphere and surfaces to be coated as will cause evaporation rather than condensation.

B. During coating and for a period of at least 8 hours after the coating has been applied, the temperature of the surface and the atmosphere shall be maintained at a minimum of 5 degrees


above the dew point.

C. Provide environmental controls such as heaters and/or dehumidification if atmospheric requirements as specified in Paragraph 09900-1.07A.and Paragraph 09900-1.07B.are not met or workdays are lost due to weather.

D. Supply ventilation if the cure time of the coating is slowed by the presence of coating or solvent vapor.

1.08 CONTAINMENT A. Containment shall conform to SSPC-Guide 6. Level of containment shall be as specified to

capture debris, contain dust, protect from adverse weather, and provide means to control ambient conditions, and shall be as specified for the material and service conditions in the COATSPEC.

B. If containment is not required, do not spray apply coatings if wind velocity is above 15 mph or in any condition which could cause paint spray to drift to adjacent property. The Contractor is responsible for any damage resulting from surface preparation or painting operations.

SSPC-GUIDE 6 - TABLE A COMBINATIONS OF CONTAINMENT AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS COMPONENTS

Containment Classification

CONTAINMENT SYSTEM (5.3 of Guide)

VENTILATION (5.4 of Guide)

5.3.1 Containment Materials

5.3.2 Penetrability

5.3.3 Support Structure

5.3.4 Joints

5.3.4 Joints

5.3.5 Entryway

5.4.1 Make-up

5.4.2 Input Air Flow

5.4.3 Air Pressure

5.4.4 Air Movement

5.4.5 Exhaust Dust Filtration

Class 1A

B1-Air Impenetrable

C1-Rigid C2-Flexible

D1-Full Seal

D1-Full Seal

E1-Airlock E2-Resealable

F1-Controlled

G1-Forced G2-Natural

H1-Instrument Verification H2-Visual Verification

I1-Minimum Specified

J1-Air Filtration

Class 2A A1-Rigid 2-Flexible

B1-Air Impenetrable


D1-Full Seal

D1-Full Seal E2-

Resealable E3-Overlap

F1-Controlled F2-Open


H2-Visual Verification

I1-Minimum Specified

J1-Air Filtration

Class 3A A1-Rigid A2-Flexible

B1-Air Impenetrable B2-Air Penetrable


D1-Full Seal D2-Partial Seal

D1-Full Seal D2-Partial Seal

E4-Open Seam

F1-Controlled F2-Open


H3-Not required

l2-Not specified

J1-Air Filtration

Class 4A A1-Rigid A2-Flexible B1-Air

Impenetrable B2-Air Penetrable

C3-Minimal

D2-Partial Seal

D2-Partial Seal E4-Open

Seam

F2-Open G2-Natural H3-Not required

l2-Not specified

J2-No Controls on Exhaust

Note 1: The information in this table is provided for guidance only and does not guarantee that any specific levels of containment will be achieved by following the suggestions. The type of structure, wind conditions, soundness of the materials of construction, and many other factors play a role in containing dust and debris.

Note 2: The table occasionally identifies two options for a given component. For example, containment materials (5.3.1) are shown as being either rigid or flexible. If the specifier requires the use of rigid materials only, this restriction must be specified separately.

Note 3: The design suggestions made in this table are based on the use of open abrasive blast cleaning inside containment. The classifications are ordered from the greatest degree of dust and debris containment (Class 1A). Normally, the higher the degree of containment, the higher the cost.

Note 4: Many other combinations of the components beyond those suggested above can be used to provide similar results. The method preparation can also be adjusted to reduce or eliminate dust emissions.

Note 5: Certain combinations of components within which each class may not be suitable when removing hazardous paints (e.g., forced air input in combination with penetrable containment materials in Class 3A).


Note 6: When designing a ventilation system, care must be taken to balance the static pressure with the input ai flow to avoid collapsing the containment due to high negative pressure.

1.09 WARRANTY A. For the Work of this Section, provide all warranties as described in the General Conditions 00700,

and special warranties as specified in the Technical Specifications


A. Standardization: 1. Materials, supplies, and articles provided shall be the standard products of manufacturers.

Coatings in a particular system shall be the products of a single manufacturer. 2. The standard products of manufacturers other than those specified may be accepted when it

is demonstrated that they are equal in composition, durability, usefulness, and convenience for the purpose intended. Requests for substitutions will be considered when submitted per Section 01300 provided the following minimum conditions are met: a. The proposed coating system shall use an equal or greater number of separate coats to

achieve the required dry film thickness. b. The proposed coating system shall use coatings of the same generic type. The directions

for application and descriptive literature which includes generic type, non-volatile content by volume, material safety data sheets, VOC's by grams per liter, and other information confirms that the substitution is equal to the specified coating system.

c. Certified laboratory data sheets showing the results of complete spectrographic and durability tests performed on the proposed substitute. Tests shall be performed by a laboratory, which conform to the provisions of ASTM E329 and, which shall be a member of the American Council of Independent Laboratories.

B. All coating materials shall not contain benzene, shall not exceed 150 grams per liter of volatile organic compounds (VOC), or be lead containing.

C. Blasting material shall meet MIL-A-22262A (SH) and shall be arsenic-free and contain no free silica. Blasting material shall not be reused. The Contractor is responsible for removing and legally disposing of the spent blasting material from the job site. The Contractor shall provide a copy of total characteristic leaching procedure (TCLP) results of the spent blast material to the Project Representative prior to Final Acceptance of the work.

D. Nonskid additive shall be 20 to 40 mesh alumina oxide, unless alternate nonskid media is recommended by the manufacturer.

2.02 EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all King County equipment including mechanical

working parts and/or moving parts within the work area are protected from damage. Protection of equipment will be coordinated with the Project Representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean. Before applying coating, oil and grease shall be

removed per SSPC SP-1. All dirt, rust, loose mill scale, old weathered coatings, and other foreign substances shall be cleaned according to the SSPC standards specified in the COATSPEC. Oil and grease shall be removed before mechanical cleaning is started. Where mechanical cleaning is accomplished by blast cleaning, the abrasive used shall be washed, graded, and free of contaminants, which might interfere with the adhesion of the coatings.

2. Clean cloths and clean fluids shall be used in solvent cleaning. Cleaning and coating shall be scheduled so that dust and spray from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. Ensure that field coating is compatible with factory applied or existing coatings.


B. Metallic surfaces: 1. Metallic surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with applicable portions of surface

preparation specifications of the SSPC. Specific applicable standards are specified in each coating system. The solvent in solvent cleaning operations shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Preparation of metallic surfaces shall be based upon comparison with SSPC-VIS-1-67T, or as described herein. To facilitate inspection on the first day of sandblasting operations, sandblast metal panels to the standards specified. Plates of light metal steel shall measure a minimum of 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches. Panels meeting the requirements of the Specifications shall be initialed by the Contractor and the Project Representative and coated with a clear non-yellowing finish. One of these panels shall be prepared for each type of sandblasting and shall be used as the comparison standard throughout the work.

3. Profile of blasted surfaces of new steel or previously coated steel shall be per the manufacturer's recommendation for each coating system but be no less than two mils. Tightly adhered, existing coating remaining on surface following SSPC SP-7, cleaning shall have a minimum surface profile of 2 mils.

4. Surface preparation for aluminum, copper, brass, and stainless steel shall be as specified for the coating in the COATSPEC.

5. Surface preparation for galvanized metal shall include a pressure wash with a cleaning solution recommended by the coating manufacturer, mixed and rinsed with 160-degree water and applied at 2500 psi. When the surface is dry, prepare for coating application by providing a cleaning per SSPC SP-7. Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application. Perform de-passivation test listed in Section 09900 1.04 D.11.

6. Areas not accessible or appropriate for blast cleaning may be hand or power tool cleaned with written approval of the Project Representative.

C. Concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces: 1. Surfaces which are to be coated shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days or longer and to

dry to the moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer. Moisture content shall be tested per ASTM D4263. The presence of moisture indicates additional cure time will be required. Retest as required until concrete is sufficiently dry for coating.

2. Muriatic acid solution shall not be used. 3. Loose concrete and laitance shall be removed by blasting and chipping. Voids and cracks

shall be repaired as specified in Section 03300. When repair work in Section 03300 is complete, prepare the surface per the following: a. Concrete floors shall be prepared with “blast track” style equipment or an Approved Equal. b. All concrete surfaces shall be inspected per SSPC SP-13 to ICRI Technical Guideline

#310.2-1997 and per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Surfaces shall be dry and clean and free from grit, loose plaster, and surface irregularities. 5. Cracks and holes shall be repaired with acceptable patching materials, keyed to existing

surfaces, and sanded smooth. Surfaces may require additional repair to provide a smooth surface prior to application of final coat.

6. The pH of the surface shall register a '7', which indicates a neutral surface condition, before coating is applied. If indicator reads above '7', the alkali shall be neutralized.

7. Surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances.

8. Steam cleaning shall be used to clean wall surfaces of existing process channels, structures and tanks to be coated.

9. Surfaces to be coated shall be repaired as specified in 3.07, and cleaned and finished to the standards as specified herein.

D. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1. As specified in Section 02616 for buried applications and 015062 for exposed applications.

E. Plastic surfaces: 1. Clean with solvent compatible with the specified primer and hand sanded with a medium grit


sandpaper to provide sufficient profile for the coating system. Large areas may be power sanded or brush off blasted provided sufficient controls are employed so the surface is roughened without removing excess material.

3.02 APPLICATION A. Workmanship: Coating shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of SSPC, Good

Painting Practice, Volume 1. 1. Coated surfaces shall be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps and brush marks. Coats

shall be applied so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness. 2. Coating equipment shall be designed for application of the materials specified.

a. Compressors shall have traps and filters to remove water and oils. b. Spray equipment shall be equipped with mechanical agitators, pressure gages, and

pressure regulators, and spray nozzles of the proper sizes and functioning in a manner suitable to perform the work.

3. Each coat of paint shall be applied evenly and sharply cut to line.

B. Coating properties, mixing, and thinning: 1. Coating shall provide a satisfactory film with smooth even surface. Glossy undercoats shall

be lightly sanded to provide a surface suitable for the proper application and adhesion of subsequent coats. Orange Peel, overspray, pinholes and other surface defects shall be repaired.

2. Coating shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application.

3. Coatings shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Method of coating application: 1. Prime coatings may be shop or field applied. Shop-applied primer shall be as specified in

each system. 2. Provide mechanical equipment, including, but not limited to, pumps, valves, pipe, blowers,

fittings, and miscellaneous appurtenances, with shop-applied primer and shop-applied finish coats.

3. If the shop coating meets the requirements of this Section, the field coating may consist of touching up the shop prime coat to achieve the film thickness, continuity, and coating specified in the COATSPEC. Damaged and poorly applied shop coatings that do not meet the specified requirements shall be removed, surface prepared, and then recoated in accordance with the COATSPEC.

4. Where two or more coats are required, alternate coats shall contain sufficient compatible color additive, to act as indicator of coverage or the alternate coats shall be of contrasting colors.

5. Mechanical equipment on which the manufacturer's shop-applied coating is acceptable shall be touch-up primed and coated with the specified coating system to match the color scheduled.

6. Coating shall not be applied to a surface until it has been prepared as specified. 7. A stripe coat shall be applied by brush to all edges (cut or fabricated), crevices, projections,

nuts, bolts, pits, welds, flanges and splice plates. Subsequent coats may be either brush or spray applied.

8. Where nonskid surface is scheduled, broadcast nonskid additive at 5 pounds per 30 square feet. Backroll on horizontal surfaces.

D. Film thickness and continuity: 1. Coating system thickness is the total thickness of primer and finish coats and does not

include sealers, patching mortars or galvanized coatings. 2. Coatings shall be applied to the thickness specified. No less than two coats shall be applied.

E. Unsatisfactory Application: 1. If an item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat

with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer.


2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection. 3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating.

F. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather the

edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required.

3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance.

3.03 CLEANUP AND WASTE DISPOSAL A. At the end of each shift, remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish.

B. Thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any overspray or other paint-related damage when the work is complete.

C. All solvents, unused coatings and cleaning solutions shall be removed from the site and disposed of legally when coating work is complete or if directed by the Project Representative.

D. Prepare a Waste Disposal Plan to demonstrate all waste material is to be properly disposed; Include: 1. Specify the Contractor is the generator of all waste materials generated by their business

activities. 2. Provide details on procedures to be used for properly managing and disposing of waste

materials in accordance all applicable laws and regulations. 3. Procedures to document waste types and quantities generated and their disposition. 4. Appoint an employee who is qualified and authorized to enforce proper waste disposal and

document the disposal.

E. Submit completed Waste Disposal Plan and supporting documentation to demonstrate quantities and proper disposal of wastes.

3.04 PROTECTION A. Where protection is provided for coated surfaces, such protection shall be preserved in place until

the coating film has properly dried, and removal of the protection is authorized by the Project Representative. Items, which have been coated shall not be handled, worked on, or otherwise disturbed, until the coating is completely dry and hard.

B. Hardware, electrical fixtures, nameplates, shims and similar accessories shall be removed or masked during preparation and coating operations or shall otherwise be satisfactorily protected. Equipment adjacent to walls shall be disconnected and moved to permit cleaning and coating of equipment and walls and, following coating, shall be replaced and reconnected. Any removal or disconnecting of equipment shall be coordinated with the Project Representative.

3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Coating manufacturer's representative shall be present at site as follows:

1. On first day of application of any coating system. 2. A minimum of three, additional site inspection visits, each for a minimum of 4 hours, in order

to provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's product. 4. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into immersion service.

3.06 COATING SYSTEMS A. Surfaces to be coated, surfaces not to be coated, coating systems to be used, and required

finishes and colors are specified in the coating system specification sheets and Section 09901.


3.07 COATING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION SHEET - COATSPEC A. Coating Systems specified for use appear on the following pages. Each of the Coating Systems

and their requirements appear on individual pages. Coating System Identification:

A-1

Coating Material: High Build Epoxy Surfaces: Metal Service Condition: Immersed, non-potable, corrosive environment. Surface Preparation:

Ferrous Metal: 1. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5.

2. Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning all surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2. Damaged shop coated areas shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-11 and recoated with the primer specified. Previously coated surfaces shall be feathered in at the edges.

3. Shop primed surfaces shall receive light abrasive blasting prior to application of finish coats.

Non-Ferrous and Galvanized Metal:

1. Surface preparation for non-ferrous and galvanized metal shall include a pressure wash with a cleaning solution recommended by the coating manufacturer, mixed with 160-degree water and applied at 2500 psi. Rinse with 160-degree water, 2500 psi. When the surface is dry, prepare for coating application by providing a SSPC SP-7. Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application.

Inspection Check Points: 1. Anchor profile: Anchor profile of an abrasively blasted surface shall be tested using Testex tape per ASTM D4417.

2. Holiday testing: Perform for the entire coating per NACE RP-0188 in the presence of the Project Representative. All holidays to be repaired.

3. Surface preparation: Shall be inspected and approved by the Project Representative prior to application of the coating.

4. Adhesion: Perform adhesion tests per ASTM D3359. Application: Shop or field.

General: Drying time between coats shall be specified by the manufacturer for the site conditions.

Inspection Check points: Check points 1 through 9 apply. System Thickness: 16 mils dry film minimum. Level of Containment: See 1.08.


A-1 Coatings ALTERNATIVE 1

Primer: One coat of Devoe's Bar Rust 233H Low VOC Epoxy Stripecoat: One coat of Devoe’s Bar Rust 233H Low VOC Epoxy Intermediate: One coat of Devoe’s Bar Rust 233H Low VOC Epoxy Finish: One or more coats of Devoe's Bar Rust 233H Low VOC Epoxy

ALTERNATIVE 2

Primer: One coat of Sherwin Williams’ Macropoxy 646-100 Stripecoat: One coat of Sherwin Williams’. Macropoxy 646-100 Intermediate: One coat of Sherwin William’s Macropoxy 646-100 Finish: One or more coats of Sherwin Williams’ Macropoxy 646-100

ALTERNATIVE 3

Primer: One coat of Tnemec's Series L69 Epoxoline. Stripecoat: Intermediate:

One coat of Tnemec’s Series L69 Epoxoline One coat of Tnemec’s Series L69 Epoxoline

Finish: One or more coats of Tnemec's Series L69 Epoxoline

ALTERNATIVE 4

Primer: One coat of Kelly Moore’s Gulf Coast PC-517 Stripecoat: One coat of Kelly Moore’s Gulf Coast PC-517 Intermediate: One coat of Kelly Moore’s Gulf Coast PC-517 Finish: One or more coats of Kelly Moore’s Gulf Coast PC-517

ALTERNATIVE 5

Primer: One coat of Ameron’s Amerlock 2 VOC Stripecoat: One coat of Ameron’s Amerlock 2 VOC Intermediate: One coat of Ameron’s Amerlock 2 VOC Finish: One or more coats of Ameron’s Amerlock 2 VOC


Coating System Identification:

C-1

Coating Material: Epoxy primer, polyurethane finish, color required Surfaces: Metal, and Non-Ferrous Service Condition: Non-Immersed, exposure to moisture or sunlight, color required.. Surface Preparation:

Ferrous Metal: 1 Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5.

2 Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning all surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2. Damaged shop coated areas shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-11 and recoated with the primer specified. Previously coated surfaces shall be feathered in at the edges.

3 Shop primed surfaces shall receive light abrasive blasting prior to application of finish coats.

Non-Ferrous and Galvanized Metal:

1 Surface preparation for non-ferrous and galvanized metal shall include a pressure wash with a cleaning solution recommended by the coating manufacturer, mixed with 160-degree water and applied at 2500 psi. Rinse with 160-degree water, 2500 psi. When the surface is dry, prepare for coating application by providing a SSPC SP-7. Alternative surface preparation methods shall be per the manufacturer’s written direction for profile and surface cleanliness for the given application.

Application: Shop or field. General: Drying time between coats shall be specified by the manufacturer for

the site conditions. Inspection Check points: Check points 1 through 9 apply. System Thickness: 16 mils dry film minimum. Level of Containment: See 1.08.


C-1 Coatings: ALTERNATIVE 1

Primer: One coat of Devoe's Bar Rust 233H Low VOC Epoxy applied at 4 mils dry film.

Finish: One or more coats of Devoe's Devthane 379H UVA Low VOC HS Polyurethane, applied at 4 mils dry film.

System Thickness: 8 mils dry film.

ALTERNATIVE 2

Primer: One coat of Sherwin Williams’ Macropoxy 646-100, applied at 4 mils dry film.

Finish One or more coats of Sherwin Williams’ Hi-Solids Polyurithane, applied at 4 mils dry film.

System Thickness: 7 mils dry film. :

ALTERNATIVE 3

Primer: One coat of Tnemec's Series 1 Omnithane applied at 4 mils dry film. Finish One or more coats of Tnemec's Series 750 Endura-Shield applied at

4 mils dry film. System Thickness: 8 mils dry film/

ALTERNATIVE 4

Primer: One coat of Kelly Moore’s JFB Hart HP-330 Hi-Solids Epoxy, applied at 10 mils dry film.

Finish One or more coats of Kelly Moore’s JFb Hart HP-105 High Performance, applied at 4 mils dry film.Gulf Coast PC-517

System Thickness: 14 mils dry film :



J-6

Coating Material: Anti-Graffiti Coating Surfaces: Exterior aluminum or Fiberglass, horizontal or vertical, and doors and

frames. Service Condition: Non-corrosive environment. Surface Preparation: New metal or fiberglass: Surfaces shall be allowed to age and to dry to the moisture content

recommended by the coating manufacturer. Pressure wash or solvent wipe to ensure that surfaces are free from laitance, dust, paint, grease, and oil.

Previously Painted or Primed Surfaces:

Pressure wash or solvent wipe to ensure that surfaces are free from laitance, dust, paint, grease, and oil.

Application: Factory Inspection Check points: Check points 6 and 7 apply. System Thickness: One coat at 250 square feet per gallon. Color: To be determined by the Project Representative Coatings: ALTERNATIVE 1 OKON Graffiti Barrier Coat ALTERNATIVE 2 Rainguard Vandlguard One



J-7

Coating Material: Anti-Slip Coating Surfaces: Any primed surface. Service Condition: Any wastewater environment. Surface Preparation: New aluminum or fiberglass:

Surfaces shall be allowed to age and to dry to the moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer. Pressure wash or solvent wipe to ensure that surfaces are free from laitance, dust, paint, grease, and oil.

Previously Painted or Primed Surfaces:

Pressure wash or solvent wipe to ensure that surfaces are free from laitance, dust, paint, grease, and oil.

Application: Factory. Inspection Check points: Check points 6 and 7 apply System Thickness: Per manufacturer’s instructions. Color: Gray. Coatings: ALTERNATIVE 1 American Safety Technologies AS-175 ALTERNATIVE 2 Sherwin Williams EPIDEK M339

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 09901-1 Finish Schedule

SECTION 09901

FINISH SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies finishes and colors for rooms, equipment and other items which are to be painted, coated, or have other architectural finishes.


A. Referenced Standards: Federal Standard 595 Paint Specification.

B. General: Unless otherwise specified, all materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 09900.

C. The King County Project Representative reserves the right to reselect any color, from the manufactures full range of available colors, during the submittal process. In case of conflict between requirements of this section and the specified or listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. In the following schedule, the coating system for each specified surface shall comply with those listed in COATSPEC, Section 09900. Coat surfaces indicated on this schedule unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Color reference numbers are from the Federal Standard 595 Paint Spec.

B. Special Equipment Colors: Paint equipment and piping as indicated, except as itemized below: 1. Fire Protection Equipment, Pipes and Apparatus: OSHA Red. 2. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout devices, included but not limited

to, electrical disconnects for equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines under pressure: OSHA Yellow.

C. Electrical conduit is not painted if coated with PVC or specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 09901-2 Finish Schedule

3.02 FINISH SCHEDULES Surfaces Service Environment Coating System Color Miscellaneous metal and none ferrous equipment, exposed conduit, piping, utilities, etc.

Non-immersed, exposure to moisture or sunlight

C-1 Per Project Representative

Drop Deck Trailer frame Exposed to petroleum products

A-1, or manufacturer’s recommendation per Specification Parag. 13585-2.04-M

Per Project Representative

Exterior walls metal and FRP

Exposed to moisture and sunlight

Polyurethane enamel Per Specification Paragraph 13585-2.03-F

Per Project Representative

Exterior walls metal and FRP, over enamel coats


J-6 Clear, anti-graffiti coating

Exterior roof metal and FRP


J-7 Gray, anti-slip coating

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 10200-1 Louvers and Vents

SECTION 10200

LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specified Wall Louvers.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest edition of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

B. International Code Council 1. Seattle Building Code and associated standards, 2012 Edition including all amendments,

refer to herein as the Building Code.

C. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. Standard 500-L Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating 2. Publication 501 Application Manual for Louvers

D. American Society for testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles

and Tubes 2. B209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

E. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01300

B. Product data sheets

C. Manufacturers’ storage, handling, and installation instructions

D. Shop Drawings custom prepared for this Project

E. Certified Test Data: AMCA test data for air and acoustic performance of louvers

F. Structural Performance: Manufacturer shall design and furnish all supports required to withstand a wind force of not less than 25 pounds per square foot. Louver blades, frames, mullions, and anchorages shall be demonstrated to withstand the wind design load as required by the Building Code.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STATIONARY EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Drainable, fixed blade, visible vertical mullion, Type K6774 by Airolite; Ruskin; Construction Specialties; or equal.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 10200-2 Louvers and Vents

B. Materials and Fabrication: 1. Louvers shall be 2 inches (101.6 mm) deep and assembled entirely from extruded aluminum

components. Blades and frames shall be 0.081-inch (2.0 mm) thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 per ASTM B211. Blades shall be stationary, with drainable gutters, and be spaced 3-1/4 inches (82.5 mm) on center. Jamb frames shall incorporate drainable gutters to ensure resistance to water penetration.

2. Join stationary blade and frame members with fillet welds concealed from view. Louver blades shall be joined to each jamb frame with a minimum of two fillet welds. Each weld shall be a minimum of 1 inch in length at each corner with a minimum 1/8-inch leg. Frames shall be joined at each corner with a full-length fillet weld with a minimum 1/8-inch throat.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide 16-guage minimum, 1/2-inch aluminum mesh bird screens in folded extruded aluminum frames. Where ductwork is attached to the interior side of louver provide holder for screen frame that can be built into ductwork and so arranged that by opening a door in duct, screen can be slid out for cleaning without disassembling ductwork. Where there is no ductwork attached to interior of louver, provide a holder for bird screen frame designed so that screen can be removed for cleaning and replaced without using tools.

B. Provide all structural supports and attachment brackets as shown on the Drawings and as required for a complete installation.

C. Provide all related break shape and extruded aluminum sills, flashings, and sub-frames. Flashings shall be 0.050 or thicker as indicated.

D. Provide matching 0.05-inch-thick aluminum blank-off panels to cover the rear of decorative louvers and portions of louvers outside of air intake or exhaust ductwork.

E. Closed cell PVC compression gaskets shall be provided between bottom of mullion or jamb and top of sill to insure leak tight connections.

2.03 FINISH

A. Factory applied 3-coat Fluropolymer.

B. Color as selected from manufacturer’s standard color range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Protect all aluminum in contact with concrete, plaster, masonry, steel, or galvanized metal with a coating of bituminous paint.

B. Install louvers following the manufacturer’s printed instructions, as shown in the Contract Drawings and as shown in referenced SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

C. Provide bird screens on all louvers. Install on the interior side. Use stainless steel screws throughout.

D. Install head and sill flashing as shown on the Drawings and as required to provide a watertight installation. Apply sealant all around frame, inside and outside.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 10405 - 1 Signs

SECTION 10405

SIGNS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies informational and accident prevention signs.



Reference Title

29 CFR 1910.145 OSHA Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code ANSI Z535.2 Environmental and Facility Safety Signs IFC International Fire Code WAC 296-24 (Part B-2) WISHA Marking Physical Hazards


A. General 1. Accident prevention signs shall conform to requirements of WISHA Chapter 296-24 WAC (Part B-

2), OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145, ANSI Z535.1 and ANSI Z535.2. 2. All signs shall have rounded corners and four mounting holes. 3. Number, size, type and placement of signs shall be as indicated in the schedules in Part 3 of this

Section.

B. Sign size shall be as follows:

Size Width x Height A 14 inches x 20 inches B 10 inches x 14 inches C 7 inches x 10 inches D 14 inches x 10 inches

C. Sign type shall be as follows:

Type Message 101 DANGER - 480 VOLTS 305 CAUTION - LOW CLEARANCE 401 NOTICE - AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 10405 - 2 Signs

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples of sign materials and mounting hardware and shop drawings of all signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady

B. Seton

C. Approved equal

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Accident prevention signs: Fade proof graphic permanently embedded 1/8” thick fiberglass reinforced plastic; guaranteed not to chip, fade or peel for 15 years.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Distribute signs as listed in Schedules for each of MOCUs. Sign Schedule

Location Quantity Size Type Mount Inside Electrical Room 2 C 101 Wall Access Doors 4 C 401 Doors Inside Fan Room 2 C 305 Wall

3.02 EXECUTION

A. Do not begin production until all shop drawings have been approved.

B. Fasten surface-mounted signs to wall with stainless steel rivets.

C. Conceal all fasteners as much as possible.

D. Use backup materials as required to achieve concealed mounting.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 10520- 1 Portable Fire Extinguishers

SECTION 10520

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies fire extinguishers.

B. Type: Fire extinguishers shall be of the multi-purpose dry chemical type as specified in this Section.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title UL 299 Fire Extinguishers, Dry Chemical NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

B. Performance and design requirements: 1. The fire extinguishers shall meet the requirements of the local Fire Department whose jurisdiction

governs this project. 2. The multipurpose dry chemical fire extinguishers shall be UL and ULC rated at 4A-40-B:C. 3. All fire extinguishers shall comply with Underwriters Laboratory Standard 299, shall bear Factory

Mutual Certification Underwriters Laboratories Certification, and shall be listed by the Fire Marshal.

4. Distribution and installation of all fire extinguishers shall be in conformance with NFPA No.10.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide the extinguishers submittals with manufacturer's technical data and application information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Wall mounted. 1. Extinguishers shall be 10 pounds.

B. Wall brackets: 1. Bracket type to fit specified extinguisher. 2. Furnish stainless steel 316 bracket proper for the MOCU enclosure walls for each extinguisher. 3. Bracket to be finished in red or black enamel.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 10520- 2 Portable Fire Extinguishers

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire extinguishers as shown on the Drawings, and/or as described in this Section. 1. Obtain final location approval from Project Representative.

Room2 Type of Extinguisher Two Electrical Rooms Wall Mounted Two Fan Rooms Wall Mounted

2. Refer to the Drawings for locations.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specification Mobile Odor Control Unit 11000 - 1 General Requirements for Equipment

SECTION 11000

GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general requirements which are applicable to all mechanical equipment and the electrical equipment driving the mechanical equipment. 1. Additional specific requirements are listed in other Sections of the Contract Specifications and

Drawings. 2. Equipment listed in this Division are specified in Division 11 through Division 16.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings ABMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roll Bearings ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and

800 ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws ASME B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts IBC International Building Code IFC International Fire Code IMC International Mechanical Code ISO 1940 Mechanical Vibration- Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors NFPA 70 National Electrical Code UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment UPC Uniform Plumbing Code

B. Arrangement: The arrangement of equipment shown on the Drawings is based upon information available at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions for a specific manufacturer. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment installation may require revision to meet actual equipment installation requirements. Structural supports, connected piping and valves, electrical and instrument equipment connections shown may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be made for such revisions and alterations. Final fabrication and assembly calculations and drawings shall be submitted prior to beginning the work, as specified in each individual equipment section.


C. Unit Responsibility for MOCU: 1. Coordinate, assemble, install and test as a complete operating MOCU by the responsible party.

Unless otherwise specified: a. The responsible party: The manufacturer of the FRP odor control tank is responsible for

fabrication and assembly of the mobile odor control unit (MOCU), and shall assure selected components of the system are checked for compatibility, ease of construction, and efficient operation and maintenance. The responsible manufacturer shall insure coordination of design, fabrication, and assembly of all system components such that all equipment and components furnished under this specification for the MOCU equipment system, including equipment specified elsewhere but referenced in the specification, is compatible and operates properly to achieve the performance requirements specified. Agents, representatives, or other entities that are not a direct component of the manufacturing corporation will not be acceptable as a substitute for the manufacturer's corporation in meeting this requirement.

b. This requirement for unit responsibility shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for performance as provided in the contract documents.

2. The Contractor shall assure that all equipment systems provided for the project are products for which unit responsibility has been coordinated by the responsible party. a. Where the detailed specification requires a certificate of Unit Responsibility, such certificates

shall conform to the content, form and style of Form 11000-C specified in Section 01999, signed by an officer of the manufacturer's corporation and certified by the Contractor that the units are compatible as specified.

b. No other submittal material will be processed until a Certificate of Unit Responsibility has been received and has been found to be satisfactory.

c. Provide Unit Responsibility certification for the following equipment systems: System Specifications of required compatible components

Three Mobile Odor Control Units (MOCUs)

13231, 13585, 15828, 16158, and as specified in other sections of this specifications

D. Balance: 1. Unless specified otherwise, all rotating elements in motors, pumps, blowers and centrifugal

compressors: fully assembled, including coupling hubs, before being statically and dynamically balanced. All rotating elements: balanced to G 2.5 as specified in ISO 1940, Parts 1 and 2.

2. Where specified, balancing reports, demonstrating compliance with this requirement,: submitted as product data.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Unit Responsibility certificate for MOCU.

C. Submittals: made as specified for each equipment item or group of related equipment items. Identify the equipment by the number listed in the Specification section, by manufacturer and by type designation.

1.04 PROTECTION DURING SHIPMENT AND STORAGE OF MOCU COMPONENTS

A. General: As specified in the specific sections of this specifications. See specification section 01600 for MOCU shipment requirements.

B. Shipping of Components: 1. Equipment: shipped in sealed, weather-tight, enclosed conveyances and protected against

damaging stresses during transport. 2. Bearing housings: wrapped or otherwise sealed to prevent contamination by grit and dirt, and

ventilation and other types of openings: taped closed


3. Damage: Corrected to conform to the Contract requirements before the assembly.

C. Factory applied coatings: See Section 09900 for requirements.

D. Storage: Store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Storage instruction: studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Project Representative. Instructions: carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor. Arrange storage to permit access for inspection. 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment and instruments subject to corrosive damage by the

atmosphere if stored outdoors (even if covered with canvas): stored in a weather-tight building that has adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. The building may be a temporary structure on the site or elsewhere, but must be approved by the Project Representative. Maintain temperature and humidity in the building within the range required by manufacturer.

2. All equipment: stored fully lubricated with oil, grease and other lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.

3. Moving parts: rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal galling or “welding”. Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least one half of operating load once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that it does not deteriorate from lack of use. Keep written records of maintenance and rotation which is performed prior to start up.

4. Lubricants: changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. New lubricants shall put into the equipment at the time of acceptance by the contractor.

5. Prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer: deemed to mean that the equipment is judged to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment: judged to be defective and: removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

6. Equipment space heaters: wired and activated to maintain temperatures for control of condensation, as soon as possible during storage in a warehouse and after equipment is installed in its final location.

1.05 SEISMIC AND STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. See specification section 13585 and drawings for MOCU seismic and structural requirements.

1.06 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Provide electrical as shown on the electrical drawings and specifications.

B. Provide controls, controllers, transformers, and switches required by the work of this Section.

C. Provide weatherproof devices and installations for outdoor applications or as specified in Division 16.

D. Install conduits and wiring as specified in Division 16.

E. Equipment devices and wiring shall comply with NEC.

F. See section 16000 for listing and labeling requirements.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all flanges on equipment and appurtenances: flat faced and shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ASME B16.1, Class 125.

B. Flange assembly bolts heavy pattern, hexagonal head, stainless steel machine bolts with heavy pattern.

C. All pipe threads shall conform in dimension and limits of size to ASME B1.20.1, Class 2 NPT, Taper Pipe Thread.

2.02 BEARINGS

A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings: oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified. Each bearing: rated in accordance with the latest revisions of ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Unless otherwise specified, equipment bearings shall have a minimum L-10 rating life of 50,000 hours. The rating life: determined using the maximum equipment operating speed.

B. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and lubricated,: fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes: used when necessary. Grease supply fittings: standard hydraulic alemite type.

2.03 V-BELT ASSEMBLIES

A. V-belt assemblies:: 1. Dodge Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Dodge Taper-lock bushings, 2. Wood's Super V-belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Wood's Sure-Grip bushings, 3. or approved equal.

B. Where stationary control variable pitch sheaves are specified, they: dry lubricated, and shall have locking collars to clamp all movable parts securely in place to eliminate relative motion between sheave parts. The sheaves: adjustable only when the unit is stopped and the sheaves are unloaded.

C. Sheaves and bushings: statically balanced. Additionally, sheaves and bushings which operate at a peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute: dynamically balanced. Sheaves: separately mounted on their bushings by means of 3 pull-up grab or cap tightening screws. Bushings: key seated to the drive shaft.

D. Belts: selected for not less than 150 percent of rated driver horsepower and, where two sheaves sized are specified,: capable of operating with either set of sheaves. Belts: of the anti-static type where explosion-proof equipment is specified. Multiple belts: in matched sets.

2.04 SHAFT SEALS: NOT USED

2.05 COUPLINGS: NOT USED

2.06 GUARDS

A. Exposed moving parts: provided with guards which meet the requirements of WISHA. Guards: fabricated of flattened expanded metal screen to provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard. Guards: designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. Reinforced holes: provided. Provisions: made to extend lube fittings through guards.


B. Guard materials: Stainless steel, Type 304, 3/4-13

2.07 CAUTION SIGNS

A. Equipment with guarded moving parts which operate automatically or by remote control: identified by signs reading "CAUTION - AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT MAY START AT ANY TIME". Signs: constructed of fiberglass material, minimum 1/8 inch thick, rigid, suitable for post or wall mounting, in accordance with Section 10405. Letters: white on a red background. The sign size and pattern: as shown on the Drawings. Signs: installed near guarded moving parts.

2.08 GAGE TAPS, TEST PLUGS, DRAINS, AND GAGES

A. Unless otherwise specified, 1/2-inch threaded pressure taps with full port ball valve isolation cocks: provided on the suction and discharge sides of all pumps, blowers and compressors.

B. Permanent pressure devices (gages, sensors, switches, etc.): provided only where shown or specified, and: installed in accordance with the standard details shown on the Drawings.

C. Gage taps, test plugs, and gages: as specified in Divisions 15.

2.09 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: provided on each item of equipment and shall contain the specified equipment name and equipment number. Equipment nameplates: laser etched on 1/16-inch thick Type 316 stainless steel with 3/16-inch letters. The normal size of nameplates: 3/4-inch high by 2-inch long

B. Equipment titles: spelled out on the nameplates. If abbreviations are required because of space limitations, abbreviations: submitted to the Project Representative and approved prior to manufacture.

C. Nameplates: fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head self-tapping stainless steel screws or drive pins. The use of adhesives will not be permitted.

2.10 LUBRICANTS:

A. Provide for each item of mechanical equipment a supply of the lubricant required for the commissioning period. Lubricants: of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Limit the various types of lubricants by consolidating them, with the equipment manufacturer's approval, into the least number of different types, consistent with the County's current supplier. Not less than 90 days before the date shown in construction schedule for starting, testing and adjusting equipment, provide the Project Representative with three copies of a list showing the required lubricants, after consolidation, for each item of mechanical equipment. The list shall show estimated quantity of lubricant needed for a full year's operation, assuming the equipment will be operating continuously.

2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS: NOT USED

2.12 ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A. All motors, starters, controls, instruments, and other electrical components and devices furnished with mechanical systems: listed and labeled for the purpose for which it is used by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or equivalent nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industry and to the local administrative authority. Where one of these listings is required but not available, Contractor shall obtain written permission for a variance from the authorities having Jurisdiction. In addition, electrical components and devices shall comply with Division 16 of these Specifications.


2.13 CONTROL PANELS

A. All control panels, factory, shop or field assembled,: labeled as a unit in accordance with UL 508. The UL 508 label: affixed to the inside of the door or cover, adjacent to the data pocket.

2.14 MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS

A. Provide under Division 15 all motors for all equipment specified herein and all controllers other than those specifically indicated as being furnished under other sections; all equipment and wiring shall conform to applicable sections of Division 16.

B. Power wiring for all motors and associated controllers other than wiring for automatic controls will be furnished under Division 16. Unless otherwise noted, power supply will be 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz for motors. Control voltages: 120 volts or lower, single phase, 60 hertz, or direct current, 30 volts or lower. Disconnect switches for roof exhaust fans or other equipment installed remote from its controller: furnished as an integral part of the equipment.

C. The horsepower ratings of electrical motors shown on the Drawings and Specifications are based on engineering design calculations and the selection of specific manufacturer's catalog items of mechanical equipment. If the actual equipment to be furnished requires a different motor horsepower, any resulting changes in motor branch circuits and associated circuiting must be included in the original contract bid.

D. Alignment of all motors to equipment: in accordance with the requirements of Section 11040.

E. All equipment: designed and built for industrial service and be capable of delivering rated horsepower under the following applicable conditions: 1. 100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. 2. Voltage variations to +/-10 percent of nameplate rating. 3. Frequency variations to+/-5 percent of nameplate rating. 4. Combined voltage and frequency variations to +/-l0 percent total, as long as frequency does not

exceed+/-5 percent.

F. Unless otherwise specified, motors: TEFC.

2.15 SPARE PARTS

A. See Section 01750.

B. Spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections,: stored in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parts: tagged by project equipment number and identified as to part number, equipment manufacturer, and subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical components: properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches high, or 3 feet in length: stored in a wooden box with a hinged wooden cover and locking hasp. Hinges: strap type. The box: painted and identified with stenciled lettering stating the name of the equipment, equipment numbers, and the words "spare parts." A neatly typed inventory of spare parts: taped to the underside of the cover.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment so nameplates are readily visible.

B. Basis for equipment and material installation is the published recommendations of manufacturer. Submit recommendations for review.

TESTING

C. Equipment: provided and tested within the tolerances recommended by the equipment manufacturer where indicated in the individual mechanical specification sections. Certain sections may also require that equipment additionally be installed and tested under the direction of installers who have been factory trained by the equipment manufacturer. This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility for this portion of the work. Forms 11000-A and 11000-B specified in Section 01999: completed and submitted.

D. MOCU factory and field testing shall be in accordance with Section 01660.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 11009 - 1 Equipment List

SECTION 11009

EQUIPMENT LIST

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section provides a list of the numbered mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment that requires new identification tags.

B. Each equipment number is prefixed with a standard abbreviation to indicate the function of the particular device. Prefixes for mechanical and electrical equipment shall be from the King County standard abbreviations drawing.

1.02 COMPLETENESS

A. Equipment lists presented in these specifications and shown on the drawings are included for the convenience of the Project Representative and the Contractor and are not intended to represent rigorous and precise listings of all equipment, devices, and material to be provided under this contract. The contractor shall rely upon its own material and equipment takeoff lists for this purpose.

B. The equipment list shown herein includes equipment that is to be removed, modified, new or future.

1.03 NUMBERING SYSTEM

A. The following example describes how the equipment identification system is developed. EF 900 3001A Where: EF =Equipment Function (Exhaust Fan) 900 =Facility Number (MOCU, Mobile Odor Control Unit) 301=Equipment or loop number A, B, etc =Parallel or sequential elements

B. Each equipment number is prefixed with a standard abbreviation to indicate the function of the particular device. Prefixes for mechanical and electrical equipment shall be from the owner's standard abbreviations drawing included in this contract.

C. Equipment Status: The following prefixes are used to represent equipment status. E = Existing D = Demolish or remove M = Modified N = New F = Future R = Replace with new T = Temporary

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates shall be as specified in section 11000.


2.02 EQUIPMENT LIST prefix number Status Description Specification

MOCU 900301 N Mobile Odor Control Unit (MOCU No 1) 13585

TRLR 900301 N MOCU No 1 Trailer 13585

EF 900301 A N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan A 15828

MTR 900301 A N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan A Motor 15828

VFD 900301 A N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan A Motor VFD 16158

S 900301 A N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan A Silencer 15886

EF 900301 B N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan B 15828

MTR 900301 B N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan B Motor 15828

VFD 900301 B N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan B Motor VFD 16158

S 900301 B N MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan B Silencer 15886

PNL 900301 A N MOCU No 1 480V Panel 16176

PNL 900301 B N MOCU No 1 120V panel 16176

TRF 900301 N MOCU No 1 Transformer 480V-120V 16460

PCR 900301 N MOCU No 1 Power Cord Reel -

EF 900301 C N MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan C 15863

MTR 900301 C N MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan C Motor 15863

EF 900301 D N MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan D 15863

MTR 900301 D N MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan D Motor 15863










S 900302 B N MOCU No 2 Exhaust Fan Silencer 15886






prefix number Status Description Specification


MTR 900302 C N MOCU No 2 Ventilation Fan C Motor 15863


MTR 900302 D N MOCU No 2 Ventilation Fan D 15863










S 900303 B N MOCU No 3 Exhaust Fan B Silencer 15886






MTR 900303 C N MOCU No 3 Ventilation Fan C 15863


MTR 900303 D N MOCU No 3 Ventilation Fan D 15863

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 11020 - 1 Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations

SECTION 11020

VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEED LIMITATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies vibration and critical speed limitations for rotating equipment. Individual equipment Specifications Sections may specify more stringent requirements which shall then govern over this specification.

B. This specification outlines the basic standards for acceptance of equipment. Any equipment demonstrating levels above these limits shall be repaired, modified or replaced at the Contractor's expense as determined by the Project Representative. 1. General Equipment:

a. No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40% of synchronous vibration amplitude.

b. The presence of discernible vibration amplitude peaks or vibration spectra at a bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection.

2. Electric Motors: a. Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency that is more

than 40% of the peak at rotational frequency. b. Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra

side bands at the pole pass frequency around the 2 times line frequency peak.

C. This specification covers requirements for calculating expected vibration resonances.

D. This specification covers requirements for on-site field testing of vibration of the installed equipment and reporting the test results. Submittals for field-testing are only required when specified in the individual equipment Specifications.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title AGMA 6000-B96 Measurement of Linear Vibration of Gear Units ANSI/HI 9.6.4 American National Standard for Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps for

Vibration Measurements and Allowable Values

B. Hydraulic Institute standards.

C. Instrumentation: Provide necessary test instrumentation which has been calibrated within one year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology, Washington DC, or approved source.

D. Testing Qualifications: Tests shall be performed by an experienced vibration analysis expert who shall interpret the results against this Specification and provide recommended acceptance or modification requirements to the Project Representative.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 11020 - 2 Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. The following information shall be provided when specified in the individual equipment Specification Sections: 1. Manufacturer's certified calculations and data showing location of critical speeds in relation to the

operating speeds. 2. Any deviation from the vibration or critical speed standards shall be noted on the submittal cover

sheet and approved prior to release for manufacture.

1.04 VIBRATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A. Vibration Velocity Limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall not exceed the following peak velocities (inches/second).

Equipment Unfiltered Overall Limit Any Filtered Peak Limit Motors 0.25 0.20 Steady Bearings 0.25 0.20 Centrifugal Blowers 0.15 0.10

1.05 CRITICAL SPEED REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirement: 1. No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or

synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40% of synchronous vibration amplitude. 2. The presence of discernible vibration amplitude peaks or vibration spectra at a bearing inner or outer

race frequencies shall be cause for rejection.

B. Electric Motors: 1. Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency that is more than

40% of the peak at rotational frequency. 2. Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side

bands at the pole pass frequency around the times line frequency peak.

C. Unless otherwise specified, rotating mechanical equipment shall satisfy the following: 1. First critical speed of the constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment is to be at least 25%

above the maximum operating speed or 25% below the minimum operating speed. 2. Second critical speed of any 2-speed or variable speed equipment is to be at least 25% above or

below the maximum operating speed or 25% below the minimum operating speed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS: NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 11060 - 1 Electric Motors

SECTION 11060

ELECTRIC MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies low-voltage alternating current induction motors, 500 horsepower or less.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title IEEE 112 Method B IEEE 841 NEC

Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry – Premium-Efficiency, Severe-Duty, Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors – Up to and including 370 kW (500 hp) National Electrical Code

NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators IBC International Building Code UL 674 Motors and Generators, Electric, for Use in Hazardous Locations, Class

I, Groups C and D, Class II, Groups E, F and G UL 1004 Motors, Electric WAC 51-11 WAC 296-46B-430

Washington State Energy Code Electrical Safety Standards, Administration, and Installation – Motors, Motor Circuits and Controllers

B. Motors: built in accordance with NEMA MG 1, UL 674, UL 1004, and to the requirements specified.

C. All motors: listed and labeled for the purpose for which they are used by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or equivalent nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the Washington State Department of Labor and Industry and to the local administrative authority. Where one of these listings is required but not available, obtain written permission for a variance from King County. This requirement supersedes the listing and labeling requirements of Division 16.

D. All equipment: designed and built for industrial service and be capable of delivering rated horsepower under the following applicable conditions: 1. 100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. 2. 100 percent relative humidity. 3. Voltage variations to ±10 percent of nameplate rating. 4. Frequency variations to ±5 percent of nameplate rating. 5. Combined voltage and frequency variations to ±10 percent total, as long as frequency does not

exceed ±5 percent.


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. A copy of this section, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates that apply to this section, with each paragraph checked-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the Contractor, the submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

C. The submittals for Section 11060 and the submittal for the driven unit: combined into one submittal. Failure to provide and combine both submittals shall result in rejection of the submittals without further review.

D. "Motor Data" Form No. 11060A in Section 01999. Separate the motor data for each motor of 1/2-horsepower and greater.

E. Motor outline, dimensions and weight.

F. Manufacturer's general descriptive information relative to motor features.

G. Where a winding over-temperature device is specified for motors 100 horsepower or larger, provide a response curve for the temperature device.

H. For VFD driven equipment, provide a letter of certification from both the VFD and motor manufacturer that the specific application has been reviewed and that the motor and VFD are compatible and that the motor and VFD combination will satisfy the requirements under all conditions of operation without adverse impacts on either the motor or VFD.

I. Motor Part Load Efficiency Curve or Table.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated, motors: factory-mounted to the equipment as practicable.

B. Motors shall, as a minimum, comply with the requirements of this Section and the manufacturer's standard industrial product. Additional or better features which are not specifically prohibited by the specifications, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard industrial product to be included in the motor being furnished. A standard industrial product is a product that has been or will be sold on the market through advertisement or manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures, and represents the latest production model(s).

C. Motor enclosures will be identified as follows: 1. TEFC: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled; NEMA MG1.26.2. 2. EP: Explosion-Proof; NEMA MG1.26.3.


D. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical requirements: as follows: 1. Service factor:

a. Single-phase motors: 1.0. b. Three-phase motors: 1.15.

2. Time rating: All motors shall have continuous time ratings in conformance with NEMA MG 1-10.35.

3. Torques: Motors shall meet, or exceed, the locked rotor and breakdown torques specified for NEMA Design B.

4. Currents: Locked rotor currents shall not exceed the values for NEMA Design B. 5. Protection: Current density and heating characteristics to be such that the motors will not burn

out if subjected to a maximum of 20-second stall at 6 times full-load current. 6. Rating: Motors shall not be submitted or provided that are required to operate at greater than

their nameplate horsepower. Use of the service factor will not be allowed under conditions of rated voltage and frequency.

7. Insulation: Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall have non-hydroscopic insulation systems conforming to the requirements for NEMA Class B or higher.

8. Conduit box: One size larger than standard. 9. Motor efficiencies for all motors to comply with WAC 51-11, Chapters 14 and 15. Determine

efficiency by the dynamometer test method, IEEE 112, Method B.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, mechanical requirements: as follows: 1. Frame sizes: Conforming to latest NEMA Standard MG1-11.31 for "T" frames, and all

dimensions meeting NEMA Standards insofar as they apply. 2. Shafts:

a. In accordance with NEMA "T" or "TS" dimensions. b. Long shafts: Suitable for belt, chain, or gear drive, within limits established by good industrial

practice and documented by NEMA Standards MG1-14.42 and MG1-14.07. c. Short shafts: Used for direct connection.

3. Connection diagrams: Permanently attached to the motor, either inside the conduit box or on the motor frame, in a location readable from the conduit box side.

4. External finish: Corrosion resistant for outdoor operation. 5. All bolts, screws, and other external hardware: treated for resistance to corrosion, such as

stainless steel.

F. Nameplates: 1. Of corrosion resistant metal such as stainless steel or brass. 2. Engraved or stamped and: permanently fastened to the motor frame with screws or drive pins of

the same material. 3. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all the items of information enumerated in NEMA MG1. 4. The Contractor shall coordinate the motor nameplate location so it is readily visible for inspection

in the completed machine.

G. Construction: All motors provided under this specification shall have the following features of construction: 1. Frames:

a. Cast iron frames for motors ½ horsepower and larger. b. Steel frames for motors smaller than ½ horsepower. c. Aluminum frame motors will not be permitted.

2. Cast metal fan blades and shrouds, corrosion resistant such as stainless steel. 3. Stainless steel hardware. 4. Nonhygroscopic leads. 5. Class B temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient. 6. NEMA design B unless otherwise specified.

H. Protective Coating: Before shipment, coat the shaft extension and any other external bare exposed metal parts of each motor with an easily removable rust preventive.


I. Packaging: All loose motors: packed in Styrofoam or securely fastened to a hardwood skid or pallet for fork-truck handling and: covered for protection against dirt and moisture during transit and for short-time outdoor storage.

2.02 MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HORSEPOWER

A. General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, motors less than 1/2 horsepower: single-phase, squirrel cage,

capacitor start induction run type designed for 115 volt, 60 Hz operation. 2. Dual voltage (115/230) rated motors are acceptable if all leads are brought out to the conduit box.

B. Enclosures: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall have open drip-proof enclosures. 2. Explosion-proof motors:

a. Where specified. 3. UL label for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous locations. An over-temperature device in the

enclosure: provided to detect and automatically de-energize the motor if the enclosure surface temperature exceeds 280 degrees C.

4. The nameplate: marked with the UL frame temperature code T2A.

2.03 MOTORS 1/2-HORSEPOWER THROUGH 250 HORSEPOWER

A. General: 1. Motors 1/2-horsepower through 250 horsepower: 3-phase, squirrel cage, induction motors

designed for 460-volt, 60-Hz operation. 2. Dual voltage (230/460) rated motors are acceptable if all leads are brought out to the conduit box. 3. Motor enclosure, rpm, horsepower, and modifications (if any) are specified in the specific

equipment specification section. 4. Two speed motors: single winding.

B. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors (TEFC): 1. General:

a. With frame sizes 182 and larger: Having cast-iron frames and end shields. b. Smaller frames:

1) Constructed of rolled steel with cast-metal end shields. 2) Provided with condensation drain holes. 3) Frame sizes 286 and larger: Having an automatic breather/drain device provided in the

drain hole. 2. General duty motor: Having Class B insulation with a service factor of 1.15. 3. Severe duty motor:

a. Having a Class F insulation with a service factor of 1.15. b. Internal surfaces coated with a corrosion-resistant epoxy paint. c. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Reliance Electric SXT-XT, 2) Westinghouse Mill and Chemical, 3) Or approved equal.


4. Energy Efficient, Severe Duty TEFC Motor: a. Identical to the severe duty motor except that it will be designed to comply with the minimum

nameplate efficiency in Table A. The preferred motor is 4-pole 1800 RPM.

Table A, Minimum Nameplate Efficiency NEMA MG-1 Table 12-12 and 20-B

Speed, RPM 1200 1800 3600

Horsepower 6-Pole 4-Pole 2-Pole 1/2 84.0 84.0 80.0 3/4 84.0 86.5 86.5 1 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 87.5 86.5 84.0 2 88.5 86.5 85.5 3 89.5 89.5 86.5 5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 91.7 93.0 91.0

b. The efficiency: as determined by the dynamometer test method, IEEE 112, Method B. c. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Reliance Electric Duty-Master XE, 2) Baldor Super-E, 3) Or approved equal.

5. Explosion-Proof Motor: a. UL-listed for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous atmospheres. b. Having a Class B insulation with a service factor of 1.15. c. UL-approved breather/drain device provided in the motor drain hole. d. Frame temperature thermostat which:

1) Meets the UL frame temperature limit code T2A (280 degrees C). 2) Automatically reset, normally closed contact rated 2 amperes at 115V AC. 3) Nameplate marked with the UL temperature limit code T2A.

e. Acceptable manufacturer: 1) Marathon Electric, 2) Reliance Electric, 3) Or approved equal.

6. Energy efficient, explosion-proof motor: Identical to the explosion-proof motor except that the efficiency shall comply with Table A in Paragraph 2.03.C.4 of this Section.

7. Inverter Duty Motors: a. The motors controlled by variable frequency drives (VFD): rated for inverter duty and must

include a stainless steel nameplate showing "Inverter Duty Motor." b. Nameplate shall also show that motor is suitable for variable torque operation on VFD power

from 6 to 60 Hz, and show rated torque in lb-ft on inverter power in addition to the standard nameplate data specified in NEMA standards.

c. Supply certification with submittals that the motors meet all requirements of NEMA MG1-2004, Part 31. 1) Inverter duty motors: specifically certified by the motor manufacturer to be compatible

with the adjustable frequency controller to be used with the motor. Motor to be designed to operate over the speed or frequency range specified. Equip inverter duty motors with two RTDs – 100 ohm platinum temperature detectors mounted on the DE and ODE bearings of the motor in a manner that is suitable for detecting bearing temperature and provides ready access for maintenance purposes.

d. Motors shall include an 'inverter grade' insulation system using not less than triple insulation layer wire and other features necessary to meet the voltage spike specifications of NEMA MG1-2004, Paragraph 31.4.4.2. Complete insulation of the slot, cell, and phase groups is required. The system: rated for Class F temperature rise or better at a service factor of 1.0.


e. Inverter duty motors shall include a normally closed winding over-temperature thermostat suitable to be wired to the VFD panel for drive shutdown.

f. Equip inverter duty motors with a shaft grounding unit mounted on the fan housing with stub shaft extended from the motor shaft. Grounding unit: equipped with two brushes, totally enclosed and sealed against environmental contamination.

g. The maximum permissible noise level for inverter duty motors not to exceed 85 dBA at 3 feet. h. Field test inverter duty motors for sound output when running with their designated VFD. i. Provide inverter duty motors with a thrust bearing housing that includes a suitable mounting

boss for the vibration sensor if specified. j. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) General Electric, 2) Reliance, 3) US Motors, 4) Or approved equal.

C. Conduit Boxes: 1. Provided with threaded hubs. 2. Motors provided with neoprene gaskets at the base of the conduit box and between the halves of

the conduit box. 3. Motors having a grounding lug located within the box for the raceway ground connection.

D. Temperature Sensing and Protection: 1. Motors 10 horsepower through but not including 20 horsepower:

a. Containing a bi-metal disc thermostat to sense winding over-temperature. b. Thermostat: Automatic reset, normally closed contact, rated at 2 amperes at 115V AC. c. Motor nameplate: Marked "OVER TEMP PROT 2" in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.53.

2. Motors 20 horsepower and above: a. Having a temperature sensing device embedded in the motor winding which is sensitive to

both over-temperature and rate of temperature rise. b. Sensor: Wired to a NEMA 4 temperature monitor box located near or on the motor. c. Temperature sensing system: Automatic reset, normally closed contact, rated 2 amperes at

115V AC. d. Motor nameplate: Marked "OVER TEMP PROT 1" in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.53.

E. Rotors: die cast aluminum or brazed copper construction, epoxy protected corrosion on external surfaces. Rotors: free from inherent axial thrust and be balanced to within NEMA Standard MG 1-12.05 vibration limits. If balancing weights are required they: permanently secured by welding or other approved method.

F. Space heaters: provided for all motors over 99 horsepower. Heaters for 480 VAC motors: 120 VAC, single phase and 1,000 watts or less.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING

A. Insulation Check: 1. King County may test the insulation resistance of the motor at any time after delivery of the motor

to the jobsite or at any time during the warranty period. 2. Tests for acceptability will be made using a 1,000-volt megohm meter (megger). 3. Interpretations of test results for minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance will be made

in accordance with IEEE No. 43. 4. All deficiencies: corrected by the Contractor at no cost to King County.


B. Load Testing: 1. King County may test a motor at any time after delivery of the motor to the jobsite or at any time

during the warranty period to determine its ability to operate at nameplate current or less and meet the load test requirements.

2. All deficiencies: corrected by the Contractor at no cost to King County.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 13230 - 1 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Fabrications

SECTION 13230

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies requirements for fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) fabrications, including FRP ducts, FRP odor control tank, and FRP fans, etc. as indicated in the specification sections.

B. FRP components such as handrails, grating, and structural shapes are specified in Division 6; and FRP piping is specified in Division 15.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title


ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Plastics


ASTM D2471 Standard Test Method for Gel Time and Peak Exothermic Temperature of Reacting Thermosetting Resins


ASTM D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins


ASME RTP-1 Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resistant Equipment

NBS Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69

Custom Contact-Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical-Resistant Process Equipment

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Data on manufacturer and method of fabrication.

C. All information developed by the Manufacturer which describes specifically how the equipment is to be manufactured. Provide shop drawings, standards, specifications, procedures or other shop instructions, and catalog data sheets as needed to fully describe the fabrication. This shall include but not be limited to: 1. Resin type. 2. Type and amount of fillers or additives. 3. Corrosion liner laminate sequence and thickness. 4. Reinforcement types and layer sequences for hand lay-up laminates.


5. For all filament wound components provide: a. helix angle b. glass content range c. strand yield d. layer or cycle thickness e. amount of chopped strand or unidirectional roving interspersed with winding and location

within laminate. 6. For all other components provide:

a. construction type b. laminate thicknesses c. layer sequences d. glass content range

7. For all secondary overlays, both interior and exterior, provide: a. laminate thicknesses b. layer sequences and widths

8. Construction details showing all components and assembly overlays.

D. Design Submittal as required by the specific equipment section detailing the design basis of the equipment.

E. Additional submittal requirements for FRP fabrications as detailed in those specification sections pertaining to specific equipment.

F. FRP manufacturer assembly and erection plans. The plans shall provide details on handling, field connections, and final installation.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. The terminology of this Section is consistent with ASTM D883. Users of this Section are responsible for correct interpretation.

B. Equipment: the FRP equipment, as listed in the applicable equipment Section, including all ancillary equipment, work, and materials as described in this Section and related sections of the specifications or Drawings.

C. Fabricator (Manufacturer): the primary party responsible for fabrication of the equipment. Terms are used interchangeably.

D. Mat: a fibrous material consisting of randomly oriented chopped or swirled glass filaments loosely held together with a binder.

E. Chopped Glass: a fibrous material consisting of randomly oriented chopped filaments applied directly to a mold surface or laminate under construction by a chopper gun.

F. Fiber Prominence (Jackstraw): the distinct visibility of individual glass strands causing a loss of translucency of the laminate.

1.05 SHIPPING

A. Fabricator is responsible for proper packaging and protection of all materials to prevent damage during shipping, handling and storage.

B. Vessels and Tanks: 1. Package, load, and protect all materials to prevent transit and handling damage. 2. All equipment that is shipped in a horizontal position shall be mounted on padded cradles

contacting at least 120 degrees of the vessel circumference. 3. All end blocking used to prevent shifting of equipment shall be padded.


4. Equipment shall be loaded with a minimum clearance of two inches between pieces (including external fittings, nozzles, or other projections) and the bed of the car or truck. When two or more units are shipped together, sufficient clearance shall be provided between units to prevent contact in transit.

5. Coverings of suitable plywood or hardboard, securely fastened shall protect flange faces. 6. Loose parts such as fasteners, gaskets, and accessory fittings shall be packaged securely to

allow storage under field conditions. 7. All dry FRP field-joining materials shall be precut in the shop and layered in order of laminate

sequence, then labeled and packaged in sealed, moisture-proof containers for shipment. 8. When a number of loose items or field joining materials are packed in larger shipping crates, each

crate will be individually marked or tagged as to its contents, clearly listing number and type of each item contained therein.

C. Ducting: 1. Package, load, and protect all materials to prevent transit and handling damage. 2. All ducts shall be supported for shipment on cradles spaced no greater than 20 feet. 3. Duct lengths shall also be supported by cradles within two feet of the duct end. 4. Cradles used to support duct or other equipment shall contact at least 120 degrees of the

circumference, be padded, and match the outside diameter within + 1/8 inch, - 0 inch. 5. If duct is stacked in layers, cradles shall be used which support each piece of duct independently

from the overlying and underlying material, such that no duct in a cradle carries more than its own weight.

6. Duct ends and flange faces shall be protected by covering with suitable material that is securely fastened.

7. Ducting shall be loaded with a minimum clearance of two inches between pieces (including external fittings, nozzles, or other projections) and the bed of the car or truck.

8. Loose parts such as fasteners, gaskets, and accessory fittings shall be packaged securely to allow storage under field conditions.

9. When a number of loose items are packed in larger shipping containers, each container shall be individually marked or tagged as to its contents, clearly listing number and type of each item contained therein.

1.06 HANDLING FRP EQUIPMENT

A. The equipment shall not be rolled, slid, dropped, allowed to swing into other objects, or forced out of shape. Resulting impact and excessive distortions may cause cracking or crazing.

B. When working in or around FRP equipment, care shall be exercised to prevent tools, scaffolding, or other objects from striking or being dropped on or inside the equipment. Workmen entering the equipment shall wear soft-soled shoes.

C. Observe proper rigging and hoisting practices at all times.

D. The use of a crane is recommended both in lifting and positioning the equipment. The slings or cables attached to the equipment shall lift as nearly vertical as possible. Under no circumstances shall slings or cables lift more than 45 degrees from vertical. A spreader bar (lifting fixture) may be necessary to keep the lifting angle within this range.

E. Lifting lugs in most cases are not designed to accommodate lifting vessels in or from the horizontal position. Nylon slings encircling the tank shall be used for this purpose and for righting the vessel to the vertical position.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, use all lifting lugs, loaded uniformly for lifting vessels in the vertical position. The use of spreader bars is recommended to keep loads on lugs as nearly vertical and uniform as possible.


G. When lifting lugs are not provided and it is necessary to use lifting slings in direct contact with the FRP equipment, the slings shall be woven nylon or canvas at least three inches wide. Care shall be taken to assure that shackles, eyes, hooks, or other objects do not come into contact with the FRP equipment.

H. Do not attach lifting slings or cables to, nor allow them to come in contact with, any nozzles, flanges, gussets, or fittings other than lifting and/or anchor lugs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated, metal hardware attached to FRP equipment with overlays (including anchor bolts, anchor lugs, lifting lugs, hangers, etc.) shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, gaskets shall be neoprene. Gaskets for use with FRP flanges shall be flat, full-faced, and drilled to match the drilling of the mating flange(s).

C. The Project Representative will review the Fabricator’s choice of resin/catalyst before fabrication begins to verify compliance to the resin manufacturers recommended procedures.

D. Color: Items of a similar nature or subassemblies of a single unit shall be similar in color.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Resin: 1. The equipment shall be fabricated using the corrosion-resistant resin(s) specified in the

applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal. 2. When not otherwise specified, resins used for FRP specialties shall be premium grade vinyl ester

resins, selected based on the required chemical resistance, operating temperature, and need for fire retardancy. Selection is to be verified by the resin manufacturer for suitability in the specified service.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, the same resin shall be used throughout all laminates. 4. The resin manufacturer shall recommend the type and amount of catalysts and promoters for the

required service. 5. Maintain positive measurement and control of catalysts, promoters, and resins at all times. 6. Use no fillers, additives, or pigments in the resin except as specified below, and in the applicable

equipment Section. 7. A thixotropic agent for viscosity control may be used in the proportion and type recommended by

the resin manufacturer. 8. No thixotropic agent shall be used in the corrosion liner or on surfaces to be in contact with the

corrosive environment. 9. Resin putty:

a. Made using the same resin as used in the original fabrication of the parts to be joined. b. Contain a minimum 15 percent by weight of milled glass fibers. c. A fumed-silica additive such as Aerosil 200 or Cab-O-Sil TS-720 shall be added to increase

the viscosity of the putty. d. Use of silica flour, grinding dust, or other fillers is not allowed.

10. When specified in the applicable equipment Section, antimony trioxide or antimony pentoxide shall be added to the resin in the amount necessary to achieve a Class I flame spread rating of 25 or less based on ASTM E84, in the structural wall only. Resin manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed.

11. Unless otherwise indicated, the corrosion liner shall not contain fire retardant additive.


B. Reinforcement: 1. Type and sequence of reinforcement to be used shall be as designated in the applicable

equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, glass fiber reinforcement used shall be a commercial grade

corrosion-resistant borosilicate glass. 3. All glass fiber reinforcing shall have an epoxy compatible silane type surface finish and binder

that is specifically recommended by the glass manufacturer for the particular resin system to be used. This surface finish shall allow the maximum possible chemical bonding between the resin and glass.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, surfacing veils shall be Type C (chemical grade) glass, 10-mil thickness. Polyester surfacing veil, such as Nexus or approved equal shall be used only when indicated in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal, or when specifically recommended by the resin manufacturer as necessary for the chemical service.

5. Mat shall be Type E (electrical grade) glass, 1-1/2 oz. or 3/4 oz. per sq. ft., as specified in the applicable equipment section, with nominal fiber length of 1.25 ± 0.75 inches.

6. Continuous glass roving used in chopper guns for spray-up shall be Type E chopper roving. 7. Woven roving shall be 24 oz. per sq. yd. Type E glass and have a 5 x 4 plain weave. 8. Continuous roving used in filament wound construction shall be Type E glass winder roving with a

yield of 200 yards or more per pound. 9. Unidirectional reinforcement shall be weft unidirectional fabric, Type E glass, with a glass strand

yield equal to or greater than, (more yds/lb) that of the adjacent filament winding strand, stitched in a manner that provides uniform strand density without bunching or gapping.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Molds: 1. Molds constructed of Masonite, wood, or other porous material shall be completely covered with

Mylar or other similar material to produce a smooth and glossy inner surface on the FRP equipment.

2. Molds and mandrels shall be hard-surfaced such that working the wet laminate will not cause local displacement of the material or air entrapment. Covering of mandrels with cardboard is not advised and shall be approved by the Project Representative prior to start of fabrication.

3. Certain components shown on the Drawings assume the availability of specific tooling and/or molds. The Project Representative may consider alternate mold configurations.

4. Prior to the start of fabrication the Project Representative shall approve any deviations from the dimensions shown on the Drawings.

B. Vessel Assembly: 1. All cutouts from the equipment are to be marked, indicating their original location, and given to

the Project Representative. 2. The Project Representative shall not remove centerlines marked on the equipment for use in

assembly after inspection. 3. Flanged nozzles shall be installed with bolt holes straddling principal centerlines of the vessel.

For tank tops, nozzle bolt holes straddle radial centerlines. Other layouts take precedence when detailed on the Drawings.

4. Provide template when requested that locates anchor bolt holes within +1/8 inch for each vessel. 5. When specified in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal, a

non-skid surface shall be provided on the exterior surface of domed covers. Silica grit may be applied in conjunction with the final resin coat, or other methods employed if approved by the Project Representative.

6. Apply and overlay on the outside of the equipment a plastic nameplate showing the following information: a. Name of manufacturer. b. Date of manufacture. c. Contract number. d. Equipment name/number. e. Resin number and manufacturer. f. Design pressure and temperature.


g. Vessel diameter, height, and weight. 7. Butt joints or shell joints are to be in the number and location(s) as shown on the Drawings or

approved Design Submittal. Additional joints are not allowed except as approved by the Project Representative. Joints made directly on the filament winding machine, known as "slip joints" or "mod joints", are not allowed. If joint locations are not indicated on the Drawings, propose number and location for approval by Project Representative.

8. Allowable tolerances shall be as listed in ASME RTP-1, Fig. 4-1 and NM7-1, except as modified herein or in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal.

9. When joining components, gaps at mating edges shall be limited to 1/4 inch maximum, and misalignment of inside surfaces shall not exceed 1/3 of the lesser wall thickness.

10. The outside surface of vessel flat bottoms after assembly shall be flat within ± 1/2 inch. In addition, localized indentations or protrusions shall not exceed ± 1/4 inch within two feet.

11. Nozzle cutout reinforcement shall be applied as specified in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal.

12. When reinforcing materials are cut to facilitate placement around an installed nozzle or opening, joints in successive reinforcing layers shall be staggered to avoid overlapping and shall not be placed so that the joints are parallel to the axis of the tank. The principal fiber direction of the woven roving reinforcement shall be parallel to the tank axis.

C. Duct Assembly: 1. Apply and overlay an identification tag on each duct spool, straight duct length, or other

equipment, showing the following information: a. Name of manufacturer. b. Date of manufacture. c. Contract number. d. Resin identification. e. Duct diameter. f. Laminate thickness. g. Unique spool identification number.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, tolerances on spool assembly shall be as follows: a. Dimensional tolerances shall be per NBS PS 15-69. Other standards specified for the

equipment in the appropriate Section take precedence when applicable. b. Minimum thickness: Laminate thicknesses designated in the applicable equipment Section,

Drawings, or approved Design Submittal are construction minimums. c. Diameter, including out of roundness, shall be ±1/8 inch or ±1 percent, whichever is greater. d. Tolerance on overall length and location of tees and laterals shall be ±1/4 inch, e. Plain ends shall be cut square with the duct axis ±1/8 inch. f. Flanges shall be perpendicular to the axis of the duct ±1/2 degree, and shall be flat to ±1/32

inch up to and including 16 inches diameter and ±1/16 inch for larger diameters. g. Tolerance on the specified angle for tees, laterals, and miters shall be ±1/2 degree.

3. All cutouts from the equipment are to be marked, indicating their original location, and given to the Project Representative.

4. Cut Lengths: the County prefers straight duct to be supplied to required lengths with a minimum of shop butt joining of shorter lengths. In order to minimize waste or in order that mandrels may be limited to 20-foot, shop butt joints will be allowed with the approval of the Project Representative. All shop butt joints shall be shown on the Fabricator's shop drawings for approval.

5. Duct Marking: a. All lengths of duct shall be identified as required above. b. If required by the Project Representative, return a marked-up copy of the layout drawings

with mark numbers referenced.

D. All laminates: 1. Refer to the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal for

reinforcement sequences. No deviations in number or sequence of plies shall be allowed without approval of the Project Representative.

2. Positive methods shall be used to assure uniform total thickness of the laminate and uniform glass-to-resin ratio without surplus resin or unsaturated glass.


3. All laminate thickness shown on the Drawings or approved Design Submittal are construction minimums. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that minimum thicknesses are obtained using the laminate sequences specified.

4. The minimum allowable structural laminate thickness shall be the total laminate thickness less the specified corrosion liner thickness.

5. Delays in hand lay-up laminating sequences for purposes of exotherm shall follow application of a mat ply. When lamination is resumed, it shall begin with a mat ply. Additional mat layers applied due to exotherm stops shall not be considered as part of the required wall thickness.

6. Laminating: a. Sequence interruptions shall not exceed 24 hours, and the in-process surface shall retain

acetone sensitivity until laminating is resumed. b. Lack of compliance with the procedures, or any indication that contamination of the surface

has occurred, shall require that surface preparation be redone before resuming. c. Before resuming lamination, any rough areas or projections shall be touch-ground to allow full

contact of the succeeding wet laminate. 7. An exotherm interruption is specifically prohibited within the corrosion liner. An exotherm

interruption between the corrosion liner and the structural layers is limited to a maximum of twelve hours.

8. Chopped strand glass applied by chopper gun is allowed in lieu of mat layers if the application is mechanically controlled in a manner that ensures uniform thickness and glass-to-resin ratio.

9. The Project Representative prior to fabrication shall approve the specific methodology of chopped glass application.

10. All non-mold surfaces shall be coated with resin containing wax additive in the amount necessary to allow full cure of the surface.

11. In the case of interior primary corrosion surfaces such as interior overlays, this wax coat shall be applied within 24 hours of original lamination.

12. In the case of exterior surfaces, this wax coat shall also contain a UV stabilizer in the type and amount recommended by the resin manufacturer.

13. The exterior surface of all equipment shall be resin rich and reinforced with one layer C-glass surfacing veil, unless otherwise indicated.

14. When specified in the applicable equipment section, the exterior coat shall be an opaque pigmented surface coat, applied only after Project Representative's inspection. Color to be selected by the Project Representative.

15. Saturation of reinforcement prior to application to equipment shall not be performed on waxed paper or other contaminated material. Saturation of reinforcement on clean paper or cardboard is allowed.

16. All cut edges shall be thoroughly coated with resin so that no glass fibers are exposed. 17. Cut edges exposed to the corrosive service shall be sealed with a corrosion liner laminate, (inner

surface and interior layers). 18. All voids shall be filled with resin putty.

E. Corrosion Liner Laminates (Inner Surface and Interior Layers): 1. A corrosion liner laminate shall be provided for all internal surfaces of the equipment that will be

exposed to the service environment. Internal supports, pipes or other components shall also be completely encapsulated with a corrosion liner laminate.

2. As a minimum, corrosion liner shall consist of one (1) layer of surfacing veil followed by two (2) layers of 1 ½ oz/sq ft mat.

3. Minimum thickness of the corrosion liner laminate shall be 100 mils, or as otherwise required in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal.

4. Other service environments may require additional layers of surfacing veil or mat, as required in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal, or as recommended for suitability in the specified service by the resin manufacturer.

5. All plies of the inner surface and interior layer are to gel completely before proceeding with the structural laminates, but in no case shall the interruption exceed twelve hours. The surface shall retain acetone sensitivity until the structural laminate is applied. Lack of compliance to either of these aspects shall be cause for rejection of the corrosion liner.

6. Completed corrosion liner as described above shall contain not less than 20 percent or more than 30 percent glass (by weight).


7. No thixotropic material shall be used in the resin for the liner or in the fabrication of any FRP components intended for internal service.

8. All edges of surfacing veils in wet lay-up shall be lapped a minimum of one inch. 9. A separately cured unreinforced gel coat shall not be used. 10. Corrosion liner shall be followed by a hand lay-up or filament wound structural laminate as

specified below.

F. Hand-Layup Structural Laminates: 1. For hand lay-up structural laminates, reinforcement shall consist of mat and woven roving in the

sequence specified in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal.

2. All woven roving shall have a ply of mat on each side. Two adjacent plies of woven roving are not permitted.

3. All edges of woven roving material in wet lay-up shall be lapped a minimum of two inches. Lapped edges of adjacent layers shall be staggered to obtain the maximum possible strength.

4. Laminates containing primarily 1-1/2 oz. per sq. ft. mat layers in conjunction with woven roving shall contain not less than 35 percent or more than 45 percent glass (by weight).

5. Laminates containing primarily 3/4 oz. per sq. ft. mat layers in conjunction with woven roving are considered to be high strength laminates and shall contain not less than 45 percent or more than 55 percent glass (by weight).

G. Filament Wound Structural Laminates: 1. For filament wound structural laminates, reinforcement shall consist of continuous strand

fiberglass roving applied with a minimum of interruptions until the specified minimum thickness is attained. This laminate shall contain the percentage of glass (by weight) specified in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal.

2. Each complete cycle of filament winding shall form a closed pattern of winding bands, which completely covers the surface with two bi-directional layers. Each layer shall be a maximum of one roving in thickness. Singular cycles shall not exceed a thickness of 0.06 inches. In laminates with helix angles greater than 75°, a minimum of 10% of the structural wall reinforcement shall be oriented at 0°, (longitudinal direction), ±5°. This reinforcement shall be applied in a minimum of two layers of weft unidirectional fabric and equally spaced through the thickness.

3. Spacing of filaments within the winding band shall be sufficiently close that bridging is avoided and glass content is maintained within the specified limits. Spacing of the filaments shall be uniform across the winding band without bunching or gapping.

4. The helix angle of winding shall be as specified in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal, as measured from the centerline of revolution of the equipment shell.

5. Unless otherwise indicated in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal, tolerance on helix angle is ± 2 degrees.

6. If layers of mat or chopped glass are needed to insure proper bonding between the corrosion liner and filament winding, or within the filament winding to accommodate the Fabricator’s manufacturing methods or to provide for laminates of acceptable quality, they may be added at the Fabricator’s option. These layers are considered to be extra material and will result in a thickness greater than specified. The amount of filament winding and unidirectional roving specified shall still be applied.

7. If for any reason, winding is interrupted to the point where the outer surface is gelled or exothermal temperatures are excessive, production shall stop and the laminate shall be allowed to cure. Any prominent ridges left on the cured surface shall be ground to smooth the projections and prevent bridging.

8. Following the grinding, a bedding layer of 3/4 oz. per sq. ft. mat or chopped glass shall be applied and thoroughly rolled to remove air. Winding with continuous strand shall be resumed before this layer gels. The additional mat layer is extra material and will result in a wall thickness greater than that specified.


H. Secondary Overlays: 1. Surface Abrasion:

a. Prior to starting secondary overlays, adequate surface abrasion with no surface contamination is required. Every precaution shall be taken to assure adequate surface preparation and a good bond of the secondary overlays.

b. Prior to making all overlays, the cured or wax-coated surfaces of the area to be overlaid shall be roughened thoroughly by grinding. The roughened area shall extend 1inch minimum beyond the proposed overlay edge. The roughened area shall be completely coated with wax coat at the completion of the joint.

c. Grinding shall be sufficiently deep that all traces of glossy resin coat are removed and glass fiber is exposed over the entire abraded surface.

d. The edges of the abraded surface shall be "feathered" out such that no sharp discontinuities exist.

e. For surface abrasion by grinding, grinding disks shall be new and not contaminated, with a grit size of 16 to 24.

f. FRP joint application shall begin within four hours of surface abrasion. Repeat surface abrasion if greater than four hours.

2. Final Surface Preparation: a. Within 15 minutes prior to beginning FRP joint application, dust shall be removed from the

abraded area by vacuuming or brushing with clean non-metallic brushes, or wiping with clean dry rags.

b. Solvent wiping the abraded area is not allowed. c. Air blowing the abraded area is not allowed. d. If any indication of contamination is present after this final surface preparation, the abraded

area shall be scrubbed with solvent and allowed to evaporate to verify removal of the contaminant. Repeat this solvent wash if necessary. Surface abrasion shall be repeated after solvent washing.

I. Joining Laminates: 1. FRP joining laminates are subject to all applicable requirements specified in other sections for

laminates. 2. FRP joints shall be reinforced with an overlay of glass reinforcement and resin which extends

equally within ± 1/2 inch on each side of the joint. A smooth contour is required. 3. Minimum thickness, ply sequence, and ply widths of FRP joints shall be as specified in the

applicable equipment sections. 4. Tolerance on width of joint reinforcement plies is + 1 inch, - 0 inch. Woven roving plies shall not

exceed the width of the mat ply below them. 5. Parts to be joined shall be restrained to prevent movement until completion and cure of the joint

overlay. 6. Parts shall be fit-up; verify that all tolerances and assembly requirements of sections are met. 7. All cut edges shall be resin coated. The void between component parts shall be completely filled

with resin putty, taking care not to extrude an excessive amount of putty into the interior. 8. The puttied area shall be ground to a smooth contour and final surface preparation repeated. 9. The abraded area to be overlaid shall be resin coated immediately prior to applying glass

reinforcement, using a stiff brush to work resin into the rough surface. 10. The resin coat shall be applied only to an area as wide (+ l inch, - 0 inch) as the next exothermal

stage of the joint sequence and shall be repeated prior to each exothermal stage. 11. No thixotropic material shall be used in this resin.

J. Environment: 1. At all times, maintain conditions in the FRP laminate work area when the final surface preparation

and FRP laminate application are in process, in order to not jeopardize the reliability of the laminate or secondary bond. As a minimum, controls shall include the following: a. All surfaces to be overlaid and all materials are to be maintained within a range of 60° F to

95° F, and be at least 5° F greater than dew-point temperature.


b. During the exotherm stage(s) of each laminate sequence, the temperature of the curing laminate will likely exceed 95° F. No further lamination may proceed until the exotherm has completed and the laminate has cooled to 95° F or less. No attempt shall be made to artificially cool the curing laminate prematurely.

c. Prepared surfaces and materials shall be protected from blowing dust, moisture and other contaminants.

d. If any of the above conditions are violated while the final surface preparation or FRP laminate application are in-process, work shall stop immediately and the process shall begin again with surface abrasion.

2. Materials shall be stored in a dry area and within the temperature and humidity limits recommended by the manufacturers.

K. Flanges: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, flanges shall be made by hand lay-up construction with nozzle neck

and flange made integrally in one piece and fabricated in accordance with the dimensions shown in the applicable equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal. All layers of reinforcement in the nozzle neck and hub shall extend uninterrupted into the flange.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, additional hub thickness shall be built-up using alternating layers of 1-1/2 oz. per sq. ft. mat and 24 oz. per sq. yd. woven roving.

3. Additional thickness in the flange shall be built-up using "ring" cutouts of mat, evenly distributed throughout the flange thickness.

4. Press molded or filament wound flanges are not allowed. Filament winding of the nozzle neck is not allowed, and the “flange on pipe” method of nozzle fabrication (Ref. RTP-1, Fig. 4-11) is not allowed.

5. To obtain proper seating, bolt holes shall be spot-faced for SAE size washers. Overall machining of the back of the flange is allowed if the fillet radius is maintained and the hub is not undercut. Bolt holes and all other cut surfaces shall be resin coated. Spot-facing or back-facing shall not produce a flange thickness less than specified in the Drawings.

6. Resin coat all flange bolt holes so that no fibers are exposed.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Allowable Visual Defects: 1. Minimize the amount of defects in all laminates. Visual defects in any area of the equipment shall

not exceed the maximum allowable levels of visual defects set forth in RTP-1 Table 6-1, Level 2. Allowable defects apply to small localized areas and shall not be averaged over larger areas.

2. Air entrapment limits, (gaseous bubbles or blisters), that are required to supplement RTP-1 Table 6-1, shall be as follows. Dimensions refer to the largest measured dimension for any specific defect. Defects at the interfaces between layers are subject to the most stringent requirement. a. Inner Surface: 2 per sq. in. up to max. size of 1/16 inch, except < 1/64 inch is unlimited. b. Interior Layer: 2 per sq. in. up to max. size of 1/8 inch, except < 1/32 inch is unlimited. c. Structural Layer: 2 per sq. in. up to max. size of 1/4 inch, except < 1/8 inch is unlimited.

3. Presence of visual defects in excess of the allowable levels shall be grounds for rejection of the equipment.

B. FRP Fabrication: 1. Implement a comprehensive quality assurance procedure. The following subparagraphs describe

the minimum requirements. 2. Inspect equipment while in-process and after completion to assure compliance to all aspects of

the specification Sections, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal. Inspection shall include, as a minimum: a. Checks for allowable visual defects b. Laminate thickness and sequence c. Glass content of laminates d. Barcol hardness e. Lack of acetone sensitivity f. Dimensional tolerances g. Adherence to Drawing requirements and approved Fabricator shop drawings


h. Surface preparation prior to secondary overlays i. Environmental conditions during fabrication j. Inspector shall complete a report of the findings including method of measurement for each

separate assembly. 3. Prior to use, test resin to establish cure characteristics and verify that it meets the resin

manufacturer's acceptance standards. 4. Resin testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D2471. Gel time, gel time to peak

exotherm, and peak exothermic temperature shall be recorded. 5. If the Fabricator in any way alters the resin after receipt, such as through the addition of styrene,

promoters, or other additives, perform one test for each drum or portion thereof mixed with additives.

6. Provide documentation for each test including resin type, manufacturer, batch and lot number, drum number, complete listing of all additives with amounts added, and description and manufacturer of each additive.

7. Inspect all glass reinforcement prior to use in fabrication and do not use any glass that does not meet the manufacturer’s acceptance standards. Glass material that is wet or has been wet shall not be used. For each type of glass and lot number used, record the manufacturer, product description, binder type, product code, production date, and lot number. For mat, woven roving, unidirectional roving, and cloth, records shall also include actual measured weight per square yard of material.

8. Retain all nozzle cutouts and other excess laminate, clearly marking each piece to identify its original location. Give the laminate samples to the Project Representative. For areas where valid laminate samples are not available, sample plugs shall be taken at the Project Representative’s request. Repair subsequent holes as approved by the Project Representative.

9. Verify glass content of corrosion liner and structural laminate on samples from at least two representative areas of each major component in accordance with ASTM D2584. This test shall be completed and the results reported as follows: a. Measure and record total thickness, corrosion liner thickness, and structural laminate

thickness. b. Separate the corrosion liner from the structural laminate and determine glass content for

each per ASTM D2584. c. Record the sequence of individual reinforcement plies from the remains of the ignition test.

10. Glass content of corrosion liner portion of laminates shall be within the range specified herein. Minimum glass content of structural layers shall satisfy the glass content used as a basis for the physical properties in the approved Design Submittal.

11. Prior to final shipment of the equipment, provide the Project Representative with a complete quality control report, consisting of copies of all records maintained for compliance with this Section.

C. Inspection: 1. The Project Representative shall be permitted access to the equipment during fabrication and

upon completion for the purpose of verifying compliance with the Contract Documents. The inspection is not intended to replace the Fabricator’s own quality control procedures.

2. Final inspection shall be performed only after the Contractor certifies in writing that all the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents have been met.

3. Provide a minimum of seven calendar days notice prior to availability of the equipment for final inspection.

4. Notify the Project Representative at the completion of particular milestones during fabrication. Provide at least 48 hours notice prior to occurrence of these milestones. The milestones are as follows: a. View tooling prior to fabrication. b. Beginning application of corrosion liner for each major component. c. Extraction of each major component prior to beginning assembly. d. Upon completion of each separate assembly.

5. The Project Representative may include additional milestones. 6. When the equipment is not to the stage of completion designated for a milestone inspection, the

Contractor agrees to be responsible for the cost of the inspector’s time and expenses which will be deducted from the next Application for Payment.


7. Allow photographing of the equipment while in-process and/or upon completion. 8. Magnification or other special viewing or measurement devices may be used. 9. Clean equipment of all foreign material and workings that might block the view for inspection. 10. The equipment shall be in a position that allows for easy access and viewing and shall be moved

to allow viewing of all parts of the equipment. 11. Evidence of poor workmanship or lack of compliance with any aspect of the Contract Documents

will be result in rejection of the equipment. 12. Subsequent repair of rejected equipment may be undertaken in an attempt to bring the equipment

to an acceptable state. The Project Representative shall approve repair procedures prior to implementation.

13. The Project Representative may employ destructive testing, such as ultimate tensile or flexural strength tests or glass content ignition tests, on available samples or use other non-destructive test methods, such as acoustic emission, ultrasonic or magnetic thickness measurement, on the completed equipment for verification of compliance to the Contract Documents.

14. Testing performed by the Project Representative will be accomplished through use of applicable ASTM test methods when appropriate.

15. Provide hardness tests for acceptance by the Project Representative on the liner surface using the Barcol impressor, Model GYZJ 934-1, calibrated at two points in accordance with ASTM D2583. Ten readings will be taken in a localized area, deleting the two highest and two lowest, and averaging the remaining six. Unless otherwise indicated in the applicable equipment section, minimum acceptable Barcol hardness shall be at least 90 percent of the resin manufacturer's minimum specified hardness for the cured resin.

16. The Project Representative may also perform an acetone sensitivity test. Evidence of a sticky or tacky surface following rubbing with an acetone-saturated cloth shall be reason for rejection of the equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. FRP specialties shall be shipped, installed, joined, and erected under the direction of the FRP manufacturer’s representative.

B. Where jointing is required, workers trained in jointing requirements shall be used at the direction of the FRP manufacturer’s representative.

C. Fabricated equipment shall have the warning, "Plastic Equipment - Handle with Care" stenciled on two sides in letters a minimum of two inches high.

3.02 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION PLANS

A. Assemble and erect in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 13231 - 1 FRP Odor Control Vertical Carbon Bed Horizontal Airflow Odor Control Tank

SECTION 13231

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) HORIZONTAL FLOW ODOR CONTROLTANK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE: 1. This section specifies fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) odor control tank to serve as vapor

phase activated carbon (caustic impregnated and non-impregnated) absorbers and to be capable of being filled with water. The FRP tank specified in this section will be part of the mobile odor control unit (MOCU) installed on a drop deck trailer as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585.

2. The requirements of Section 13230 shall apply to all aspects of this specification section. For purposes of this section, references to design drawings, construction details, laminate sequences or laminate charts herein or contained in Section 13230 shall be construed as references to the fabricator's approved Design Submittal as prepared per paragraph 13231-1.03.

3. In case of conflict, the requirements of this Section take precedence over Section 13230. 4. The FRP odor control tank will contain activated carbon vertical beds and will handle corrosive

and potentially flammable wastewater gases, as shown on the drawings. 5. The FRP odor control tank will contain mist and grease eliminator components as specified and

shown on the drawings. 6. Contractor shall install the carbon as specified in Section 13525 for each MOCU for factory and

field testing as specified. 7. The manufacturer of the FRP odor control tank has unit responsibly for fabrication and assembly

of the entire mobile odor control unit (MOCU) including other components as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585. The unit responsibility of the FRP odor control tank manufacturer shall be as described in specification section 11000. The FRP odor control tank manufacturer shall assure that the selected components, fabrication and assembly of the MOCU are checked for compatibility, ease of construction, and efficient operation and maintenance.

B. TYPE: The FRP odor control tank provided under this Section shall be horizontal, filament wound construction. Tank shall be supplied complete with all nozzles, level fittings, and supports and anchoring system to the drop deck trailer, as shown on the drawings. Tank shall be supplied with internal chambers, carbon beds, carbon support screens and gratings, baffles, mist and grease eliminators components, gratings, roof carbon access hatches, roof mist and grease filter access doors, foul air inlet duct connection flanges, and internal and external supports as needed to meet the Drawings and specifications.

C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Equipment number FRP ODOR CONTROL TANK for MOCU #1 MOCU900301 FRP ODOR CONTROL TANK for MOCU #2 MOCU900302 FRP ODOR CONTROL TANK for MOCU #3 MOCU900303 See specification Section 11009 for complete list of MOCUs equipment and components.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this Section as specified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title ASME RTP-1 Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resistant Equipment

B. Additional references are as described in Section 13230.


1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide Unit Responsibility Certificate as specified.

C. Provide all other submittals related to the MOCU fabrication and assembly as specified in other sections of this specification as part of this submittal.

D. Provide FRP odor control tank fabrication and assembly submittals including the followings as minimum. 1. All structural fabrication drawings and calculations for the FRP odor control tank support systems,

including carbon beds, mist and grease eliminators frames, FRP tank shell, FRP tank roof, FRP tank roof access hatches, FRP tank support base saddles, attachment system to the drop deck trailer frame, FRP tank coating systems, FRP tank roof guard rails, FRP tank life point anchors, as shown on the drawings. The fabrication drawings and calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the state of Washington.

2. Confirm that the FRP odor control tank fabrication drawings meet all the MOCU design criteria and requirements as shown on the drawings, and the specification.

3. Confirm that the MOCU operation will comply with operation requirements on the public roads per King County, State of Washington Department of Transportation, and US Department of Transportation regulations.

4. Test reports, laminate analysis, FEA modeling, and other design data as required. 5. Documentation of material properties used for FRP odor control tank, supports, and other

components as shown on the drawings and required for arrangement within the MOCU as required in the paragraph 13231-1.04.

6. Provide following information on the fabrication and assembly drawings of FRP odor control tank: a. Details of structural attachments, reinforcing FRP tubes, FRP channels, and overlays of FRP

tank shell including roof, walls, internal walls and plates. b. FRP odor control tank shell thickness, structural reinforcement, joints, tie downs and

anchorage system to the support saddles, as shown on the drawing. c. Saddle support and anchorage to the drop-deck trailer, including attachment details. d. Nozzles and installation, including cutout reinforcement, gusseting, etc. e. Lateral or other support fabrication details, including FRP grating attachment clips. f. Configuration and fabrication details of internals support system and other specialty items. g. Detail fabrication drawings for the vertical carbon beds support structure including gratings,

screen support as shown on the drawings and specified in this Section. h. Detail fabrication drawings for the integrated mist and grease eliminators, supports system,

filter sliding tracks, roof access doors, and hardware. i. Detail fabrication drawings for the inlet air opening flange and flexible duct connection detail

and cover plate, as shown on the drawings. j. Detail fabrication drawings for the outlet air opening flange to exhaust fans, as shown on the

drawings. k. Detail fabrication drawings for carbon beds roof access doors, hinges and locks. l. Detail fabrication drawings for the roof folding guard rails, access ladder, life point anchors

and supports as shown on the drawings. m. Drainage piping and neutralization tank installation drawings as shown on the drawings.

E. The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Signed affidavit by the FRP odor control tank manufacturer indicating that the tank was

successfully factory tested. 2. Statement by the tank manufacturer that the tank material meets the test properties specified. 3. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. 4. Manufacturer's certifications (Form 11000-A, per Section 01999) that the equipment has been

properly installed, aligned and tested and meets all requirements for satisfactory performance under the conditions; specified.

5. Manufacturers certification (Form 11000-B, per Section 01999) that instruction to operators has been completed.



A. GENERAL: 1. FRP odor control tank shall be designed in strict compliance with the approved fabrication

submittal drawings and meet the contract drawings and specifications. Filament winding utilizing either a helical wind or a hoop wind in combination with weft unidirectional tape shall be the fabrication method. The inlet foul air ducts connection flanges shall be designed and fabricated to match the flexible ducts as shown on the drawings and specified in section 15902. The outlet from the FRP odor control tank to the exhaust fan shall be designed and fabricated to match the exhaust fans intake connections as shown on the drawings. All internal foul air ducts shall be manufactured as part of the FRP tank, and shall comply with Section 13234 FRP duct fabrication.

B. DESIGN CRITERIA: 1. Physical characteristics: FRP odor control tank provided under this section shall have the

following characteristics: Inside Dimensions

Carbon Beds Roof Access

Mist and Grease Eliminators

Number of Carbon Beds

Number of air Intake

Number of air outlet

As shown on the drawings

As shown on the drawings

as shown on the drawings

2, as shown on the drawings



2. Operating conditions: FRP odor control tank shall be designed for the following characteristics:

Equipment No. Airflow

(cfm) Air flow direction Maximum internal static pressure loss

inches-W.C. MOCU900301 2x4000 Horizontal 10 MOCU900302 2x4000 Horizontal 10 MOCU900303 2x4000 Horizontal 10

3. Service Conditions: Continuous exposure to moisture-laden foul air containing concentrations of

hydrogen sulfide up to 50 parts per million, as well as other malodorous compounds of municipal sewage origin such as ammonia, organic sulfides, indols skatols, aldehydes, mercaptans, oil and grease. Foul air will have temperature ranging from 40 to 95 degrees F and relative humidity up to 100 percent.

4. Tank shall be designed to support the 12 feet vertical carbon beds and be completely filled with water, as shown on the drawings. Water filling is considered an intermittent condition, and shall not be considered in combination with seismic loading.

5. FRP odor control tank including tank outer shell, end plates, internal plates, carbon beds and supporting members shall be designed for installing on a drop-deck trailer and shall comply with all King County, State of Washington Department of Transportation, and US Department of Transportation regulations for operation on public reads.

C. FABRICATOR DESIGN: 1. Design the equipment to ensure long-term, low risk service with minimum reasonable

maintenance requirements. The design shall ensure proper functioning of the equipment at the stated operating conditions. The design shall include as a minimum, engineering drawings and calculations, materials selection, documented physical and mechanical properties, and all detailed drawings required for fabrication and assembly of the equipment.

2. The design shall satisfy all applicable national, regional, and local design and building codes. Seismic forces shall be determined in accordance with the International Building Code for both the tank with carbon only and the tank full of water and carbon.

3. Detailed design of FRP odor control tank shall follow the assembly details, procedures and methods, utilize the equations and formulas, and incorporate safety factors and allowable design stresses and strains set forth in ASME/ANSI RTP-1. Certification to RTP-1 is not required.

4. The design shall consider the interaction of the installed system including but not limited to; thermal expansion of tank and the effects of external loading from trailer transportation on public roads, ducting, fans, platforms, etc.

5. The design shall allow for an appropriate combination of conditions which may include any or all


of the following: a. Internal or external pressure. b. Static head of contents (working and test conditions). c. Mass of structure and contents. d. Design temperature including upset conditions. e. Superimposed loads, such as seismic forces. f. Superimposed transportation loads due to operation on the public roads and complying with

all King County, State of Washington Department of Transportation, and US Department of Transportation regulations.

g. Bending moments due to eccentric loads and transportation loads. h. Localized loads acting at supports, lugs, and other attachments. i. Loads due to heating or cooling and thermal gradients. j. Loads applied during erection. k. Loads applied during transportation of mobile odor control unit. l. Loads imposed by personnel during erection and operations. m. Loads imposed by the personnel during roof access for carbon replacement.

6. In conjunction with the general requirements listed above, the following specific items are to be analyzed: a. Overturning due to wind/seismic:

1) Effect of overturning on the tank shell, carbon beds, and saddle supports. b. Anchoring, due to overturning:

1) Design of saddle support anchors. 2) Analysis of saddle attachment to shell. 3) Maximum base shear load and transfer to the saddle anchors.

c. Attachments: 1) Ability of secondary overlays to support beams, clips, lugs, etc. 2) Effect of point loads on shells at attachment points. 3) Lifting lugs. 4) Interaction between towers under any load.

d. Internal pressure or vacuum: 1) Critical buckling or pressure on main shell and heads, hoop and axial. 2) Cutout reinforcements at nozzles and duct inlet/outlets. 3) Effect on any discontinuities or special components (such as internals).

e. Thermal: 1) Differential expansion of piping, ducting and tank at temperature extremes. 2) Thermal gradient through laminate.

f. Special loads: 1) Dead or live loads on top of tank shell including personnel loads during carbon

replacement. 2) Roof carbon bed access hatches doors and locking system. 3) Roof guard rails and base support attachment loads. 4) Supports for packing or other internals. 5) Man loads on internals, if possible during maintenance.

g. Design of saddle supports shall consider the potential point load on the tank shell occurring at the horn area of the saddle. The stress concentration on the tank shell shall be analyzed utilizing generally accepted methods developed for design of horizontal tank.

7. There will typically be other aspects which should be considered. It is the responsibility of the FRP odor control tank fabricator to identify and consider their effects, and to provide this information for review.

8. Material Properties: a. Provide documentation for laminate properties of each laminate construction type used in the

design. Laminates used for testing or analysis shall be similar in construction, layer sequence, resin type and cure to those used in the design and fabrication. All properties shall be adjusted to reflect any reductions at operating temperatures.

b. Properties for hand lay-up laminates constructed as Type I or Type II laminates per RTP-1, Subpart 2A, are adequately documented with the properties listed in Table 2A-3. If alternate laminate sequences are used, properties shall be determined by testing.

c. Properties of filament wound laminates shall be determined by laminate analysis, as presented in RTP-1, Appendix M-3, with the exception of ultimate strength values. Ultimate


strength properties shall be determined by testing.

D. OTHER REQUIREMENTS 1. One half of the corrosion liner thickness shall be considered sacrificial and not included in

determining structural wall thickness. Structural wall thickness shall be determined by the FRP odor control tank manufacturer per approved submittals in accordance with requirements of this Section, but shall not be less than 0.75-inch anywhere of tank shell, internal walls and panels.

2. Internal beams and support attachments shall be designed using a maximum possible shear stress for secondary bonds as described in above paragraphs, but not less than 25 psi. This shall also apply to design of external lugs required for roof folding guard rails, ladders, platforms, etc.

3. Pultruded products shall not be used for internal support members or any other aspect of the vessel design or fabrication.

E. FRP SAMPLE TESTING: Testing of samples taken from the tank’s fabrication laminates shall be in accordance with Section 13230. Results of all tests shall be provided to the Project Representative.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. The FRP odor control tank shall be assembled on a drop-deck trailer as part of complete MOCU, as shown on the drawings. The MOCU will be located outdoor area exposed to weather elements and sun within the WTD Facilities, King County, State of Washington.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication of the FRP odor control tank shall be in accordance with Section 13230 and the following: 1. The resin to be used shall be Derakane 510-C350, Hetron FR992, or equal, if approved in writing

by the Project Representative. Class I flame spread shall be achieved by addition of antimony compounds in the structural laminate only, in accordance with Section 13230. Antimony shall not be used in the corrosion liner.

2. Corrosion liner surfacing veil, as described in Section 13230, shall be C-glass surfacing veil. 3. Interior layers of glass mat, as described in Section 13230, shall consist of three layers of 1-1/2

oz. per sq. ft. glass mat. 4. Minimum corrosion liner thickness shall be 0.140-inch. Excess liner thickness occurring during

fabrication shall be added to total wall thickness, but shall not conflict with tolerance requirements.

5. For cylindrical shell laminates, the corrosion resistant liner, as described in A.2 and A.3 above, shall be followed by a filament wound structural laminate applied in accordance with Section 13230.

6. Filament winding angle shall be 60 degrees ±5 degrees. 7. All exterior surfaces shall be resin rich and reinforced with one layer of C-glass surfacing veil. 8. Laminate sequences and thicknesses shall be maintained as required in the applicable

equipment Section, Drawings, or approved Design Submittal. 9. The tank shall be factory assembled to assure proper fit on the drop-deck trailer and MOCU fan

and electrical rooms’ enclosures arrangement. 10. Carbon beds support systems shall include heavy duty polypropylene carbon support membranes

(screens), fiberglass support vertical gratings, fiberglass support vertical beams, per approved fabrication drawing submittals, minimum as shown on the drawings. The polypropylene membranes shall be supported with fiberglass gratings on both sides to hold the membrane in place during carbon removal. The polypropylene membrane shall be repairable and replaceable with removable grating on the accessible side of carbon bed, without removal of the vertical support beams. Carbon support system shall have a design safety factor of 300 percent.

11. Mist and grease eliminators support and track systems shall include heavy duty FRP fabrication. FRP supports and tracks system, as shown on the drawings. The support system shall have a design safety factor of 300 percent.

12. Pigments shall not be used within the laminates. However, a pigmented surface coat shall be applied to the exterior surface of the tank in accordance with Section 13230. The color shall be


as directed in writing by the Project Representative. 13. FRP tank roof coating shall be slip resistant and ultraviolent resistant as specified in section

09900.

2.02 TANK FITTINGS

A. Fittings shall be provided as shown on drawings. All fittings shall be ANSI 150# flanges.

2.03 METAL APPURTENANCES

A. All wires, tie down anchor plates and lifting lugs, support clips, bolts, and fasteners shall be AISI type 316 stainless steel.

2.04 GASKETS

A. Unless specified otherwise, gaskets shall be neoprene.

2.05 MIST AND GREASE ELIMINATOR FIRLTERs PADS

A. Each of the mist and grease eliminators shall consist of two stage filter pads , as shown on the drawings and as follow:

1. The first pad shall be a woven polypropylene pad 4 inch thick for grease removal.

2. The second pad shall be woven polypropylene pad 4 inch thick for mist removal.

B. The pads shall be removable for cleaning, as shown on the drawings. The filter pads frames shall be heavy duty FRP fabrication to fit in the FRP support sliding frame. The filter pads shall be equipped with grab hooks for removal.

2.06 ACCESS HATCHES

A. The FRP odor control tank carbon beds shall be provided with roof access hatches as shown on the drawings. Mist and grease eliminators shall be provided with roof access hatches as shown. The carbon bed and the mist and grease eliminators access hatches sizes and locations shall be as shown on the drawings. Access hatches shall be provided with stainless steel 316 hinges and locking mechanisms as shown. All bolt/nut/washer materials shall be stainless steel 316 as specified in paragraph 13231-2.03 and gasket materials shall be neoprene as specified in paragraph 13231-2.04.

2.07 GUARD RAILS AND LIFE POINT ANCHORS

A. Provided aluminum guard rails along the roof perimeters as shown on the drawings. The guard rails shall be folding type with snapped locks in both folded and upright position.

B. Provide life point anchors as shown on the drawings. The life point anchors shall be low profile surface mounted raised swivel tie-down ring type equal to Tandemloc products. Life point anchor shall be welded to a minimum ½” thick stainless steel plate attached or molded to the FRP roof.

C. Contractor shall provide fabrication drawings and load calculations for the roof guard rails, and life point anchors stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington for the Project Representative’s approval.

2.08 GROUNDING

A. A grounding rod shall be provided for each carbon bed and grounding wires shall be terminated at a grounding strip located in the electrical room, as shown on the drawings. The FRP odor control tank manufacturer shall provide grounding rod installation and connection drawings for review and approval by the Project Representative.

2.09 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL INDICATOR PORTS

A. Each carbon bed of the FRP odor control tank shall be provided with a 3/4-inch diameter pressure differential indicator stainless steel tube connection ports from both side carbon beds to measure and


indicate differential pressure across the carbon beds. The 3/4” tubes shall be terminated inside of fan rooms as shown on the drawings for differential pressure monitoring gage installation. Differential pressure indicator gages shall be equal to Dwyer series 2000 Magnehelic differential pressure gauges or approved equal. The differential pressure gage operating range shall be at least -15 to +15 inches of water column.

B. Each mist and grease eliminator set of the FRP odor control tank shall be provided with a 3/4” diameter pressure differential indicator stainless steel tube connection ports from both side mist and grease eliminators to measure and indicate differential pressure across the each rack. The 3/4” tubes shall be terminated inside of fan rooms as shown on the drawings for differential pressure monitoring gages installation. Differential pressure indicator gages shall be equal to Dwyer series 2000 Magnehelic differential pressure gauges or approved equal. The differential pressure gage operating range shall be at least -15 to +15 inches of water column.

2.10 CARBON SAMPLING PORTS

A. Each carbon bed shall be provided three 2-1/2” carbon sampling ports extended to the exhaust fan room with isolation PVC ball valves as shown on the drawings.

2.11 DRAINS

A. The FRP odor control tank shall be provided with 6-inch diameter drain sum with 2 inch drains and ball valves for the FRP odor control tank, as shown on the drawings.

B. The FRP odor control tank drainage system shall be provided with acid neutralization systems as shown on the drawings. The neutralizing units shall be with each 4 gph flow capacity, 5 gallons plc. tank with corrosion resistant materials, equal to Town and County Plastics products model NT-5, modified as required to meet the drawings. Contractor shall provide installation shop drawings for approval.

2.12 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide the following spare parts for each MOCU:

1. Sixteen (16) extra filter pads with frames.

2. Two extra mist and grease eliminator access door gaskets.

3. Two extra carbon bed access door gaskets.

4. One extra pack of acidity level test paper strips for the drainage neutralizing unit.

B. Spare parts shall be tagged and stored in accordance with Section 01750.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FRP INSPECTION

A. The FRP odor control tank laminate cutouts and specimens shall be examined and tested at the following milestones. 1. Extraction of each shell section, prior to beginning assembly work. This test shall be conducted

by the contractor and reported to the project representative’s approval. 2. Prior to start of assembling of FRP odor control tank on the MOCU drop deck trailer. This test

shall be conducted by the contractor and reported to the project representative’s approval. 3. During factory test of MOCU assembly and prior to shipment as stated in Section 13585. This

test shall be conducted by the project representative. 4. Laminate defects and their allowable limits and tolerances shall be in accordance with Section

13230. Minimum acceptable hardness of all FRP laminates shall be tested in accordance with Section 13230. Surfaces shall also be tested for acetone sensitivity as an indication of air inhibition. Air-inhibited surfaces are not allowed.

5. All welded thermoplastic seams shall be subjected to a non-destructive AC spark test in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The FRP odor control tank shall be installed on the support saddles on the drop deck trailer as shown in the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s approved fabrication and assembly drawing submittals. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999.

B. All piping and miscellaneous accessories shall be supported and installed as shown on the drawings and per approved shop drawings submittals.

C. Impact wrenches shall not be used in assembly.

D. Full face FRP flanges shall be connected only to other full face flanges.

3.03 FACTORY TESTING

A. The FRP odor control tank shall be hydraulically factory tested after assembling on the MOCU drop deck trailer. The entire tank shall be filled with water and monitor the tank as well as all fitting connections for at least 24 hours. Any leaks shall be corrected by the manufacturer at the factory prior to completion of the MOCU assembly. Following successful factory tank testing, the tank shall be completely emptied and dried.

B. Following hydraulic testing, the FRP odor control tank shall be smoke tested for air leakage to a pressure of 1-1/2 times of the shutoff pressure of the exhaust fans at positive or negative operating pressure. The FRP odor control tank inlet and outlet air openings shall be sealed prior to leakage testing as required, and all roof access hatches shall be secured, as they would be in normal operation of the MOCU. The test of FRP odor control tank shall be at ambient temperature. Testing shall be performed using calibrated test gages selected so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gages range. Air leakage shall be tested by filling the air compartment of the unit with smoke from a smoke generating machine or smoke stick(s) and pressurizing the compartment to the test pressure. The pressure shall be maintained for 30 minutes with no visible smoke from the unit. Tank shall be monitored for any smoke air leaks. Any leaks shall be corrected and approved by the project representative.

C. Following acceptable hydraulic testing and smoke air testing, the FRP tank and MOCU assembling shall be completed on the drop deck trailer, as shown on the drawings and approved submittal drawings.

D. The completed MOCU shall be factory tested in accordance to specification Sections 01660 and 13585 prior to shipment.

3.04 FIELD TESTING

A. The MOCU shall be field tested after shipment at the owners designated area, as specified in sections 01660 and 13585.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF CARBON

A. Carbon Loading for Factory Test 1. The Contractor shall plan and schedule to load the carbon during the MOCU factory operational

test duration for the project representative’s presence and monitoring the carbon loading. 2. Provide required quantities and type of carbon for each MOCU. 3. Notify the Project Representative 10 days in advance for a representative of the Owner to be on

site when the carbon is installed. The representative will be familiar with FRP odor control tank and MOCU maintenance procedures and shall inspect each lift of carbon as it is installed.

4. Following acceptable factory tests phase as specified in section 01660 and 13585, contractor will be permitted by the project representative to install the carbon, as specified in section 13585.


5. Carbon shall be evenly spread and compacted. Special care shall be taken to insure there are no voids or opportunities for short circuiting. Carbon shall be placed in lifts not exceeding one foot in depth.

6. After successful factory testing and approval by the project representative, the carbon shall be unloaded from the MOCU to the original carbon containers and properly packed for shipment to owner’s field testing site, as specified in section 01600.

B. Carbon Loading for Field Test 1. Following acceptable field tests phase as specified in section 01660 and 13585, contractor will be

permitted by the project representative to re- install the carbon, as specified in section 13585. 2. Carbon shall be evenly spread and compacted. Special care shall be taken to insure there are no

voids or opportunities for short circuiting. Carbon shall be placed in lifts not exceeding one foot in depth.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 13234 - 1 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Ductwork

SECTION 13234

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section provides specifications for FRP ductwork for foul air ventilating systems.

B. The requirements of Section 13230 shall apply to all aspects of this Section.


A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title AMCA 500 Air Movement and Control Association, “Laboratory Methods for Testing Louvers

for Rating” SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, “Thermoset

FRP Duct Construction Manual”

B. Also Reference Standards per Section 13230

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Data on the following: 1. Complete damper shop drawings illustrating component configuration, dimensions, and materials

list. 2. Certified damper leakage test results in accordance with AMCA 500 standards, pressure drop

characteristics, and operator torque requirements. 3. Proposed FRP ductwork plan, including sizes, hangers and supports, and field joint locations. 4. Certification from the manufacturer of the selected resin system that the selected resin and

catalyst systems are appropriate for the service conditions of the duct systems. 5. Where transitions, rectangular duct or other special system components not specifically detailed

in this section are needed, Fabricator shall be responsible for the design of the component. Minimum safety factor for critical buckling due to vacuum shall be 5:1 and deflection of flat panels shall be limited to 1% of the width of the panel. Corrosion liner shall not be included in structural calculations. Calculations and complete fabrication details shall be submitted for approval and stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state of Washington.

1.04 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Air Stream Contents: Saturated air streams containing hydrogen sulfide in concentrations up to 50 ppm at 115 degrees F.

B. Pressure and Vacuum: Minimum design conditions are 20 inches water column pressure and 20 inches water column vacuum.



A. FRP ductwork will be installed inside MOCUs. The duct work shall be designed for working temperature of 20 degrees F to 115 degrees F and corrosive sewage foul air

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FRP DUCTING

A. FRP Ducting: 1. Resin: Premium grade vinyl ester resin such as Derakane 510C-350, Hetron 992, Reichhold

Dion VER9300FR, or approved equal. 2. Antimony trioxide or pentoxide shall be added to the resin of the structural laminates only to

achieve Class-I fire retardance in accordance with ASTM E84. a. Duct located interior (inside any room, structure, or building) must include an intumescent

gelcoat that meets both a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less (per ASTM E-84).

b. Duct located exterior must include a UV inhibiting gelcoat that meets a flame spread of 25 or less (per ASTM E-84).

3. Special Catalyst: In accordance with the recommendations of the resin manufacturer for the intended service.

4. Minimum Barcol Hardness: 36. 5. Surfacing Veil (Inner Surface): Two (2) plies of 10 mil C-glass surfacing veil. 6. Interior Layer: Two (2) layers of 1-1/2 oz./sq. ft. mat. 7. Corrosion Liner Thickness, minimum: 100 mils. 8. Filament Winding Helix Angle: 55; Tolerance: 2 9. Filament Winding Cycle Thickness, Maximum: 0.06 inches 10. Filament Wound Structural Wall Glass Content,: 55 percent to 65 percent. 11. Natural color, no pigments allowed. 12. Exterior Surface Coat Required; Color: To be determined by the Owner. 13. Post cure: Equipment to be post cured in accordance with the recommendations of the resin

manufacturer for the intended service. 14. Additional Instructions:

a. Marking: In addition to the requirements of Section 13230, all spool assemblies and pieces shall be identified with piece mark numbers using non-water-soluble paint, easily removable with agents which will not attack the finish of the FRP ducting.

b. The exterior of all FRP duct to be located inside of any buildings shall be coated with two (2) coats of PPG Speedhide Flat Latex paint No. 42-7 or an equal product, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, for exterior fire retardancy in addition to the gelcoat requirements listed above.

c. Any damage to this paint coat occurring during installation shall be repaired promptly, restoring the paint coat to the original condition.

B. FRP Ducting Detail Drawings: The following Details to be used in conjunction with the FRP ductwork layout design drawings and Sections 13230 and 13234. Details are attached to the end of this Section. 1. Detail-1: FRP Duct and Fitting Thickness. 2. Detail-2: FRP Duct Stiffener Installation. 3. Detail-3: FRP Drilled Flange - Duct Drilling. 4. Detail-4: 1 ½” FRP Drilled Flange – For Duct Drain Connection. 5. Detail-5: Duct Drain and Pressure Indicator Attachment Flange. 6. Detail-6: FRP Blind Flange. 7. Detail-7: Expansion Boot. 8. Detail-8: 1-1/2" Duct Drain & Pressure Indicator Nozzle Installation. 9. Detail-9: FRP Butt Joints.


10. Detail-10: FRP Tee Joints. 11. Detail-11: FRP Miter Joints. 12. Detail-12: FRP Lateral Joints. 13. Detail-13: FRP Butt Joint and Tee Joint Chart. 14. Detail-14: FRP Damper Nozzle Installation. 15. Detail-15: FRP 90 Degrees and 45 Degrees Elbows. All elbows shall be long radius. 16. Detail-16: FRP Concentric and Eccentric Reducers. 17. Detail-17: FRP Tee and Cross. 18. Detail 18: FRP Typical Round Blast Gate. 19. Detail 19: FRP Zero Leak Damper.

C. LAMINATE SEQUENCE TABLES FOR FRP DUCTING: 1. Key for Tables 1 and 2:

a. V= 10 mil surfacing veil, as specified in Section 13234. b. C= 10 mil c-glass surfacing veil c. M= 1-1/2 oz./sq. ft. mat d. E= Exotherm ply, 1-1/2 oz./sq. ft. mat e. R= 24 oz./sq. yd., 5x4 plain weave, woven roving f. FW= Filament winding to the thickness specified. g. W= Hoop winding to the thickness specified.

Table 1: Helix Wound Laminate Composition

Thk. V C M E R Sequence of plies 0.27" 2 1 1 1 VVME + 0.15" F. W. + C 0.28" 1 1 1 1 MM+0.08" W+R+0.08" W+C 0.32" 2 1 1 1 VVME + 0.20" F.W. + C 0.37" 2 1 1 1 VVME + 0.25" F.W. + C 0.42" 2 1 1 1 VVME + 0.30" F.W. + C

D. Table 2: Hand Lay-up Laminate Composition

Thk. V C M E R Sequence of plies 0.25" 2 1 5 1 VVME MMMMC 0.30" 2 1 4 1 2 VVME MRMRMC 0.37" 2 1 5 1 3 VVME MRMRMRMC 0.41" 2 1 5 2 3 VVME MRMRMREMC 0.48" 2 1 6 2 4 VVME MRMRMREMRMC 0.61" 2 1 8 2 6 VVME

MRMRMREMRMRMRMC

E. Table 3. External Overlay Composition

Thk. V C M E R Sequence of plies 0.14" 2 3 MMMVV 0.29" 1 5 3 MMRMRMRMC 0.30" 2 1 4 1 2 VVMEMRMRMC 0.36" 1 6 4 MMRMRMRMRMC 0.37"

2 1 5 1 3 VVMEMRMRMRMC

0.40" 1 6 1 4 MMRMRMREMRMC 0.47" 2 1 7 1 5 MMRMRMREMRMRMC 0.54" 1 8 1 6 MMRMRMREMRMRMRMC


Table 4. Internal Overlay Composition

Thk. V M R Sequence of plies 0.11" 2 2 MMVV 0.18" 2 4 MMMMVV 0.22" 2 5 MMMMMVV 0.25" 2 5 1 MMRMMMVV

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel, Type 316. Type 316 stainless steel backing strips, drilled for the above bolting requirements, shall be employed for all connections at fans, demisting sections, and wherever shear or moment loads may be encountered on duct connections.

2.03 GASKETS

A. Gaskets shall be of neoprene or Buna-N.

2.04 EXPANSION BOOTS

A. Expansion boots shall be one-piece molded reinforced neoprene, a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch, secured with Type 316 stainless steel bands as shown on the detail drawings in this Section.

2.05 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

A. FRP ductwork shall be supported at intervals no greater than those indicated in the table below. Supports and hangers shall transmit all ductwork loads into the building structural frame through a system of intermediate beams and struts as necessary to accommodate requirements of these specifications. Submit construction details for supports and hangers and proposed plan for location and type of supports, including location of any required expansion joints. Acceptance of the proposed locations and construction details by the Project Representative is required prior to the start of fabrication. Where supports and hangers are detailed on the Drawings, they shall be provided as shown.

FRP Ducting Allowable Spans Inside Diameter - inches Maximum span, foot

12 12 14 12 16 12 18 12 20 12 24 15 30 15 36 15 42 17 48 20 54 20 60 22 72 24

B. Hangers and supports shall be lined with 1/8-inch thick neoprene, bonded to the metal hanger or support, to provide cushion for the duct.


C. Support systems for all FRP ductwork shall be designed by the Contractor in compliance with the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual. Support details shown on the drawings shall be incorporated into the design. 1. All supports shall be approved by the FRP duct manufacturer. 2. Support design shall be included in the submittal package for the ductwork and stamped by a

professional engineer licensed in the state of Washington.

2.06 DAMPERS:

A. General: Dampers shall have FRP or Type 316 stainless steel blades, Type 316 stainless steel shafts and hardware, and permanently lubricated bearings of material impervious to attack by acids and caustics. Damper frames shall be fabricated from channels with widths to match connecting ductworks, a minimum height of 2 inches, and a minimum thickness of 10 gauge for rectangular dampers. Frame deflection produced by a differential pressure of 20 inches across the closed damper shall not exceed 1/360th of the span in any direction. Flanges shall be pre-punched and shall match duct flanges and bolt patterns as specified in this Section. 1. Stuffing boxes shall be provided for gas-tight seals to prevent leakage at all shaft ductwork

penetrations. Stuffing boxes shall be adjustable and shall contain a minimum of two sets of packing glands. Bearings shall be flange mounted, located outside the air stream. Bearings may be oil impregnated sintered bronze or relubricable rolling element.

2. Rectangular damper linkage shall be capable of transmitting twice the maximum torque required by the damper at 20 inches differential pressure. Linkage lever arms shall be a minimum of 3 inches, and the lever arms shall be tack welded to the axles. All linkage connections shall be supplied with oil impregnated bronze bearings.

3. Operators for dampers having torque requirements of 500 inch-pounds or less shall have heavy duty manual locking quadrants. Operators for dampers having torque requirements in excess of 500 inch-pounds shall have manual worm gear actuators with hand wheels. Damper operators not readily accessible shall be provided with chain wheel operators.

4. Leakage through the closed damper at 70 degrees F and 10 inches water column differential pressure shall not exceed 30 cfm per square foot of conduit cross-sectional area for dampers. Damper supplier shall provide certified leakage, pressure drop, and torque for each damper type and size. Data shall result from prototype testing conducted in accordance with AMCA 500 test standards, in an AMCA certified test facility.

B. Rectangular Dampers: 1. Rectangular dampers shall be opposed blade with dampers of the airfoil design. Rectangular

damper blades shall have a minimum thickness of 16 gauge and a maximum width of 9 inches. Axles shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4-inch, shall be solid, and shall extend the full length of the blade stuffing boxes and bearings. Blades shall be through-bolted to axles. Blade edges and a)de deflection produced by 20 inches differential pressure across the closed damper shall not exceed 1/360th of the span or 1/8-inch, whichever is less.

2. Seals shall be provided on rectangular damper blade edges and jambs. Seal material shall be closed cell elastomer material, and shall be applied with an adhesive which will provide a bond strength greater than the tensile strength of the seal material. Seal material and adhesive shall be impervious to attack by acids and caustics.

C. Round Dampers: Round dampers shall be butterfly dampers suitable for balancing and for positive shut-off. Shut-off sealing shall be achieved by a TFE fluorocarbon 0-ring seal and be designated as “zero leakage” per this section. Dampers shall be constructed between two flanges. Minimum damper blade thickness shall be equal to flange thickness specified in this section. All dampers shall include position indications and include features for locking the damper blade into the balanced position.

D. Backdraft and Pressure Relief Dampers: FRP dampers utilized for passive air inlet (barometric backdraft) or emergency exhaust (pressure relief).


1. CSST Inlet Barometric Backdraft Damper: a. Flow range: 2,500 – 10,000 cfm b. Diameter: 26 inches c. Performance: opens at -0.25 inches w.c. over full range of flows

2. Wet Well Inlet Barometric Backdraft Damper a. Flow range: 700 – 4,600 cfm b. Diameter: 30 inch duct (damper sized to mount to concrete wall over pipe) c. Performance: opens at -0.25 inches w.c. over full range of flows

3. CSST Pressure Relief Damper a. Flow range: 2,800 – 10,000 cfm b. Diameter: 30 inches c. Performance: opens at 3 inches w.c. positive pressure over full range of flows

4. Acceptable manufacturers: Swartwout CBDR914 (Plastic Systems), or approved equal.

E. Actuators: All actuators for dampers shall be independently supported.

2.07 INSPECTION PLATES

A. Removable inspection plates, not less than 6 inches square or 8 inches round, shall be provided at all fan inlet and discharge connections, and upstream and downstream from all fittings. Inspection plates shall be gasketed and shall make an airtight seal with the parent duct. Inspection plates shall be fabricated of the same material as the parent duct.

B. Duct fabricator shall propose and submit construction, location, and installation details of inspection plates.

2.08 BLAST GATES

A. Adjustable blast gates for air balancing shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

2.09 AIR REGISTERS

A. Supply and exhaust air registers and grills shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.10 DRAINS

A. In addition to drains shown on the drawings, drain sumps, with 1-1/2 inch minimum flanged outlets, shall be provided at all low points. All drain sumps shall be fitted with a 1-1/2 inch ball valve.

2.11 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT

A. Construction details are provided on the detail drawings included in this Section. If additional details or items are required (such as transitions, etc.) the submit additional details. Approval is required prior to the start of fabrication.

2.12 PRODUCT DATA

A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Certification from the manufacturer of the selected resin system that the selected resin and

catalyst systems are appropriate for the service conditions of the duct systems as detailed in Sections 13234.

2. Installation certification Form 11000-A as specified in paragraph 13234-3.02.


2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The fiberglass reinforced plastic ductwork shall be fabricated by: 1. Corrosion Controllers, Inc. 2. Spunstrand, 3. Ershigs, Inc. 4. Paramount Fabricators, 5. Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Refer to Section 13230.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. All material and equipment shall be installed as specified and as required by the applicable state and local codes. All ductwork indicated on the Drawings is schematic. Therefore, changes in duct size, duct configuration, and location may be necessary to conform to field conditions. All such changes shall be submitted to the Project Representative for approval prior to fabrication or construction. 1. Field Joining Materials: FRP duct manufacturer shall supply all materials needed for any required

FRP duct field joining. Supply of these materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 13230.

2. Field Joining: Any required field joining shall be accomplished by the Field Joining Contractor in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 13230.

3. FRP ductwork shall be installed and supported in accordance with Sections 15096 and 15097. Ductwork shall be supported as described in Paragraph 13234-2.05. Large elbows and terminal ends of ducts shall be supported independently. Flexible connections as described in Paragraph 13234-2.04 shall be provided between fans and ductwork, and elsewhere as indicated on the layout drawings.

4. The installation shall be certified on Form 11000-A, Section 01999.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: All ductwork shall be leak-tested as described in Section 15050. All audible leaks shall be sealed. All tests shall be scheduled with the Project Representative by giving 24 hours notice. Provide necessary fittings, blind flanges, etc to isolate sections of duct and to enable all sections of ductwork to be tested.

B. Manufacturer’s Services: 1. The FRP duct manufacturer shall have a representative on-site at the start of the installation of

the ductwork to supervise installation of the FRP duct system. The FRP duct manufacturer representative shall remain on-site to witness installation of all ductwork to ensure the Contractor is employing the proper procedures. The FRP duct manufacturer representative shall be on-site no less than two 8-hour days during the start of installation.

2. The FRP duct manufacturer representative shall instruct the Contractor on the proper installation procedures at any time the FRP duct manufacturer representative and/or the Project Representative witnesses improper installation practices.

PART 4 FABRICATION DETAILS

4.01 GENERAL

A. Refer to Standard Detail Drawings and Tables fabrication details, thickness and dimensions.


PART 5 FRP DUCT AND FITTING THICKNESS

5.01 DETAIL - 1

FRP DUCT AND FITTING THICKNESS DUCT

I.D.

FRP DUCT F.W. WALL THK.

( TABLE 1 )

FRP FITTINGS H.L.U. WALL THK.

( TABLE 2 ) 12" O.27" 0.30" 14" 0.27" 0.30" 16" 0.27" 0.30" 18" 0.32" 0.37" 20” 0.32" 0.37" 24" 0.37" 0.41" 30" 0.37" 0.41" 36" 0.42" 0.48" *42" 0.37" 0.41" *48” 0.42” 0.48” *54” 0.42” 0.48” *60” 0.42” 0.48” *72” 0.42” 0.48”

*See Detail-2 for stiffener attachment and spacing

GENERAL NOTES: 1. WALL THICKNESS OF ECCENTRIC AND CONCENTRIC REDUCERS TO BE THAT OF THE

LARGER I.D. USING THE FITTING COLUMN THICKNESS.


PART 6 FRP DUCT STIFFENER INSTALLATION

6.01 DETAIL - 2

DUCT SIZE

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

42” 15’-0” 2” 2” 1” 4” 2” 0.28” 0.29”

48” 15’-0” 2” 2” 1” 4” 2” 0.28” 0.29”

54” 15’-0” 2” 2” 1” 4” 2” 0.28” 0.29”

60” 15’-0” 3” 3” 1” 4” 2” 0.28” 0.29”

72” 10’-0” 3” 3” 1” 4” 2” 0.28” 0.29”


PART 7 FRP DRILLED FLANGE – DUCT DRILLING

7.01 DETAIL - 3

NOZZLE I.D.

NOZZLE O.D

BOLT CIRCLE

NO. OF BOLT HOLES

DIA. OF BOLT HOLES

A

B (table 2)

C

D

12" 16 3/8" 15" 12 1/2" 2" 0.30" 0.47" 0.50" 14" 18 3/8" 17" 12 1/2" 2" 0.30" 0.47" 0.50" 16" 20 3/8" 19" 16 1/2" 2 1/2" 0.30" 0.54" 0.63" 18" 22 3/8" 21" 16" 1/2" 2 1/2" 0.37" 0.60" 0.63" 20" 24 3/8" 23" 20 1/2" 2 1/2" 0.37" 0.60" 0.63" 24" 28 3/8" 27" 20 1/2" 2 1/2" 0.41" 0.60" 0.63" 30" 34 3/8" 33" 28 1/2" 2 1/2" 0.41" 0.63" 0.63" 36” 40 3/8” 39” 32 ½” 2 ½” 0.48” 0.63” 0.63” 42” 46 3/8” 45” 36 ½” 2 ½” 0.47” 0.75” 0.75” 48” 54 3/8” 52” 44 5/8” 3” 0.48” 0.75” 0.75” 54” 60 3/8” 58” 44 5/8” 4” 0.61” 1.00” 1.00” 60” 66 3/8” 64” 52 5/8” 4” 0.61” 1.00” 1.00” 72”X24” 80”X32” *** *** *** 4” 0.61” 1.00” 1.00” *** To be designed by Contractor


PART 8 1 ½” FRP DRILLED FLANGE – FOR DUCT DRAIN

8.01 DETAIL - 4

125/150 PATTERN NOZZLE I.D.

O.D

B.C.

NO. OF BOLT HOLES

DIA. OF BOLT HOLES

A

B

C

D

1 ½”

5”

3 7/8”

4

5/8”

2”

0.22”

0.50”

0.50”


PART 9 DUCT DRAIN AND PRESSURE INDICATOR ATTACHMENT FALNGE

9.01 DETAIL - 5


BLIND FLANGES

9.02 DETAIL – 6

NOZZLE O.D

BOLT CIRCLE NO. OF BOLT HOLES

DIA. OF BOLT HOLES

A (table 2)

12" 16 3/8" 15" 12 1/2" 0.30" 14" 18 3/8" 17" 12 1/2" 0.30" 16" 20 3/8" 19" 16 1/2" 0.30" 18" 22 3/8" 21" 16" 1/2" 0.37" 20" 24 3/8" 23" 20 1/2" 0.37" 24" 28 3/8" 27" 20 1/2" 0.41" 30" 34 3/8" 33" 28 1/2" 0.41" 36” 40 3/8” 39” 32 ½” 0.48” 42” 46 3/8” 45” 36 ½” 0.47” 48” 54 3/8” 52” 44 5/8” 0.48” 54” 60 3/8” 58” 44 5/8” 0.61” 60” 66 3/8” 64” 52 5/8” 0.61”


PART 10 EXPANSION BOOT

10.01 DETAIL-7

GENERAL NOTES:

1. AFTER APPLYING MAT BUILD-UP, COVER PIPE END AS SHOWN WITH A PROTECTIVE OVERLAY 0.14” THICK (MMCC) (TABLE 3). FINISHED SURFACE TO BE SMOOTH TO ALLOW SEALING OF THE EXPANSION BOOT.


PART 11 1 ½” DIA. DUCT DRAIN AND P.I. NOZZLE INSTALLATION

11.01 DETAIL - 8

NOZZLE I.D.

EXTERNAL OVERLAY INTERNAL OVERLAY

THK. (TABLE 3)

WIDTH (TABLE 5)

THK. (TABLE 4)

WIDTH. (TABLE 6)

1 1/2”

0.29”

10”

0.11”-(MMCC)”

4”

GENERAL NOTES:

1. RADIUS INSIDE EDGE OF NOZZLE, IF INTERNAL OVERLAY IS APPLIED, 1/8” MIN. TO ¼” MAX. WHERE INTERNAL OVERLAY IS NOT POSSIBLE RESIN COAT EDGES AS SHOWN IN DETAIL-10 AND APPLY 0.30” THICK EXTERNAL OVERLAY.

2. FILL VOIDS WITH RESIN PUTTY. FLARE PUTTY INTO A RADIUS ¼” MIN. TO 3/8” MAX. 3. LOCATE VENT HOLE AS LOW AS POSSIBLE, RESIN COAT EDGE OF HOLE.


PART 12 FRP BUTT JOINTS

12.01 DETAIL - 9


PART 13 FRP TEE JOINTS

13.01 DETAIL - 10

GENERAL NOTES:

1. FILL VOIDS WITH RESIN PUTTY AS SHOWN. FLARE PUTTY INTO A RADIUS ¼” MIN. TO 3/8” MAX.

PART 14 FRP MITER JOINTS

14.01 DETAIL - 11


PART 15 FRP LATERAL JOINTS

15.01 DETAIL - 12

GENERAL NOTES:

1. FILL VOIDS WITH RESIN PUTTY AS SHOWN, FLARE PUTTY INTO A RADIUS 3/8” MIN.AND ¾” MAX


PART 16 FRP BUTT JOINTS AND TEE JOINTS CHARTS

16.01 DETAIL – 13

FRP DUCT BUTT JOINT OVERLAY DUCT

I.D. EXTERNAL OVERLAY

( TABLE 2 ) THK. WIDTH

12" 0.30" 8" 14" 0.30" 8" 16" 0.30" 8" 18" 0.37" 10" 20” 0.37" 10" 24" 0.36" 10" 30" 0.36" 12" 36" 0.36" 14" 42" 0.36" 14" 48” 0.40” 14” 54” 0.47” 14” 60” 0.47” 16” 72” 0.47” 16”

GENERAL NOTES: 1. FOR 24" DIA. AND LARGER, AND WHERE ACCESSIBLE APPLY AN INTERNAL OVERLAY

(MMCCX6"WIDE)

FRP DUCT TEE JOINT OVERLAY DUCT EXTERNAL OVERLAY

( TABLE 2 ) I.D. THK. WIDTH 12" 0.30" 10" 14" 0.30" 10" 16" 0.30" 10" 18" 0.37" 12" 20" 0.37" 12" 24" 0.37" 12" 30" 0.37" 14" 36" 0.37" 14" 42" 0.4" 14" 48” 0.4” 16” 54” 0.4” 16” 60” 0.4” 16”

GENERAL NOTES: 1. FOR HEADER DIAMETER 24" AND LARGER, AND WHERE ACCESSIBLE, APPLY AN INTERNAL

OVERLAY (MMCCX6"WIDE)


PART 17 DAMPER NOZZLE INSTALLATION

17.01 DETAIL - 14

NOZZLE I.D. EXTERNAL OVERLAY INTERNAL OVERLAY THK. WIDTH THK. WIDTH

12” 0.36” 14” 0.11” 6” 14” 0.36” 14” 0.11” 6”

20” 0.36” 14” 0.11” 6”

GENERAL NOTES: 1. RADIUS INSIDE EDGE OF NOZZLE 1/8” MIN. TO 1/4” MAX. 2. FILL VOIDS WITH RESIN PUTTY, FLARE PUTTY INTO A RADIUS 1/4 MIN. TO 3/8”

MAX.


PART 18 90 AND 45 DEGREE ELBOWS

18.01 DETAIL - 15

DIAMETER C

DIAMETER C

4” 6” 22” 33” 5” 7 1/2” 24” 36” 6” 9” 26” 39” 7” 10 1/2” 28” 42” 8” 12” 30” 45” 9” 13 1/2” 32” 48” 10” 15” 36” 54” 12” 18” 42” 63” 14” 21” 48” 72” 16” 24” 54” 81” 18” 27” 60” 90” 20” 30” 70” 105”

ELBOWS LONG RADIUS ELBOWS SHORT RADIUS C = 1.5 x DIAMETER C = 1.0 x DIAMETER T = 1.0 x DIAMETER T = 0.5 x DIAMETER

GENERAL NOTES: 1. ELBOWS 2” DIA. THROUGH 30” DIA ARE ONE (1) PIECE MOLDED SMOOTH RADIUS. 32”DIA

AND LARGER ARE FIVE (5) PIECE MITERED 90 DEGREE ELBOWS AND 3 PIECE MITERED 45 DEGREE ELBOWS.


PART 19 ECCENTRIC AND CONCENTRIC REDUCERS

19.01 DETAIL - 16

ECCENTRIC REDUCER

INCHES OF REDUCTION

A

1” 4 ¼” 2” 8” 3” 11 ¾” 4” 15 1/2” 5” 19 1/4” 6” 23” 7” 26 3/4” 8” 30 1/4” 9” 34” 10” 37 ¾” 11” 41 1/2” 12” 45 1/4” 13” 49” 14” 52 3/4” 15” 57 1/4” 16” 64” 17” 67 3/4” 18” 71 1/2” 19” 69 1/4” 20” 75 1/4”

CONCENTRIC REDUCER

INCHES OF REDUCTION

A

1” 2 1/8” 2” 4” 3” 5 7/8” 4” 7 3/4” 5” 9 5/8” 6” 11 1/2” 7” 13 3/8” 8” 15 1/8” 9” 17”

10” 18 7/8” 11” 20 3/4” 12” 22 5/8” 13” 24 1/2” 14” 26 3/8” 15” 28 5/8” 16” 32” 17” 33 7/8” 18” 35 3/4” 19” 34 5/8” 20” 37 5/8”


PART 20 90 DEGREE TEE AND CROSS

20.01 DETAIL 17

GENERAL NOTES:

1. FOR DIAMETERS 10” DIA AND SMALLER: A = 4” AND FOR DIAMETERS 12” DIA AND LARGER: A = 6”


PART 21 FRP ROUND BLAST GATE

21.01 DETAIL - 18

POLYESTER RESIN

VINYLESTER RESIN

NEOPRENE SEALS

CONSTRUCTION BLADE

THKNESS HOLE SIZE BOLT SIZE

4” THRU 16”

.187

7/16”

3/8”

18” THRU 24”

.250

7/16”

3/8”

26” THRU 36”

.320

7/16”

3/8”

42” THRU 72”

.375

9/16”

1/2”

GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL FRP CONSTRUCTION WITH STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 316 FASTENERS


PART 22 FRP ZERO EAK DAMPER - LEAK FREE AT 1 PSI

22.01 DETAIL - 19

POLYESTER RESIN

VYNELESTER RESIN

NEOPRENE, VITON, EPDM OPTIONAL SEAT

CONSTRUCTION BLADE

THKNESS AXLE DIM

BLADE STIFFENERS

4” THRU 10” .125 0.75 -- 12” THRU 16” .125 1.0 1 16” THRU 22” .187 1.0 2 24” THRU 28” .25 1.5 2 30” THRU 36” .375 1.5 3

GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL FRP CONSTRUCTION WITH STAINLESS STEEL SHAFT AND FASTENERS

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 13525 - 1 Activated Carbon

SECTION 13525

ACTIVATED CARBON

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies activated carbon for odor reduction.

B. Activated carbon shall be virgin, non-impregnated, high surface area, tightly packed granular type, specifically manufactured to absorb vapor phase organic and malodorous compounds of the type typically generated from municipal wastewater. Activated carbon shall be suitable for regeneration upon return to the supplier. Supplier of activated carbon shall be experienced in the supply and operation of activated carbon systems for vapor phase organic and hydrogen sulfide removal at wastewater treatment facilities.


A. General: 1. Activated carbon shall be specifically manufactured for continuous exposure to moisture-laden

foul air containing concentrations of hydrogen sulfide up to 50 parts per million, as well as other malodorous compounds of municipal sewage origin such as ammonia, organic sulfides, indols, skatols, alclehydes, and mercaptans. Foul air will have temperatures ranging from 40 to 95 degrees F and relative humidity up to 100 percent.

B. Operating Conditions: The activated carbon systems will be located downstream of the WTD facilities. 1. Maximum temperature in tank, degrees F 95 2. Maximum face velocity in bed, fpm 50 3. Minimum empty bed detention time, sec. 3.6 4. Bed thickness, ft 3.0 5. Minimum H2S removal at 1 ppm inlet, percent 95 6. Minimum H2S removal at 10 ppm inlet, percent 99

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Detailed product information for the activated carbon proposed for the job, including verification of all properties specified in paragraph 2.02, as well as total weight per bed.

C. Certified weights of the water-saturated carbon beds.

D. A detailed description of the procedure for installation and commissioning of the activated carbon.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Granular activated carbon.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 13525 - 2 Activated Carbon

2.02 MATERIALS

Activated Carbon: Substrate Bituminous Coal or coconut shell particle size (U.S. Sieve) 4x8 Mean particle diameter, millimeters (per ASTM D2862) 3.4-3.8 CCl4 number percent by weight minimum (per ASTM D3467) 60 Hardness number minimum (per ASTM D3802) 95 Maximum moisture content percent by weight (per ASTM D2867) 2 Apparent density, minimum gms/cc (per ASTM D2854) 0.46-0.50 Maximum head loss through bed at 50 fpm velocity, inches w.c./ft bed depth (a)

1.5

H2S breakthrough capacity minimum, gms H2S removal/ gm carbon (b) 0.04 Notes: 1. Head loss shall be determined by passing dry air at 70 degrees F and 1 atm. pressure through a 2-inch

diameter by 12-inch deep bed of carbon placed in a dense packed arrangement per ASTM D2854. 2. The determination of H2S breakthrough capacity shall be made by passing a moist (70 percent RH) air

stream containing 1 percent H2S at 1,450 cubic centimeter per minute flow through a test bed of uniformly packed activated carbon of the following dimensions: depth - 9 inches, diameter - 0.725 to 1.0 inch. The test shall be monitored to a 10 ppm breakthrough and the results expressed in gms H2S removal/gm carbon which is calculated from the carbon sample weight uncorrected for moisture.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

B. The carbon shall be installed for factory and field testing as specified in section 13231, 13585, and 01660 for each mobile odor control unit. Contractor shall install carbon on each of the supplied MOCUs.

C. The carbon shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Each bed shall be packed uniformly to the density specified with sample probes installed as shown. The packed bed shall contain no void pockets including bed areas around the sampling probes, near the vessel walls, and near the access hatches. Each bed shall have a smooth surface with uniform bed depth throughout.

3.02 COMMISSIONING

A. The commissioning period shall be carried out under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative and shall be continuous for a minimum of 3 days.

3.03 PERFORMANCE TEST

A. After completion of the commissioning period, each activated carbon bed shall be subjected to a performance test. The performance test shall extend for one year after Final Acceptance. During this year, the manufacturer shall supply a quarterly analysis of the activated carbon to be reported as hydrogen sulfide capacity. The manufacturer shall furnish the sufficient number of containers to accommodate the three sampling levels in each compartment of each activated carbon bed, as shown. The manufacturer shall also furnish instructions for sampling and disposition.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 13585 - 1 Mobile Odor Control Unit (MOCU)

SECTION 13585

MOBILE ODOR CONTROL UNIT (MOCU) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the mobile odor control unit (MOCU), as complete unit including all components such as Drop deck trailer, FRP odor control tank, Fan and Electrical rooms Enclosures, Electrical systems, Exhaust fans, Flexible Foul Air duct, etc. as shown on the drawings and specified in this section. The MOCU components are either specified in this section or are referenced to other sections for detail specifications.

B. The MOCU shall be suitable to be pulled by an existing King County owned semi-tractor with

a fifth wheel. The MOCU shall comply with the King County, State of Washington Department of Transportation, and U.S. Department of Transportation regulations for operation and transportation on the public roads.

1.02 EQUIPMENT LIST

A. Equipment List

Equipment Description Equipment Number Mobile Odor Control Unit #1 MOCU900301

Mobile Odor Control Unit #2 MOCU900302

Mobile Odor Control Unit #3 MOCU900303

See specification Section 11009 for complete list of MOCUs equipment and components.


A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect

at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ASTM A514 High Yield Strength Steel Plate Suitable for Welding

ASTM A572 High Strength Steels of Structural Quality

ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method

ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

ASTM E413 Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA 820 Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities

1.03 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The MOCU will be pulled over public highways and rural roads by an existing King county owned semi-tractor fifth wheel carrying fully loaded MOCU including all mechanical and electrical components with loaded carbon beds.

B. The MOCU will be parked in public open, unprotected, outdoor locations where requiring

odor control.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Gross and net weight of MOCU including all components with and without loaded

carbon beds. 2. Weight distribution of the MOCU with and without loaded carbon beds during transit

and during operation at parked position. 3. Complete FRP odor control tank submittals as specified in specification Section

13231. 4. Following submittals and information for drop deck trailer.

a. Drop deck frame fabrication structural, mechanical and electrical drawings and diagrams for MOCU application. Structural drawings and load calculation signed by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington.

b. Drop deck trailer frame, fifth wheel plate and landing gears. c. Suspension and axles. d. Brakes and anti-lock system. e. Wheels, tiers, mud flaps. f. Electrical system, lights, traffic signals, and electrical connections to the

existing King county tractor.


5. MOCU fan and electrical rooms enclosures layout and structure fabrication drawing. All of the following structural shop drawings and calculations shall be prepared and signed by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington a. MOCU fan and electrical rooms enclosures fabrication structural drawings

and calculations as shown on the drawings. b. MOCU fan and electrical rooms enclosures Structural drawings and

calculations of attachment system to the drop deck trailer frame as shown on the drawings.

d. MOCU fan and electrical rooms enclosures access doors, latches, hinges fabrication drawings, as shown on the drawings.

f. MOCU roof access ladder and folding guard railing system structural drawings.

g. MOCU fan and electrical rooms access folding steps fabrication and structural drawings, as shown on the drawings.

6. Provide shop drawings for the exhaust fans, exhaust air silencers, exhaust air discharge duct and foul air duct installation, as shown on the drawings.

7. Provide MOCU fan and electrical rooms ventilation system as shown on the drawings.

8. Provide complete electrical conduits, wiring, lighting, grounding, panels and VFD panels installation shop drawings, as shown on the drawings.

9. Provide MOCU entire layout and dimensional drawings, as shown on the drawings. 10. Provide list of components and materials on submittal mechanical and electrical

drawings. 11. Provide details of wiring connections of the MOCU drop deck trailer to the existing

King County tractor. 12. Provide coating systems of MOCU fan and electrical rooms enclosures interior and

exterior walls, roofs as specified in the specification section 09900. 13. Provide MOCU drainage piping system installation shop drawings and acid

neutralization system information, as shown on the drawings.

B. A copy of the contract mechanical and electrical drawings, with addendum updates, marked to show specific changes necessary for the proposed MOCU system in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawings shall be marked “No Changes Required.” Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.

C. A copy of this specification section and section 13231, with addendum updates included,

and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks () shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The MOCU structural design shall be such that it can be towed fully loaded at 55 mph over paved highways and at 2 mph over dry dirt roads. The design shall meet the contract drawings and specifications and to meet following requirements: Drop deck trailer nominal length 35’-0” Drop deck trailer lower deck length 25’-0 Drop deck trailer lower deck maximum height (ground to deck) 3’-0” Drop deck trailer width 8’-6” MOCU length 32’-8” MOCU width 8’-6” MOCU height (trailer lower deck floor to roof of MOCU) 9’-0” Maximum noise level transmitted through the fan and electrical rooms enclosures

45dBA at 15’

B. Contractor shall calculate and submit the drop deck trailer Tare Weight, Frame Rating, Gross

Vehicle Weight and Gross Combined Weight rating based on the MOCU approved fabrication shop drawings. The load calculations shall include FRP odor control tank, fan and electrical rooms enclosures, drop deck trailer, all installed components.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. FRP odor control tank acceptable products shall be as specified in Section 13231. B. The fan and electrical rooms enclosures shall be manufactured by Air Enterprises,

Dynasonics Systems, Inc., Innovative Metals Inc. or approved equal, modified as necessary to provide the specified features and structural strength as shown on the drawings and specified in this specification section.

C. The exhaust fans, silencers and ductworks acceptable products shall be as specified in

Division 15. D. The electrical equipment acceptable products shall be as specified in Division 16. E. The drop deck trailer shall be equal to Pratt Industries Inc. product modified as required to

meet the MOCU requirements and meet this specification and drawings. 2.03 MOCU A. GENERAL:

1. The MOCU layout, arrangement and configuration shall be as shown on the drawings and shall have all the features shown on the drawings and specified herein.

2. The fan and electrical rooms’ enclosures shall be of all aluminum construction with stainless steel fasteners, as shown on the drawings and specified in this section.

3. The FRP odor control tank shall meet the requirements of specification Section 13231.

4. The MOCU components shall be assembled on the drop deck trailer at the MOCU manufacturer’s factory. The completed MOCU shall be shipped fully assembled to King County as specified in section 01600.


B. MOCU SUPPORT BASE 1. The fan and electrical rooms’ enclosures shall be constructed on a structural

aluminum support base plate. The base plate shall be braced to the drop deck trailer frame to support all internal components and walls of enclosure without sagging or pulsating. The entire base plate shall be continuously welded at all seams. The floor base plate shall have slope toward entry door. The floor base plate shall be minimum 1/2-inch thick aluminum plate. Contractor shall provide fabrication shop drawings and calculations stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington for the Project Representative’s approval.

2. The FRP odor control tank supports base saddles shall meet the drawings and specification section 13231 requirements.

3. The MOCU support base installation including fan and electrical rooms and FRP odor control tank shall be coordinated with the drop deck trailer structural frame members for proper support and anchorage of the enclosures to the trailer frame.

C. THE FAN AND ELECTRICAL ROOMS ENCLOSURES

1. The fan and electrical rooms enclosures layout shall be as shown on the drawings. The fan and electrical rooms enclosures shall be built with modular panels on the support base plate. All panels shall be double wall construction with aluminum sheets. Each panel shall contain an integral frame of extruded aluminum bonded or press formed to the facing sheets to provide a moisture tight seal at the panel perimeter. Panels shall be load-bearing and capable of forming the enclosure with or without additional structural members. Panels shall be joined together with extruded aluminum mullions and fastened with closed-end aluminum rivets. Any tie-ins to the enclosure panels shall be made using a support mullion extrusion, which is an integral part of the enclosure and shall not be bolted or screwed to or through the enclosure. All panel joints shall be sealed to provide a permanent airtight seal. Thickness of panel skin, core density, rib spacing, and mullion spacing shall be regulated to eliminate panel pulsation and restrict the maximum deflection to 1/200 of any span at design load of 1-1/2 times the design loads which to include maintenance personnel roof load, roof snow, wind, and public road transportation related loads as required for the Seattle, Washington, metropolitan area. The wind and snow load shall meet the ASCE 7-10, Chapter 29, and Chapter 30 for MOCU enclosure as other structure, or assume minimum 25 psf snow load over the entire roof. The structural design shall consider all public roads transportation loadings as required for trailer fabrication industries and defined in ASCE and IBC.

2. The panel system layout shall provide the functionality as shown on the drawings. 3. All exterior panels shall have minimum 0.0625-inch “leather grain” aluminum facing

sheets. Interior walls of the fan and electrical rooms shall have 0.040-inch smooth aluminum facing sheets. All walls shall have a 3 PCF density frothed-in-place polyisocyanurate core. Core material shall comply with NFPA-90A.

4. Each fan and electrical room shall have access doors as shown on the drawings. Access doors shall be of the same construction as wall panels above. They shall be guaranteed tight closing through the use of double seals around the entire periphery. Each access door shall be mounted with corrosion-resistant tamper-resistant hinges, and shall have handles operable from outside. All door hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Handles shall be recessed type and shall be lockable from the outside. Locks shall conform to county standards.

5. The manufacturer must have published literature available stating the sound absorption coefficient of panel systems obtained using the ASTM Method Test for Sound Absorption of Acoustical Materials in Reverberation Rooms ASTM C423-66, and the sound transmission loss obtained using procedures conforming to ASTM


E90-70, E413-70T, and other pertinent standards. These tests must be documented by an independent acoustical laboratory (Riverbank Laboratories, Kodaras Labs, etc.). The manufacturer shall also have published literature available describing the load-carrying capabilities and the thermal characteristics of panel systems.

6. The entire roof of fan and electrical rooms enclosures, and FRP odor control tank shall be covered with a slip resistant roofing system consisting of a flexseal blanket made of 0.20-inch thick hypalon rubber elastomer bound to a 0.015-inch thick backing. This blanket shall be permanently bonded to the roof with deck adhesive. The roof shall be sloped to assure water run-off.

7. The entire roof perimeter shall be provided with aluminum guard rails with access ladder as shown on the drawings. The guard rails shall be folding type with snapped locks in both folded and upright position.

8. Contractor shall provide fabrication drawings and load calculations for the fan and electrical rooms’ enclosures walls, ceiling, roof and guard rails stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington for the Project Representative’s approval.

9. Provide fan and electrical room ventilation fans, intake air louvers, and backdraft dampers as shown on the drawings and specified in specification division 15.

10. Contractor shall provide fabrication drawings and load calculations for the fan and electrical rooms access folding steps as shown on the drawings stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington for the Project Representative’s approval.

11. Provide life point anchors as shown on the drawings. The life point anchors shall be low profile surface mounted raised swivel tie-down ring type equal to Tandemloc products. Life point anchor shall be welded to a minimum ½” thick stainless steel plate attached to the roof of the fan and electrical rooms roof. Contractor shall provide fabrication and installation drawings for approval.

12. Provide shop drawings for wall mounted electrical and mechanical equipment support system for approval.

D. THE FRP ODOR CONTROL TANK

1. The FRP odor control tank shall be fabricated to meet the design drawings and specification section 13231 requirements.

E. MOCU ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS

1. All electrical and control wiring, conduits and devices shall be provided by the contractor and installed in the factory as shown on the electrical and instrumentation drawings and as described in the specification Division 16. Contractor shall submit the electrical shop drawings for project representative’s approval.

F. MOCU ENCLOSURES EXTERIOR COATING

1. MOCU enclosures exterior surfaces shall be painted with one coat of Sherwin Williams primer number P6062, or equal, with reducer number R7Krr, and two finish coats of Sherwin Williams Polane Polyurethane Enamel with exterior catalyst number V66V29, or equal. MOCU exterior shall be clean and dry prior to painting. Color shall be as selected by the County. Contractor shall submit coating system as specified in section 09900 for the project representative’s approval.


2.04 DROP DECK TRAILER

A. TYPE AND DIMENSIONS 1. Trailer shall be Drop Deck type as shown on the drawings, with following

dimensions: 2. Nominal Length: 35-ft, with 25-ft Lower deck and 10-ft upper deck lengths. 3. Nominal Width: 8’-6” 4. Maximum finish grade height of lower deck from road surface shall be 36- inches,

and maximum height of upper deck from the road surface shall be 57-inches or as required to meet the existing semi-tractor fifth wheel plate height.

B. FIFTH WHEEL PLATE AND KING PIN 1. The trailer frame shall have an upper fifth wheel plate welded to the chassis rails.

The fifth wheel plate dimensions including height and king pin location shall be designed to match the existing semi-tractor with a fifth wheel plate, Model Peterbilt 1987 with VIN # 1xP-ADB9X-2-HD251481 located at the West Point Treatment Plant. Contractor shall field verify all required dimensions and requirements for design and fabrication of the new drop deck trailer to match the existing semi-tractor fifth wheel for transportation.

C. DROP DECK TRAILER LOAD CAPACITY 1. Tare Weight: Shall be calculated and submitted by the contractor based on

submitted MOCU loads and drop deck trailer calculation. 2. Frame Rating: Shall be calculated and submitted by the contractor based on

submitted MOCU loads for the drop deck trailer calculation. 3. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Shall be calculated and submitted by the

contractor based on submitted MOCU load calculation. 4. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Shall be calculated and submitted by the

contractor based on submitted MOCU and drop deck trailer load calculations. 5. Trailer design load calculations shall meet the snow and wind loadings, stability

calculation, turning calculation, brake calculations, and trailer frame design related safety factors as required for trailer fabrication standards and meet International Building Code (IBC).

D. FRAME FABRICATION

1. The trailer frame shall be built of ASTM A514 (130,000 PSI) steel, all other members shall be of ASTM A572 Grade 50 steel with 50,000-pound minimum yield strength. All seams shall be fully welded.

2. The trailer frame shall be fabricated for the MOCU loads as described in the paragraph 13585-2.04C. The fabrication shop drawings and calculation shall be stamped by a structural or mechanical engineer registered in the State of Washington.

3. The trailer frame fabrication shall be coordinated with the MOCU enclosures layout and support system requirements.

E. FRAME AND LANDING GEAR

1. The landing gear shall be two-speed hand crank type with 150,000-pound minimum static load capacity and sandshoes. Two spirit levels, mounted 90 degrees apart, shall be mounted on the trailer to facilitate trailer leveling. Landing gears shall provide complete support of the MOCU weight during parked and operational time as shown on the drawings with no load on the trailer wheels.


2. Provide wheel chocks for all four-wheel pairs and provide leveling blocks and landing gear leveling shims sufficient to allow leveling of trailer on grade differentials of up to 9 inches, with load on the trailer wheels.

3. Provide dunnage pads for each landing gear to improve cribbing and dunnage for landing gears. Dunnage pads shall be engineered thermoplastic material with 27”x27”x2” size, black color, grip handles equal to DICA Dunnage outrigger pad for 70,000lb vertical load.

F. SUSPENSION AND AXLES

1. The trailer shall be provided with tandem-axle leaf suspension for mixed highway and off-road use, designed to eliminate spring windup and hopping action during panic stops. Each axle shall have oil hubs and be 5-inch square with inter-changeable inner and outer bearings. A hubometer shall be installed on the left-front axle. The suspension and axles capacities shall meet the MOCU loads as described in the above paragraphs. The trailer manufacturer shall confirm the transportation of MOCU on public roads.

G. BRAKES

1. Brakes shall be S-cam type XEM, not less than 16-1/2 by 7 by 3/4 inch with nylon camshaft bearings and 30,000 in-pounds slack adjusters with lub fittings. Brake operating parts shall meet FMVSS 121 with 2S/1M ABS system.

H. WHEELS AND TIRES 1. Wheels shall be aluminum. Tires shall be 6.75 by 17.5 steel-belted radial 14-ply,

Goodyear Unisteel II, Michelin XZA, or equal. Eight tires and wheels, plus one spare shall be provided. The spare shall be provided in an underslung tire carrier. Tubeless tires shall be considered equal.

I. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1. The 12-volt system shall meet ATA specifications with modular wiring and plug type connectors and 7-way pin electrical plug for ABS system. Sealed wire harnesses and sealed grommets and lights. All wire shall run in rigid conduit and all splices shall be made in junction boxes.

J. LIGHTS

1. Clearance lights, taillights, stop lights, and reflectors shall be provided in accordance with all local, state, and federal requirements.

K. TRACTOR CONNECTIONS

1. Air and electrical lines shall connect to the truck with quick-connection joints. Electrical connection shall be ATA 7-way receptacle. All lines shall be permanently labeled and identified with stamped aluminum tags. Contractor shall field verify air and electrical connection requirements to the existing truck.

L. MUD FLAPS

1. The trailer shall be equipped with anti-sail mud flaps behind all wheels on the rear axle.

M. PAINTING

1. All parts of the trailer chassis and body shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, rust, slag, and weld spatter and prime coated with a corrosion-inhibiting primer prior to application of color coats. The color coats shall be acrylic enamel. All preparation and painting shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Minimum painting shall consist of one coat of primer, 3 mil minimum dry film thickness, and two coats of color, each at least 1.5 mils dry film thickness.


2.05 EXHAUST AIR FAN A. The MOCU exhaust fans shall be as specified in Section 15828. 2.06 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. The MOCU and all auxiliary equipment provided under this contract shall have a warranty for all parts and labor for a minimum of 1 year as set forth in the ITB.

2.07 PRODUCT DATA A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. All applicable operating and maintenance information of all components of the

MOCU as specified in this section and per Section 01730. 2. All applicable final fabrication and assembly drawings of MOCU components. 3. Actual weight and weight distributions of the MOCU with and without loaded carbon

beds during transit and during operating parked position. 4. Title application per current State of Washington transportation requirements. 5. Results of tests conducted under paragraphs 13585-3.01. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING

A. GENERAL: MOCUs shall be tested in the manufacturing factory A. FACTORY TEST:

1. Each mobile odor unit, MOCU, shall be tested and reported as specified in section 01660 and approved by the project representative before being shipped to the owner.

2. The MOCU FRP odor control tank shall be factory tested as specified in section 13231. 3. The Contractor shall notify King County 2 weeks prior test, 6 weeks prior if air travel is

required to witness testing. 4. County reserves the right to have a representative present during all testing. 5. The Contractor shall provide tests to verify airflow and static pressure capability of exhaust

fans as specified in section 15990. The test for airflow shall include airflow measuring devices installed in the duct entering the unit. These devices shall be installed in accordance with the measuring device manufacturer’s recommendations. Design external static pressures to the exhaust fans shall be simulated using a combination of ducts and dampers. The tests shall verify design airflow at design static pressures.

6. Noise level tests shall be conducted to verify compliance with requirements of paragraph 13585-2.01A.

B. FIELD TEST

1. After delivery of the MOCU to King County and detailed inspection as specified in 01600, per Project Representative’s request, the FRP odor control tank shall be smoke tested for any leakage due to transportation damages. Upon successful smoke test, the MOCU will be ready for field test phase as specified in 01660. Upon the Project Representative’s satisfaction and approval the MOCU will be ready for the commissioning test as specified in 01660.

2. If field test, as described above was not approved by the Project Representative, Contractor shall promptly remedy any defects as described in 01600 and conduct a new field test with no additional costs to King County.


3.02 TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a factory-trained representative to conduct at least three full working days of combined instruction on operation and maintenance for the MOCU components as specified. One day for South Plant personnel, one day for West Point treatment plant, and one day for Bright Water treatment plant personnel.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15050 - 1 Piping Systems

SECTION 15050

PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies systems of process piping. More detailed specifications for the components listed in the Piping System Specification Sheets (PIPESPEC) may be found in other sections of Division 15. Use this Section in conjunction with those sections


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 260 and 800 ASME B16.3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300 ASME B16.4 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250 ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, NPS 1/2 – NPS 24 ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded ASME B16.12 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings ASME B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes ASME B31.1 Power Piping ASME B31.3 Process Piping ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code ASTM A47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A105 Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Applications ASTM A106 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service ASTM A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron ASTM A234 Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate

and High Temperature Service ASTM A312 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A570 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality ASTM A774 As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General

Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures ASTM A778 Welded, Unannealed Stainless Steel Tubular Products ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe ASTM C296 Asbestos-Cement Pressure Pipe ASTM C443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber

Gaskets ASTM C564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings


Reference Title ASTM D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of

Plastics in a Horizontal Position ASTM D1248 Poly ethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) ASTM D2513 Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and

Fittings ASTM D2996 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe ASTM D3034 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3261 Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)

Plastic Pipe and Tubing ASTM D4101 Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM D4174 Cleaning, Flushing, and Purification of Petroleum Fluid Hydraulic

Systems ASTM F441 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and

80 ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other

Liquids AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-Inch Through 48-Inch, for Water

and Other Liquids AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges AWWA C150 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water or Other Liquids AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe - 6 Inches and Larger AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe—4 In.

and Larger--Shop Applied AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services--Sizes 4 Inches Through

144 Inches AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections,

Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel

Water Pipelines AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C301 Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and

Other Liquids AWWA C303 Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, Pretensioned,

for Water and Other Liquids AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches, for

Water AWWA M11 Steel Water Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation CISPI 301 Specification Data for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary System with No-Hub

Pipe and Fittings EPA SDWA Section 1417(d)

Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act Requirements, Amendments to Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA), effective January 4, 2014

MIL-H-13528B Hydrochloric Acid, Inhibited, Rust Removing MIL-STD-810 Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests NACE RP-0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic


Reference Title Piping Systems

NACE RP-0286 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Health effects criteria (Lead Content Compliance) for water system

components NSF/ANSI Standard 372 Lead Content Compliance Guidelines for water system components UPC Uniform Plumbing Code

B. Fitting and Coupling Compatibility: To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components, fittings and couplings for grooved end piping systems shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. For each piping system, catalog cuts and other information for pipe, fittings, linings, coatings, cathodic protection, and valving to be used for each pipe size category.

C. Certification that each length of pipe has been pressure tested and has satisfactorily passed such tests.

D. Piping layouts and layout schedule showing pipeline locations for all piping systems in that area with respect to structures, other piping and utilities (ductwork, conduits, etc.) and details and location of joints, anchors, supports, fittings, connections, penetrations, supports, valves, piping appurtenances, flexible couplings, cathodic protection equipment, manholes, and clean-outs as applicable. Drawings shall be original layouts by the Contractor; photocopies of contract drawings are not acceptable.

E. A copy of all related contract schematic, structural, and mechanical drawings with all piping, foundations, supports, and layout sizes and dimensions requiring Contractor confirmation marked.

F. Restrained joint anchorage calculations for buried pipe required by Section 15050-3.01 D.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Pressure terms used in Section 15050 are defined as follows: 1. Maximum: The greatest continuous pressure at which the piping system operates. 2. Test: The hydrostatic pressure used to determine system acceptance. 3. PSI: Pressure above atmospheric; gauge pressure (PSIG)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, provide piping materials listed in the PIPESPEC, including pipe, gaskets, fittings, joint assemblies, connections, linings and coatings, conforming to detailed specifications for each type of pipe and piping appurtenance specified in other sections of Divisions 15.

2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Coding Markers: 1. Plastic markers for coding pipe shall comply with ASME A13.1. Markers shall be the precoiled

type that is easily removable. Markers shall be resistant to petroleum based oils and grease and shall meet criteria for humidity, solar radiation, rain, salt-fog, and fungus, as specified by MIL-STD-810 and shall withstand a continuous operating temperature range of - 40 to 250 degrees F. Markers shall not be the individual letter type but shall be manufactured and applied in one


continuous length of plastic including directional arrows. Legends and arrows shall be subsurface printed on polyester and overlaminated with Tedlar. Marking Services Style MS-995, Brady Style B-915, or approved equal.

2. Minimum marker lengths and letter heights:

Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Length of Marker Minimum Height of Letters less than 1-1/2 inch 8 inch 1/2 inch 1-1/2 to 3 inch 8 inch 1-1/8 inch Greater than 3 inch 12 inch 2-1/4 inch

a. Outside diameter shall include insulation and protective wrapping. b. Pipe markers shall include uni- and bidirectional arrows in the same sizes and colors as the

legend. 3. Color:

a. Background color shall match existing or shall be as specified in the PIPESPEC. b. Legends and arrow color shall match existing or shall be white on blue, black, or red

backgrounds; black on all other color backgrounds.

B. Tracer Tape for buried pipe: Not Used

2.03 VALVES

A. Valves of the same size and service shall be provided by a single valve manufacturer. Packing shall be non-asbestos material. Actual length of valves shall be within 1/16 inch (plus or minus) of the manufacturer's specified length. Flanges shall meet the requirement of ASME B16.5. Push-on and mechanical joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Location: 1. Provide piping as specified except for adjustments to accommodate architectural and structural

features. 2. Coordinate with electrical construction.

B. Potable Water Connections: Not Used

C. Pipe Support, Anchorage and Bracing: 1. Support piping by anchor brackets, guides, saddles or hangers. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing. 3. Acceptable types of supports, guides, saddles, hangers and structure attachments for general

pipe support, expansion/contraction and for seismic bracing, as well as anchorage details, are shown on the drawings.

4. The Drawings do not attempt to show all required supports, hangers, or seismic braces. These items are shown only where special requirements exist or where necessary to convey a special design intent.

5. Where a specific type of support or anchorage is indicated on the Drawings, then only that type shall be used at that location.

6. Pipe hangers, guides and saddles are generally not shown on the Drawings.

D. Anchorage for Buried Piping: Not Used

E. Bedding and Backfill: Not Used


F. Joint and Fitting Options: Pipe connection (joint and fitting) options for a particular piping system shall be as specified on the particular system PIPESPEC sheet..

G. Connections to Existing Piping: Not Used

3.02 PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION: NOT USED

3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Work: 1. Cover openings in piping, and temporarily seal to protect from contamination. 2. Protect materials and equipment from damage due to environmental conditions. Use protective

cover, and protect from surface water by using raised platforms. 3. Protect unfinished work at end of each workday from damage, contamination and moisture by

use of plugs, caps or covers. 4. Protect piping and valves from damage pending performance of system tests.

B. Installation: 1. Install piping parallel to walls. Clear obstructions, preserve headroom, and keep openings and

passageways clear. 2. Make changes in direction only with fittings. 3. Prevent entry of foreign matter during handling, assembling and installation. Use compressed air,

wire brush, solvent and other acceptable means to remove residual scale, dirt and other foreign matter from interior of piping before final connections are made. Protect open ends of pipe by capping, plugging or other acceptable means.

4. Install piping with sufficient pitch to ensure adequate drainage and venting. 5. Provide unions or flanges in piping connections to equipment. 6. Do not run water piping over electric switchboards, transformers or electric motor starters. 7. Protect against external corrosion pipes which pass through, under or otherwise in contact with

soil, cinders, concrete or other corrosive material. Protect by protective wrappings.

C. Sewer and Waste Piping: 1. Run horizontal drainage piping as straight as practicable and at uniform pitch. 2. Install pipe 3 inches or less in diameter with pitch of not less than 1/4-inch per foot unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

D. Cast Iron Soil Piping: Not Used

E. Copper Piping: Not Used

F. Pipe Joints and Connections: 1. Cut pipe with appropriate tool and deburr. Make joints tight. Test and remake leaky joints with

new materials. Do not use thread cement or caulking to remake joints. Do not use sharp-toothed wrench in making up brass pipe or chrome-plated items.

G. Unions, Flanges and Gaskets: 1. Provide unions where indicated and at each threaded connection to equipment, tanks and valves

with the following exceptions: a. Only 1 union is required at each manually operated threaded valve. b. None required at compression stops. c. Locate unions so piping can be easily disconnected for removal of equipment or valve. d. Provide flanges at each flanged connection to equipment and valves. Provide matching

flange faces at each connection. Tighten fastener system to indicated torque.

H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide piping systems with anchorages, sway braces, guides and supports as required by

applicable portions of ASME B31.


2. Provide support for vertical and horizontal loads, including vibration imposed loads. 3. Necessary hangers and supports including beam and purlin clamps, rods, pipe rolls, angles,

channels and plates as well as any changed from indicated design, shall have prior approval of the Project Representative.

4. Do not support piping by wire, rope, strap, chain, wood or similar devices. 5. Provide pipe hangers of same size, or nearest commercial size available, as pipe or tubing on

which they are to be used. 6. Supporting structures, including supporting frames, anchors and guides common to mechanical

and electrical work, shall be submitted and have the prior approval of the Project Representative. 7. Use adjustable iron hangers for 1-1/4 inches and smaller pipe, and clevis type for 1-1/2 inches

and larger pipe. Where copper tubing is directly supported, use copper-plated hangers. 8. Protect dissimilar metals by wrapping pipe with 1/16 inch thick neoprene

3.04 TESTING

A. General: 1. Upon completion of piping, test the piping systems. Pressures, media and test durations shall be

as specified in the PIPESPEC. Testing shall be performed using calibrated test gages and calibrated volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Each test gage shall be selected so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's range. Unless otherwise specified, completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems. Notify the Project Representative prior to each test.

B. Gas and Air Systems: Not Used

C. Liquid Systems: 1. The allowable leakage rate shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified

duration.

3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING

A. General: Piping systems shall be cleaned following completion of testing and prior to connection to operating, control, regulating, or instrumentation equipment. Upon completion of the cleaning, connect the piping systems to related equipment and structures.

B. Temporary Screens: Not Used

C. Gas and Air Systems: Not Used

D. Liquid Systems: After completion of cleaning, liquid systems, unless otherwise specified, shall be flushed with clean water. With temporary screens in place, the liquid shall be circulated through the piping system using connected equipment for a minimum period of 15 minutes and until no debris is collected on the screens.

3.06 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PIPESPEC)

A. Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes or types of service lines are specified on individual piping specification sheets. Piping systems are grouped according to the chemical and physical properties of the fluid conveyed and/or by the temperature or pressure requirements. Each grouping of systems is identified by a piping system number. Piping systems specified and shown on the Drawings are arranged by designated symbols (abbreviations) as shown in Table A. Table A also indicates the system number, fluid category, and pipe marker background color of each service.

B. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or Drawing schedule, piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific piping specification sheets.


3.07 TABLE A - PIPING SYSTEMS – PROCESS AND FACILITY PIPING Symbol Service System Fluid Category Pipe Marker D MOCU Drain 24 Drain Green

3.08 PIPING SYSTEM 24 Piping Symbol/Service: D – Drain

Test Requirements:

Medium: Per plumbing code. Pressure: Per plumbing code Duration: Per plumbing code Allowable leakage: Zero

Gasket Requirements: Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar)

and nitrile binder. Push-On/Mcl Cpl: N/A

Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawing for pipe size and valve type) (3" and smaller)

Pipe: PVC Schedule 40 Valves: Ball: PVC

(4” thru 12") Not Used Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: Not Used

Remarks: Not Used

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15064 - 1 Plastic Piping

SECTION 15064

PLASTIC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe and fittings.

B. Use in conjunction with the Piping System Specification Sheets (PIPESPEC) in Section 15050.



Reference Title ASTM D1248 Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials For Wire and Cable ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM D1785 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D4101 Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM D2241 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) ASTM D2464 Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule

80 ASTM D2466 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM D2467 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping

Systems ASTM D2657 Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034 Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM F402 Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for

Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic

Pipe and Fittings

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's certificates of compliance with the specified standards.

C. Contractor's layout drawings.

D. Product data for weld primer and solvent


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC PIPE

A. Pressure Pipe: 1. Material for pipes and fittings: ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. 2. Pipe and fittings requirements: Either ASTM D1785 or ASTM D2241 for standard dimension

ratios. 3. 160-psi pipe--SDR 26; 200-psi pipe--SDR 21; 250-psi--SDR 17, as specified. 4. Neoprene gaskets with push-on joints: ASTM F477. 5. Schedule 80 PVC socket-type fittings: ASTM D2467. 6. Schedule 40 PVC fittings: ASTM D2466. 7. Schedule 80 PVC threaded fittings: ASTM D2464.

B. Non-pressure Pipe: 1. Material for pipe and fittings: ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. 2. Pipe and fittings requirements: ASTM D3034 for SDR 35. 3. Neoprene gaskets with push-on joints: ASTM F477.

2.02 SOLVENT WELD CEMENT FOR PVC

A. Solvent: ASTM D 2564 formulated and labeled for PVC; formulated and labeled for use in the size and pressure rating of the pipe and labeled as resistant to caustic chemicals and hypochlorite solutions. Universal plastic pipe solvents are not acceptable

B. Primer: same manufacturer as the solvent; purple stain

C. Prior to solvent welding, clean joints of all loose debris and prime; primer shall stain pipe purple.

D. Manufactures 1. Solvent: IPC Weld-On 2. Primer: IPC Weld-On

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. PVC pipe 3 inches in diameter and smaller: 1. Join by means of socket fittings and solvent welding in conformance with ASTM F402. 2. Make solvent-cemented joints in strict compliance with the manufacturer's/supplier's instructions

and recommended procedures.

B. PVC pipe 4 inches in diameter and greater: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, join by means of gasketed push-on joints and steel or ductile iron

push-on or mechanical joint fittings. 2. Line fittings: Line and coat as specified in Section 15061 or 15062 3. Unless otherwise indicated, paint PVC piping exposed to sunlight with UV resistant coating

system as specified in Section 09900.


C. PE pipe and fittings: 1. 4 inches in diameter and smaller: Unless otherwise indicated, join by means of thermal socket

fusion. 2. 6 inches in diameter and larger: Join by thermal butt fusion.

a. Perform butt-fusion joining of the pipes and fittings in accordance with procedures recommended by pipe manufacturer.

b. Tensile strength at yield of butt-fusion joints shall not be less than pipe. c. Provide flanged adapters for connection to valves and where specified.

D. Connections: 1. Connect to different types of pipe by means of flanges, specified adapters or transition fittings. 2. Where sleeve type couplings are used, uniformly torque both in accordance with pipe

manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Foreign material shall be removed from the pipe interior prior to assembly.

E. Outside containment piping: Unless otherwise indicated, join in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions by means of injection bonding.

3.02 TESTING

A. Per Section 15050.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specification Mobile Odor Control Unit 15828 - 1 Centrifugal FRP Fans and Blowers

SECTION 15828

CENTRIFUGAL FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FANS AND BLOWERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies centrifugal belt-driven fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) fans and blowers for corrosive air service, suitable for operation in Class I, Division II, Group D environment. Where the term fan is used in this specification, it refers to fans and blowers.


A. Reference Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title AMCA 210 Air Movement and Control Association Test Code and Certified Ratings

Program AMCA 0401 Classifications of Spark Resistant Construction ASTM D4167 Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans and Blowers

B. FRP fabrication shall be in accordance with the National Bureau of Standard Voluntary Product Standards PS-15-69.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Fan performance curves for the specified operation conditions and for the ultimate capacity conditions for VFD operation.

C. Motor data Form 11060-A in accordance with Section 11060.

D. Fan and motor driving pulley and sheaves information for operating rpm.

E. Bearing ratings with supporting calculations for the fan and motor at design conditions.

F. Dimensioned drawing of fan including motor V-belt drive and base.

G. Vibration isolation design data in accordance with Section 11020.

H. Fan inlet and outlet flexible connections information.

I. Sound power level ratings in eight octave bands in accordance with AMCA Standards 300 and 301.

J. Octave band sound power levels generated by the fan at the specified/scheduled operating point.

K. Motor sound level data.


L. All operations and maintenance information specified in Section 01730.

M. Certification that the units have been tested and rated in accordance with the applicable AMCA Standard Test Code and Certified Ratings Program and that the units bear the AMCA seal.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: 1. Fan shall be designed and selected for continuous outdoor operation with air containing corrosive

and flammable vapors and gases generated from the treatment and conveyance of municipal wastewater.

2. Vapors and gases may be expected to include methane, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide, gasoline vapors, ammonia, and water saturated air.

3. The air stream may also be expected to contain droplets of dilute sulfuric acid. 4. Air stream temperatures are expected to vary between 50 degrees F and 95 degrees

B. Operating Requirements: 1. Select the fans to achieve the indicated operating capacity at no greater than 80 percent of

maximum recommended rpm. 2. Fans shall be non-overloading at all points on their curve. Capacity shall be determined in

accordance with AMCA Standard 210. 3. Provide fans for stable operation at all design points listed.

a. The fan duty point at design flow and static pressure shall be at least 10 percent below unstable region on the fan curve. Unstable region is defined as the area in which the fan curve has more than one possible airflow at a single static pressure

4. Fans shall be suitable for operation in Class I, Division II, Group D environment. 5. Sound pressure levels at 5 feet from the fan shall not exceed 77.0 dBA calculated with a

directivity factor (Q) = 2. 6. Fans and motor rated operating performance table:

Location Equipment number

CFM Static pressure IN-W.C

Wheel diameter inches

Fan speed rpm

Max. motor HP1

Motor Volt/ Ph/Hz

MOCU900301

EF900301A 4000 10 18 2865 MTR900301A 10 480/3/60 EF900301B 4000 10 18 2865 MTR900301B 10 480/3/60

MOCU900302

EF900302A 4000 10 18 2865 MTR900302A 10 480/3/60 EF900302B 4000 10 18 2865 MTR900302B 10 480/3/60

MOCU900303

EF900303A 4000 10 18 2865 MTR900303A 10 480/3/60 EF900303B 4000 10 18 2865 MTR900303B 10 480/3/60

1 Fans motors operate with VFD Motor Controller


C. Sound power levels: 1. Octave band sound power levels, measured in accordance with ANSI S1-21, ASHRAE 36, and

AMCA 300, shall not exceed the following values. 2. Octave Band Sound Power Level, dB re: 10-12 Watts 3. Octave Band Center Frequency, Hertz

Element 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Discharge 89.6 92 97.6 92.6 88 86.6 84.6 Inlet 89.6 92 97.6 92.6 88 86.6 84.6 Radiated 92.6 95 100.6 95.6 91 89.6 687.6

D. Balance and Vibration: Fans specified in this Section shall be balanced at the factory to operate without vibration throughout the full operating range specified.

1.05 CERTIFICATION

A. Fans shall bear the AMCA rating seal.

1.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide one set of V-belts for each fan.

B. Tag and store spare parts in accordance with Section 01740

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. New York Blower

B. Hartzell

C. Aerovent

D. approved equal

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Components: Component Material Housing Fiberglass reinforced plastic Wheel Fiberglass reinforced plastic Door gasket and shaft seal Neoprene or Teflon Hub Type 316 stainless steel encapsulated in FRP Bolts Type 316 stainless steel Base Stainless steel or Epoxy coated steel corrosion resistant Shaft Type 316L stainless steel


B. FRP Fabrication: 1. Housing:

a. Ultraviolet light stabilized. b. Structural layer resin shall, if necessary, contain antimony trioxide, antimony pentoxide, or

equivalent fire retardant to achieve ASTM Class II fire retardant of 30 or less. c. Built up with laminate construction using vinyl ester resin such as Dow Derakane 510A-40, or

equivalent, a C-glass or equivalent veil for corrosion resistance and chopped strand fiberglass for structural core strength.

d. Outer layers: A 100 percent resin gel coat. e. The next layer shall be a C-glass or equivalent corrosion resistant veil followed by another

resin rich gel coat layer and another C-glass or equivalent veil. f. Structural core layer: Comprised of resin and chopped strand fiberglass. Total glass content

shall be 30 to 40 percent. g. Wheel and housing shall have a carbon-rich resin coating on air stream contact surfaces and

shall be grounded through the base to prevent static buildup. Provide housing with an access door.

2. Wheel: a. Backward inclined fan wheel, built up using laminate construction. b. Resin: Vinyl ester such as Dow Derakane 510A-40 or equivalent. c. Wheel material shall, if necessary, contain antimony trioxide, antimony pentoxide, or

equivalent fire retardant to achieve ASTM Class II fire retardant of 30 or less. d. First layer of wheel laminate: 100 percent resin gel. e. The next layer shall be a C-glass corrosion resistant veil followed by another resin rich gel

coat and another C-glass veil. f. Structural core consisting of chopped strand fiberglass and resin shall be laid next, followed

by a C-glass veil, a resin rich gel coat, another C-glass veil, and a final 100 percent resin gel coat. Total glass content shall be 30 to 40 percent.

g. Wheel shall be graphite impregnated and grounded to prevent static buildup.

3. Type: Construction type and material thicknesses shall be in accordance with ASTM D4167.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Fan: 1. V-belt driven, centrifugal design with radial blade. 2. Configurations shall be as shown on Drawings. 3. Fan wheel: Overhung type with at least 2 bearings located away from the air stream. The

stainless steel shaft hub and bushings shall be completely encapsulated in a reinforced plastic laminate.

4. Provide a sleeve extending from the back plate of the wheel through the fan housing for protection of the fan shaft.

5. Rotor: Statically and dynamically balanced after fabrication. 6. Provide Teflon seals to minimize air leakage. 7. Provide a 1-1/2-inch FRP drain at the lowest point of the scroll housing. 8. Provide plain inlets suitable for use with flexible connections. 9. Provide flanged outlets suitable for a flanged flexible connection. All flanges shall be factory

drilled. 10. Inlet and outlet flexible connections shall be provided by the fan manufacturer and shall match the

fan inlet and outlet in the factory. 11. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. 12. Base shall be fabricated of steel, adequately braced, and equipped with lifting eyes. 13. Provide an inspection port cleanout door and a 1-1/2-inch flanged drain coupling. 14. Fan shall conform to AMCA Type A construction.


2.04 MOTOR

A. Motor shall be TEFC type, explosion proof, inverted duty type suitable working with VFD controller as specified in Section 11060.

2.05 BEARINGS AND DRIVE ASSEMBLY

A. Provide the fan with adjustable pitch sheaves and adjustable motor base suitable for a plus or minus 5 percent adjustment in operating speed.

B. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated and prelubed, antifriction bearings of the pillow block type complete with grease fittings.

C. All bearings shall have an L-10 rating life of 100,000 hours.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fan as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Connect ductwork to fans through flexible connections. The flexible connections shall be provided by the fan manufacturer for the fan inlet and outlet flanges.

3.02 TESTING

A. Each fan shall be tested by the fan manufacturer prior to shipment for assembly to MOCU.

B. After completion of MOCU fabrication and assembly and installation, each fan shall be tested and balanced in accordance with Sections 01660 to guarantee compliance with the fan performance as specified in this specification.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB #1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15863 - 1 Propeller Wall Fans

SECTION 15863

PROPELLER WALL FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies wall mounted fans complete with fans, motors, dampers, and accessories required for ventilation systems.



Reference Title AMCA Standard 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating AMCA Standard 300 Test Code for Sound Rating AFBMA Standard 9 Ball Bearing Load Ratings

1.03 EQUIPMENT LIST

Equipment No. Description EF900301C MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan C MTR900301C MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan C Motor EF900301D MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan D MTR900301D MOCU No 1 Ventilation Fan D Motor EF900302C MOCU No 2 Ventilation Fan C MTR900302C MOCU No 2 Ventilation Fan C Motor EF900302D MOCU No 2 Ventilation Fan D MTR900302D MOCU No 2 Ventilation Fan D Motor EF900303C MOCU No 3 Ventilation Fan C MTR900303C MOCU No 3 Ventilation Fan C Motor EF900303D MOCU No 3 Ventilation Fan D MTR900303D MOCU No 3 Ventilation Fan D Motor

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Fan performance curves for the specified operating conditions.

C. Motor data Form 11060-A as required in Section11060.

D. Dimensional drawings of fans of wall fan installation shop drawing on the MOCU enclosure.

E. Certification that the units have been tested and rated in accordance with the applicable AMCA Standard Test Code and Certified Ratings Program.

F. Applicable operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01730.

G. Manufacturer's certificate of installation on Form 11000-A.


1.05 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

A. Fan motors shall be non-overloading on all points of the operating curve.

B. Fans shall be designed for continuous duty service.

C. Fans shall meet the following performance requirements:

Equipment No.

Capacity, cfm

Static pressure, inches-W.C.

Max. fan speed, rpm

Motor HP

Drive Type

Operating volt/ ph/Hz

Back-draft damper

EF900301C 200 1/4 1550 Direct included MTR900301C 1/25 Direct 115/1/60 EF900301D 200 1/4 1550 1/25 Direct included MTR900301D Direct 115/1/60 EF900302C 200 1/4 1550 1/25 Direct included MTR900302C Direct 115/1/60 EF900302D 200 1/4 1550 1/25 Direct included MTR900302D Direct 115/1/60 EF900303C 200 1/4 1550 1/25 Direct included MTR900303C Direct 115/1/60 EF900303D 200 1/4 1550 1/25 Direct included MTR900303D Direct 115/1/60

1.06 SOUND AND VIBRATION

A. Fans shall operate at noise levels below 30 sones, as defined by AMCA Standard 300, and at tip speeds below 10,000 fpm.

1.07 CERTIFICATION

A. Fans shall bear the AMCA rating seal.


A. The equipment will be located indoors in the fan room of the mobile odor control unit as shown on the drawings and specified in section 13585.

1.09 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide one set of complete fan assembly.

B. Tag and store spare parts as specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER:

A. Loren Cook.

B. Aerovent.

C. Penn Berry, Breese-way series.

D. Approved equal.


2.02 MATERIALS

Component Material Propeller Aluminum Venturi Aluminum Wall sleeve Aluminum Fan propeller shaft Steel Fasteners Stainless steel Pillow blocks Cast iron Sheaves Cast iron Inlet guards Aluminum Back draft damper Aluminum

2.03 EQUIPMENT

A. Fan: The fan shall be wall-mounted direct driven as specified. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum AFBMA L-10 bearing life of 50,000 hours.

B. Motor: Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall be as specified in Section 11060.

C. Fan Panel: spun venturi to direct air smoothly to the propeller blades. The fan, drive motor, and fan guard shall be securely attached to the fan panel by means of a four-legged angle or tubular frame and mounting pads. Unless otherwise indicated, the fan panel, frame, and mounting pads shall receive the manufacturer's standard enamel coating.

D. Accessories: The fan shall be provided with a steel mounting collar, and a spring-loaded aluminum backdraft

damper where specified. Mounting collars shall be protected with a baked epoxy finish. Fans shall be provided with inlet guards constructed of aluminum materials. Inlet guards shall

conform to OSHA standards and shall be removable to provide motor access. Provide aluminum bird screen with the louver.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fan as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Certify the installation and initial operation using Form 11000-A.

3.02 TESTING

A. Each fan shall be tested by the fan manufacturer prior to shipment for assembly to MOCU.

B. After completion of MOCU fabrication and assembly and installation, each fan shall be tested and balanced in accordance with Sections 01660 to guarantee compliance with the fan performance as specified in this specification.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15886- 1 Foul Air Silencers

SECTION 15886

FOUL AIR SILENCERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section provides performance and design requirements for foul air system, odor control system exhaust air sound silencer. The silencer material of construction shall be FRP materials compatible for foul air system from the King County Waste Water Facilities


A. MANUFACTURER: Select firm regularly engaged in the manufacturing of air silencing and acoustical equipment of type and sizes required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.

B. NAMEPLATS: Provide the manufacturer’s name, address, type or style, model or serial number of the silencer on a stainless steel plate secured to the silencer frame.

C. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Reference Title ASTM E477 ASTM Test Standard or Silencer Rating NFPA 255 NFPA Combustion Rating NFPA 90A NFPA Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems ASTM E84 ASTM Combustion Rating Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. Combustion Rating ASHRAE ASHRAE Duct Construction Steel Structures Painting Council UL 723 Underwriter Laboratories

1.03 SUBMITALS

A. The following submittals shall be provided as specified in Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog and other data confirming to specified design dimensions, material

and requirements. 2. Installation shop drawing confirming the silencers dimensions to the contract drawings. 3. Predicted performance data and curves as applicable developed for the specific application,

confirming to specified design and operating requirements and characteristics. 4. Certified copies of factory test results including acoustical and pressure loss performances. 5. A copy of this specification section with addenda updates, and all referenced sections with

addenda updates, with each paragraph check marked to show specification compliance or marked to show deviations.


A. The silencer will be installed on the foul air exhaust duct inside of the mobile odor control unit, as shown.



A. Equipment List: Item Equipment No. MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan “A” Foul Air Silencer S900301A MOCU No 1 Exhaust Fan “B” Foul Air Silencer S900301B MOCU No 2 Exhaust Fan “A” Foul Air Silencer S900302A MOCU No 2 Exhaust Fan “B” Foul Air Silencer S900302B MOCU No 3 Exhaust Fan “A” Foul Air Silencer S900303A MOCU No 3 Exhaust Fan “B” Foul Air Silencer S90030#B

B. Operating Requirements: Equipment

Number Air Flow

cfm Max. pressure drop

in-wc Inside dimensions

Rectangular Length

ft

S900301A 4,000 0.15 To match the fan size 2.5 S900301B 4,000 0.15 To match the fan size 5.0 S900302A 4,000 0.15 To match the fan size 2.5 S900302B 4,000 0.15 To match the fan size 5.0 S900303A 4,000 0.15 To match the fan size 2.5 S900303B 4,000 0.15 To match the fan size 5.0

1. The silencers are rectangular shape. Inside, outside, and length dimensions shall be field verified by the contractor prior to fabrication and submitted for approval to match the exhaust fan discharge size and as shown on the drawings.

C. The foul air silencer shall provide the minimum dynamic Insertion Loss listed below, as measured in accordance with ASTM-E477 (Standard Test method of Measuring Acoustical and airflow performance of Duct Liner materials and Prefabricated Silencers).

Dynamic Insertion Loss Ratings at + 1200 FPM Silencer face velocity

Silencer face Velocity, fpm 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K +2000 30 69 106 98 63 46 39

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. CONSTRUCTION: The silencer shall be rectangular shape with inner and outer casings with flange connection for ductwork. The outer casings of the silencer shall be fabricated from 3/4" thick FRP. The outer casing shall be provided with 1 ½” condensate drain threaded connection. The condensate PVC drain pipe shall be piped to the MOCU drainage piping as shown on the drawings. The inner casing shall be fabricated with corrugated 1/2" FRP mesh. The silencer shall be provided with flange connections to meet the FRP ductwork and the fan discharge outlet. All fasteners used for the silencers installation shall be stainless steel type 316. The silencer shall be fabricated to meet the ductwork and the fan discharge as shown on the drawings. Replacement and maintenance of the silencer shall be able without requiring removal of the FRP duct.

B. FILLER MATERIAL: Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber. Filler material shall be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and setting. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof. Filler material shall be suitable for working in sewer foul air stream.


C. FLAMMABILITY: Combustion rating for the silencer acoustic full shall be the following when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA Standard 255 or UL NO. 723: 1. Classification: 20 2. Smoke Development Rating 20 3. Fuel Contribution: 15

D. AERODYNAMIC PERFORMANCE: Total static pressure loss of the silencers shall not exceed the values specified in Paragraph 15886-1.05B. Aerodynamic performance shall be established from measurement procedures conforming to ASTM Specifications E477, and applicable portions of ASME, AMCA and ASHRAE test codes.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fibrosonic Silencers

B. Vibro-Acoustics.

C. Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Field verify location and dimensions of the silencer prior to fabrication and installation.

B. Install and perform the work in accordance with these Specifications and the Manufacturer’s instructions and directions.

C. Install condensate drain for the silencer outer shell and pipe it to the mobile odor control unit drain system or as shown on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204017 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15902 - 1 Retractable Flexible Ductwork

SECTION 15902

RETRACTABLE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE:

1. This section specifies retractable flexible air duct, accessories and supports for the foul air inlet to the mobile odor control unit (MOCU). Ductwork shall be designed and custom fabricated specifically for the applications and the conditions specified.

2. Provide twelve 10-foot long sections of 30-inch diameter retractable flexible duct with duct connectors as shown on the drawings for each unit of MOCU.

3. Provide one set of MOCU inlet air duct connection spool, and two sets of MOCU inlet air cover for each MOCU as shown.

4. Provide one set of manhole flexible duct connection adaptor for each MOCU as shown. B. DESIGN CRITERIA AND REQUIREMENTS:

1. GENERAL: Flexible Ductwork shall be 30-inch diameter. Minimum retract ability shall be 8 to 1.

2. RATED VELOCITY: Ductwork shall have up to 2000 fpm UL rated air velocity. 3. PRESSURE RATING: UL rated pressure shall be maximum 14 inches of water column

for positive pressure and 6 inches water column for negative pressure. 4. SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS: Combustion rating shall not be less than a

maximum flame spread of 25 and a smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.

C. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

1. Ductwork shall be suitable for exposed outdoor service. The air drawn through the duct will typically be foul air from the King County sewage collection system. The duct will be mounted from a sewer manhole to the mobile odor control unit inlet. The foul air drawn through the duct will contain vapors and gases expected to include methane, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide, gasoline vapors, ammonia, and water-saturated air. The airstream may also be expected to contain droplets of dilute sulfuric acid. Air temperatures are expected to vary between 30 and 90 degrees F.


A. REFERENCES: 1. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this

section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

2. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ASHRAE CH 1 Handbook--Equipment Volume Duct Construction

ASTM C518 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus


NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

NFPA 255 Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc., HVAC Duct Construction Standards

UL 181 Factory - Made Air Ducts and Connectors

UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UMC – 88 Uniform Mechanical Code B. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:

1. Ductwork construction, installation, and air system performance shall comply with the UMC, ASHRAE CH 1, and SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01300. B. Flexible ductwork catalog data shall be provided, including material of construction, maximum and

minimum working pressure, fire and smoke spread rating, etc. C. Ductwork accessories as specified and shown on the drawings including ductwork connector,

coupling, flanges, collars, and storage straps, etc. D. Minimum retract ability shall be 8 to 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Flexible duct shall be Thermoid Cyclone, ABC Mineduct, or equal. Duct connections shall be stainless steel, as shown on the drawing. Ductmate, Spiralmate, or equal.


2.02 MATERIALS A. FLEXIBLE DUCT:

1. Flexible duct shall be UL Standard, Class 1, air duct. Flexible duct shall be constructed of vinyl impregnated polyester fabric duct material with spring steel wire helix fully enclosed. Steel wire shall be galvanized to prevent corrosion. Duct shall be equipped with thermoplastic wear strip such that dragging the duct over rough surfaces will not tear duct material. Duct stitching shall be nylon thread.

2. Flexible duct shall contain sufficient integral support such that the net free area shall not decrease more than 5 percent when bent in a 90-degree horizontal-to-vertical or vertical-to-horizontal unsupported transition.

B. ACCESSORIES: 1. GENERAL: Accessories shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel in conformance

with ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. 2. DUCT CONNECTIONS: Equip the ends of each flexible duct section with a 6-inch collar

and angle ring, both constructed of Type 316 stainless steel as shown on the drawings. Use nonhardening integral mastic sealant collar and angle ring for an airtight seal. Equip the mating side of each angle with a neoprene gasket for joining duct sections together and for joining duct sections to the manhole adapter and fan inlet. Provide a closure ring for holding angle rings together to maintain duct connections as shown on the drawings. Construct closure ring of type 316 stainless steel. Contractor is permitted to submit other equal alternative duct connection system for the project representative’s approval

3. DUCT STORAGE AND SHIPPMENT: Contractor to submit duct storage and shipment of the flexible duct sections by utilizing Velcro Strap system for the project representative’s approval

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of ductwork, accessories and supports shall be as recommended by manufacturer and as shown on the drawings.

3.02 TESTING

A. After installation, connect all twelve flexible duct sections in series to MOCU inlet and test under operating conditions. Any leaks which are audible or can be felt with the hand shall be marked and sealed after shutting the system down. After all leaks are corrected, the system shall be retested.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15911-1 Dampers and Backdraft Dampers

SECTION 15911

DAMPERS AND BACKDRAFT DAMPERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies dampers and backdraft dampers for MOCU fan and electrical

rooms’ ventilation system. The dampers shall be heavy duty industrial construction. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part

of this section as specified and modified. In case of a conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Reference Title

AMCA Standard 500 Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible

B. CERTIFICATION: Multiple blade dampers shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for

both air leakage and performance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section

01300: 1. Manufacturer’s catalogue and other data confirming to specified design, material and

equipment requirements. 2. Dampers construction information including frame, blade and linkage material data. Type

of blades and air flow and friction loss performance curve. 3. Dampers dimensions and installation shop drawings on the MOCU fan and electrical

room enclosure walls. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Dampers shall be Ruskin, Airolite, or approved equal, modified to provide the specified and

shown features. 2.02 EQUIPMENT FEATURES

A. DAMPERS: 1. Damper frame shall be multi-blade for industrial application heavy duty 2. Dampers shall be constructed 16 gage aluminum hat channel with mounting flanges on all

sides. 3. Damper blade linkages shall be face linkage in air stream. airfoil shape with low pressure

drop and quite performance. Bearings and shafts shall be stainless steel. The blades’ seals shall be vinyl for -50 F to +250 F working temperature.

B. PARALLEL BLADE: Parallel blade dampers shall be constructed such that all damper blades

rotate in the same direction when the damper is opened or closed. C. OPPOSED BLADE: Opposed blade dampers shall be constructed such that each damper

blade rotates in the opposite direction of the blades adjacent to it when the damper is opened or closed.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15911-2 Dampers and Backdraft Dampers

2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Damper frame and blades shall be heavy duty constructed with 6063T5 extruded aluminum. B. The damper frame shall be minimum 2” deep and blades shall be provided with extruded vinyl

edge seals to ensure tight closure at working temperature of -50 F to +250 F. C. Backdraft dampers shall be counterbalanced when installed in vertical position. The blade

interconnecting linkage shall be located within the damper frame and out of the airstream. D. Inline backdraft dampers in the ductwork shall be provided with an open/close position

indicator arm to monitor the damper position. 2.04 O&M PRODUCT DATA

A. The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Applicable operation and maintenance data for damper operators in accordance with

Section 01730. 2. Catalog data, and technical information of approved damper operators.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Dampers installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Damper installation shall be coordinated with the MOCUs fan and electrical rooms enclosure walls and meet the enclosure walls requirements, as required by the project representative.

3.02 TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Multiple blade dampers shall be manually tested, prior to installation and following installation,

to assure operation through their full range of movement without binding or interference. Final damper adjustments and positioning shall be performed during system balancing.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 15990 - 1 HVAC System Testing adjusting and Balancing,

SECTION 15990

HVAC SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the labor and services necessary to test, adjust, and balance under actual operating conditions and air systems design flow rates.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title AABC Associated Air Balance Council, National Standards for Total System Balance ASHRAE 70 Standards--Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets

and Inlets NEEB National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Procedural Standards for Testing

Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems

B. Testing Agency: Procure the services of an independent air balancing and testing agency, belonging to the AABC or the NEBB, to perform balancing, testing and adjustment of systems. One organization shall perform the testing and balancing services.

C. Codes and Standards: 1. Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association:

a. National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronics Systems, AABC.

b. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems, NEBB.

c. Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets, ASHRAE. 2. Calibration and maintenance of instruments and accuracy of measurements shall comply with

the requirements of the standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Balancing report.

1.04 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Tests and adjustments shall include the complete testing and balancing of ventilating systems and necessary adjustments to the ventilating equipment to accomplish the specified design flow rates.

B. Should any apparatus, material or work fail to meet the specified requirements in these tests, make the necessary corrections and retest the apparatus, material, or work at no additional cost to King County.


PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The balancing agency shall conduct the air flow measurement field tests in the presence of the Project Representative.

B. Following completion of testing and balancing, leave the system in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

3.02 PERFORMANCE OF WORK

A. General: Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after the system installation is complete but prior to acceptance of the project.

B. Measurements: 1. Measure and adjust air supply and exhaust units to deliver at least 100 percent of the design

air volume. 2. Measure static air pressure conditions on fans, including filter pressure drops, and total

pressure across the fan. 3. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations, for required air volume. Set a

speed to provide air volume farthest distance from the fan without excess static pressure. Check draw amps of fans on initial start-up. If running amps exceed nameplate, shut off motor immediately, notify Project Representative, and make necessary drive changes as directed.

4. Measure MOCU exhaust fans airflow rates with systems operating with flexible ducts installed, carbon loaded, and with mist and grease eliminators filters bank resistance at midway between design values specified for clean and dirty filter in operation.

5. Airflow rates supplied, or exhausted shall be within plus or minus 5 percent of the design values specified.

C. Systems to be balanced: Balance all MOCU exhaust fans and ventilating fans when the foul air flexible duct is connected to the MOCU with 100 feet length.

3.03 BALANCING

A. General: Total airflow rates delivered by fans units to be tested and adjusted to conform to the values specified.

B. Air Flow Rate Measurements: 1. Airflow rates shall be obtained by adjustment of the fan speeds. All flow rates shall be

measured with MOCU systems fully operating condition with mist and grease eliminators filter bank resistance midway between the design values specified for clean and dirty filters.

2. air flow shall be tested in strict accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70.

3.04 BALANCING REPORT

A. Report Data: The final certified balancing report shall include the following actual field-verified data: 1. Equipment data

a. Manufacturer and model, size, arrangement, class, location, and equipment number. b. Motor horsepower, voltage, phase, and full load amperage. c. Fan cfm, static pressure, rpm, and operating motor BHP.

2. Duct size, supply or exhaust recorded cfm, velocity, pressure measurements, and location of all measurements.


B. Report Requirements: 1. Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person who recorded the

data and that of the supervisor of the reporting organization. 2. All instruments which were used shall be listed and identified including the last date each was

calibrated.

C. Final Report: Final report shall be submitted prior to Contractor's request for final inspection. In addition to providing all specified data and information on applicable reporting forms, 1. A total balance report shall include the following components:

a. General Information and Summary b. Instrument Calibration c. Air Systems d. Record drawings with specified and measured flow rates

3.05 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Following acceptance of the reports by the Project Representative, permanently mark all damper positions so that they can be restored to their correct position if disturbed at any time. If a balancing device is provided with a memory stop, set it and lock it. Do not mark devices until after final inspection.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specification Mobile Odor Control Unit 16000 - 1 General Requirements For Electrical Work

SECTION 16000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

GENERAL

SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items specified in other sections are subject to the requirements of this Section. The Electrical Drawings and Schedules included in the specification are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations.

B. All electrical Work included in this Contract including pre-fabricated assemblies shall conform to the requirements of this Section unless specifically specified otherwise.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories FM Factory Mutual IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) and local amendments NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA National Electrical Testing Association ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IBC / IBO International Building Code UL Underwriters Laboratories WAC 296-46 Electrical Safety Standards, Administration and Installation

B. Identification of Listed Products: 1. Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed and labeled for the purpose for which they are

to be used, by UL or equivalent NRTL agency approved lab as the independent testing laboratory. Independent testing laboratory shall meet the requirements of the local or state permitting and inspection authority having jurisdiction.

2. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority to undergo a special inspection. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price.

3. When the product is an assemblage of individual parts, whether the individual parts are listed or not, the entire assemblage must be listed and labeled as a complete unit for the purpose for which it is to be used.

C. Factory Tests: Where specified in the specification section, perform factory tests at the place of fabrication. Perform on completion of manufacture or assembly.

SUBMITTALS



B. Catalog cuts of equipment, devices, and materials requested by the specification sections. 1. Catalog information includes technical specifications and application information, including

ratings, range, weight, accuracy, etc. 2. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which apply

to the submittal requirements. 3. Catalog cuts shall be assembled in a folder. Each folder shall contain a cover sheet, indexed by

item, and cross-referenced to the appropriate specification paragraph.

C. Product Data.

D. Drawings: 1. Interconnection diagrams depicting all cable requirements together with their actual terminations. 2. Connection diagrams depicting equipment control panel internal wiring. 3. Schematic drawings depicting system schematic control diagrams. 4. Equipment arrangement drawings depicting panel and cabinet.

a. Internal equipment layout. b. Height, width and depth dimensions. c. Mounting requirements.

5. Instrument, equipment, cabinet and panel metal supports. 6. Utilize equipment, device, conduit, cable and wire tag numbers provided on drawings. 7. List of nameplates and description of engravings. If abbreviations are required because of space

limitations, submit recommendations for approval.

E. One-line diagrams for switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelbords and other electrical equipment.

F. Certifications that equipment and devices are: 1. UL or appropriately labeled and listed. 2. Suitable for use in the space classification.

DEFINITIONS

A. Elementary or Schematic Diagram: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts.

B. One-Line Diagram: Shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices, or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded.

C. Block Diagram: A diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines.

D. Wiring Diagram or Connection System: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be (a) in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram.

E. Interconnection Diagram: 1. Show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as

motors and auxiliary devices. 2. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection

diagrams. 3. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. 4. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires

clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable.


5. Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown. 6. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical. 7. Terminate each wire on a labeled terminal block. 8. All devices and equipment shall be identified. 9. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with

individual terminal identification. 10. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection

diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. 11. Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on the

interconnection diagram. 12. Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown. 13. Spare wires and cables shall be shown.

F. Arrangement, Layout, or Outline Drawings: An arrangement, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made.

RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Prepare record drawings as specified as in section 01720 and submit per 01300

B. Record drawings shall be complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying Contract name, equipment, and the scope of the drawing.

C. Record drawing standard shall meet the Contract drawings standard. Upon request King County will provide drawings standards.

SITE CONDITIONS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, size and derate equipment and materials for the ambient conditions specified here, but not less than an ambient maximum temperature of 40 degrees C at an elevation ranging from sea level to 3000 feet without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances. 1. Ambient temperature: Approximately is Low -10 degrees C, High 40 degrees C 2. Elevation: Approximately 100 FT.

B. Classified Areas: 1. See Drawings for Classified Areas

C. Seismic: 1. Electrical equipment and supports: Braced per IBC requirements and Section 01031. 2. Provide calculations for overturning moment and design of the anchors for securing free-standing

equipment to the MOCO structure. 3. Fasten equipment that is front-accessible only to the wall or ceiling as well as the floor.

STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Store materials and equipment per contract requirements

B. Indoor equipment and materials: store indoors in heated space to prevent condensation and seal with plastic film wrap.


INDICATING LAMP COLORS

A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment to follow with colored lenses in accordance with the following schedule: Color Function Example Red Run, open valve Equipment operating, motor running Green Ready, closed valve Equipment ready, end of cycle White Normal condition Control power on, status OK or

clear Amber Abnormal condition Failure of equipment or status

(yellow) abnormal, fault condition

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General – Provide complete functioning systems in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, performance requirements specified and shown on the Drawings including modifications resulting from reviewed shop drawing and field coordinated drawings.

B. Distribution System: 1. Provide complete 208Y/120 Volt electrical distribution including raceways, boxes, wiring, and

power supply. 2. Provide complete 480Y/277 Volt electrical distribution including raceways, boxes, wiring, and

power supply.

C. Lighting System: 1. Interior:

a. Fixture locations are approximate and shall be adjusted to avoid piping, ductwork and diffusers, and to provide complete lighting.

b. Provide lighting fixtures, raceways, boxes, wiring and control switches. 2. Exterior:

a. Provide lighting fixtures, raceways, boxes, wiring, and control switches.

D. Raceway and Wiring System in accordance with Sections 16110 and 16120: 1. Power and control. 2. All process systems. 3. All instrumentation and control systems.

E. HVAC System – Provide complete power and control wiring, raceways, and panel to meet the requirements in the Division 15 HVAC System sections.

F. Equipment and material specified in Divisions 11 through 17 shall be provided in accordance with this Section unless otherwise specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects. 2. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer

throughout the work. 3. Standard production materials shall be used wherever possible.

B. Equipment Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, electrical equipment and materials shall be painted by the manufacturer as specified in Section 09900.


C. Galvanizing: Per Section 05500.

D. Mounting and Support Brackets: Provide metal mounting and support brackets in accordance with Section 05500 unless otherwise specified.

E. Cabinet and Enclosure Anchoring: Anchor cabinets and enclosures to meet seismic requirements per Section 01031.

F. Motors: Provide motors in accordance with Section 11060, unless otherwise specified.

CONDUCTOR / WIRE MARKERS

A. Identify each power and control conductor at each end of each terminal to which it is connected.

B. Conductors size No. 10 AWG or smaller shall have identification sleeves.

C. Conductors: 1. Identify each end as shown on the drawings 2. If not shown on the drawings, identify conductor ends with the Equipment number, followed by -

Cxx, where xx is a unique number for that wire.

D. Machine print on sleeves with permanent black ink the letters and numbers that identify each wire.

E. Figures: 1/8 inch high.

F. Sleeves: Yellow or white tubing, sized to fit the conductor insulation.

G. The sleeves shall be shrunk to fit the conductor with hot air after installation.

H. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. TMS Thermofit Marker System by Raychem Co. 2. Sleeve style wire marking system by W.H. Brady Co. 3. Approved equal.

I. Adhesive strips are not acceptable.

J. Use cable markers of the locking tab type for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger.

K. Tabs: white plastic with conductor identification number permanently embossed.

NAMEPLATES

A. Laminated phenolic plastic.

B. Nominal Size: 3/4 inch high by 2 inches long.

C. Black backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters.

D. If abbreviations are required because of space limitations, submit to the Project Representative prior to manufacture.

E. Fastened using self-tapping stainless steel screws. The use of adhesives will not be permitted on the outside of enclosures.

TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, panhead strap screw type.


B. Terminals shall be provided with integral marking strips which shall be permanently identified with the connecting wire numbers as shown on the Drawings.

C. Terminal blocks for P-circuits (power 208-600 volts): Rated not less than the conductor current rating and less than 600 VAC.

D. Terminal blocks for C-circuits (control and/or power 120 volts or less power) and S-circuits (signal): Rated not less than 20 amperes and less than 600 VAC.

E. Terminals: Tin-plated.

F. Insulating material: Nylon.

PRODUCT DATA

A. Applicable operation and maintenance information on an item-by-item basis in accordance with Section 01730. Operation and maintenance information shall be provided at the time of equipment, device, or material site delivery, or at a certain stage of project completion as required by Section 01730, whichever is the earlier. Full-size drawings shall be reduced to 11 x 17 inches.

B. Test results for motors and electrical systems on the forms specified in Section 16030 and found in Section 01999. Maintain a file of the original test results and submit to the Project Representative prior to Final Acceptance.

C. Description of functional checkout procedures, specified in this specification, 30 days prior to performing functional checkout tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION

GENERAL

A. Construction: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic. 2. Coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with other equipment and work. 3. Make necessary minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment to avoid

interferences with other work prior to installation. 4. Mount freestanding electrical and control panels on steel channel sills.

a. Panels to bear evenly on channels over length of panels. b. Panels to be level and plumb. c. Shim as required. d. Bolt panel mounting frame to the channels.

5. Provide for clear space for full panel and cabinet door swings. 6. Phase Connections: Install phase connections A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom and left to

right as viewed from the operating mechanism side.

B. Housekeeping: 1. Protect electrical equipment from dust, water and damage. 2. Wipe motor control centers, switchgear, and buses free of dust and dirt on the outside keep dry

and vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of Substantial Completion. 3. Touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in Section 09900. 4. During transport, storage and construction, allow no electrical equipment to be temporarily

exposed to weather, debris, liquids, or damage.

C. Dust Free Areas: 1. Protect electrical, instrumentation and control equipment from dust by wrapping the equipment in

plastic film wrap until installed to prevent dust from entering the equipment. 2. Once electrical, instrumentation and control equipment is installed, protect from dust. Rewrap the

equipment if necessary to keep the equipment dust free.


TESTING

A. General: 1. Prior to energizing the electrical circuits, perform the following tests. Unless otherwise indicated,

use a 1,000 volt megohmmeter for resistance measurements. 2. Record the test measurements on the specified forms obtained from Project Representative.

B. Insulation Resistance Measurements: 1. General:

a. Make insulation resistance measurements on conductors and energized parts of electrical equipment.

b. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be in accordance with the applicable ICEA, NEMA or ANSI standards for the equipment or material being tested.

c. Record the ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured on the test form. 2. Record measurements in a format similar to Form 16000-A, obtained from Project

Representative. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable. 3. Conductor and Cable Tests: Measure the phase-to-ground insulation resistance for all circuits

120 volts and above except lighting circuits. Make measurements with motors and other equipment connected, except that solid state equipment shall be disconnected unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC.

4. Motor Tests: Complete the Installed Motor Test Form 16000-B obtained from Project Representative for each motor after installation.

5. Measure the insulation resistance of all motors before they are connected.

C. Prefunctional Checkout: 1. Functional testing: Perform in accordance with the requirements of Section 01660 and Section

16030. 2. Prior to functional testing, adjust all protective devices and make operative. 3. Prior to energizing of equipment, perform a functional checkout of the control circuit. Checkout

shall consist of energizing each control circuit and operating each control, alarm, or malfunction device and each interlock in turn to verify that the specified action occurs.

4. Submit a description of the proposed functional test procedures prior to the performance of functional checkout.

5. Verify that motors are connected to rotate in the correct direction. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation.

RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01720. Include the following schedules, lists, and drawings: 1. Interconnection diagrams. 2. Original submittal drawings.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16030 - 1 Electrical Testing

SECTION 16030

ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the acceptance testing of electrical materials, equipment, and systems.

B. Reference Section 01660 for additional testing requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following document. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI American National Standards Institute ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NETA ANSI/NETA ATS

International Electrical Testing Association Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01300

B. Draft Test Plan and Procedures in accordance with the latest NETA requirements, 90 days prior to initial functional checkout. Contractor shall use NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for all new equipment installed under this contract and NETA Maintenance Testing Specifications for all existing equipment reused under this contract unless otherwise directed by the Project Representative.

C. Completed test report Forms 16000-A and 16000-B contained in Section 01999

D. Functional checkout procedures 45 days prior to performing initial functional checkout tests

E. Final Test Report documenting test results and equipment and device settings.

F. Testing Contractor shall be NETA certified and supply copy of certification as part of test plan submittal.

1.04 APPLICATION

A. Requirements for testing in accordance with this Section are specified in this and other sections of Division 16 and 17. Where testing in accordance with this Section is required, the required tests, including correction of defects and retesting, shall be completed prior to energization of material, equipment, or systems.


1.05 TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Testing Technology and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date of recalibration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING

A. General: 1. Prior to energizing the electrical circuits, perform the following tests. Unless otherwise indicated,

a 1,000 volt megohmmeter shall be used for resistance measurements. 2. Record test measurements on the Forms 16000-A and 16000-B. 3. Submit a description of the proposed functional test procedures 45 days prior to the performance

of functional checkout. 4. Complete electrical testing in three (3) phases:

a. Pre-energization testing phase. b. Equipment energized with no load. c. Equipment energized under load.

5. Perform testing in accordance with this Specification Section and NETA ATS. 6. Provide field setting and programming of all adjustable protective devices and meters to settings

as determined by the approved coordination study.

B. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. See individual Division 16 Specification Sections for equipment specific testing requirements. 2. Test all electrical equipment.

a. Perform all required NETA testing. b. Perform all required NETA testing plus the optional testing identified with each specific type

of equipment in Article 3.02.

C. Insulation Resistance Measurements: 1. General:

a. Make general insulation resistance measurements on conductors and energized parts of electrical equipment.

b. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be in accordance with the applicable ANSI, ICEA, NEMA, or NETA standards for the equipment or material being tested.

c. Record the ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured on the test form. d. Record insulation resistance measurements on Form 16000-A. e. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable. f. Document checks and measurements.

D. Distribution Equipment: Measure insulation resistance for transformers, panelboards, and other distribution equipment phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. 1. Functional Checkout:

a. Perform functional testing in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and the procedure provided in test plan and procedures.

b. Prior to functional testing, adjust and make operational all protective devices. c. Have Project Representative witness the testing. d. Check that circuit breakers, meters and monitors are installed and function properly. e. Check functional operation of switchboards, motor control centers, control panels and other

electrical equipment.


f. Prior to energization of equipment, perform a functional checkout of the control circuit. Checkout shall consist of energizing each control circuit and operating each control, alarm, or malfunction device and each interlock in turn to verify that the specified action occurs.

g. Document all test results and device settings in the final test report. 2. Prepare a Test Report summarizing the final test procedures and test results.

3.02 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Switchgear and Switchboards: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.1. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS.

B. Transformers - Small Dry Type: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.1.1. 2. Perform the following additional tests:

a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after startup.

3. Adjust tap connections as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2 percent of nominal under normal load after approval of Engineer.

4. Record as-left tap connections.

C. Transformers - Large Dry Type: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.1.2. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following additional tests:

a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after start-up.

4. Adjust tap connections as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2 percent of nominal under normal load.

5. Record as-left tap connections.

D. Transformers - Liquid Filled: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.2.2. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and


a. Record phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground voltages at no load after energizing, and at operating load after start-up.

4. Adjust tap changer setting as required to provide secondary voltage within 2-1/2 percent of nominal under normal load after approval of Engineer.

5. Record as-left tap changer setting.

E. Transformer Cooling Fans/Temperature Controllers: 1. Verify each temperature sensor is of the correct type and rating and provides the correct output

signal at ambient temperature. 2. Using a thermocouple or RTD simulator, verify correct temperature indication and alarm and fan

control relay operation by signal injection. 3. Verify operation of controls in manual and automatic mode. 4. Verify operation of all cooling fans, record running current and compare to nameplate value. 5. Verify trip circuit operation where provided.

F. Cable - Low Voltage: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.3.2.


2. Measure phase-to-ground insulation resistance for all circuits 120 volts and above, except lighting circuits. Make measurements with motors and other equipment disconnected, except that solid state equipment shall be disconnected unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC

G. Cable - Medium Voltage: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.3.3. 2. Non-destructive partial discharge test:

a. After energization, perform a partial discharge test for baseline data for future partial discharge maintenance testing.

b. Perform the work while the medium voltage circuits and equipment are energized. 1) The cables shall not be disconnected or de-energized and the testing shall not expose

the cables to voltages that exceed normal operating voltage. c. Use a frequency domain detection process incorporating a spectrum analyzer with radio

frequency current transformer (RF CT) sensors. 1) The detection system, including spectrum analyzer, RF CT's and interconnecting cable,

shall have a partial discharge detection range that at least covers the frequency range of 10 kHz to 300 MHz.

2) Testing shall be performed in a manner that complies with the requirements of IEEE 400 and IEEE 400-3.

H. Cable - Optical Fiber: 1. Perform inspections on tests per TIA/EIA/ANSI 455-78-B, including:

a. Optional time domain reflectometer test. b. Power attenuation test. c. Gain margin test.

I. Busway and Busduct: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.4. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS.

J. Air Interrupter Switches: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.5 and NETA ATS 7.6. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following optional tests per NETA ATS on all medium voltage switches:

a. Insulation resistance phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground in open and closed positions and across each open pole.

K. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.6.1.2.

a. Tests shall include primary current injection testing of all breakers at final settings. b. Where short-time or instantaneous settings on large frame breakers are beyond the current

capability of field testing, primary injection tests at reduced currents shall be permitted if combined with secondary injection calibration test of trip unit at final settings.

2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS.

3. Perform the following additional tests: a. Shunt trip devices minimum tripping voltage.

4. Record as-left settings.

L. Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.6.1.1. 2. Components:

a. Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and NETA ATS. b. Thermal magnetic breakers: Visual and mechanical inspection per NETA ATS only. c. Solid state trip type: Visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests per NETA ATS.



M. Protective Relays: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.9.

a. Tests to be performed using secondary injection of 3 PH current and potential at final settings.

b. Test at manufacturer’s recommended test points and critical timing points identified on relay setting sheet.

2. Perform all tests identified as optional per NETA ATS. 3. 3. Perform the following additional tests:

a. Verification of direct trip of associated lockout relay or circuit breaker(s) by using relay test function or shorting trip contact at relay case.

b. Microprocessor-based relays: 1) Complete commissioning procedure per manufacturer’s instructions, followed by tests of

each relay element at final settings. 2) Verification of all internally-programmed logic.

c. Verification of all auxiliary input and output signals. d. Verification of power supply/self-diagnostic alarm contact and remote annunciation.


N. Instrument Transformers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.10. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS. 3. Perform the following optional tests per NETA ATS:

a. Dielectric withstand test on potential transformers.

O. Metering: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.11. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS.

P. Grounding: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.13. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS.

Q. Ground Fault Protection: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.14. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and


a. Control wiring insulation resistance. 4. Perform the following additional tests for four-wire systems:

a. Primary current injection into switchgear bus with test set configured to simulate transformer source and high current jumper used to simulate unbalanced load and ground fault conditions.

b. Verify no tripping for unbalanced load on each feeder and each main breaker. c. Verify no tripping for unbalanced load across tie breaker for dual-source schemes. d. Verify tripping for ground fault on load side of feeder each feeder and on each main bus. e. Verify tripping for ground fault on a single feeder and on each main bus through tie breaker(s)

for multiple-source schemes.

R. Motors: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.15. 2. Complete Form 16000-B for each motor after installation. 3. Measure insulation resistance for all motors before being connected.


4. Motors 50 HP and larger: Make insulation resistance measurements at the time of delivery and when connected.

5. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable. 6. Verify motor phase rotation. 7. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor

confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation. 8. Measure current on each phase with motor running at full load.

S. Motor Controllers: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.16. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and

NETA ATS.

T. Generators: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.15.3. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and


a. Load and cycle crank test per Specification Section 16235.

U. DC Power Systems: 1. Perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.18. 2. Components: Test all components per applicable paragraphs of this Specification Section and


a. Cell impedance test.

V. Control System Functional Test: 1. Perform test upon completion of equipment acceptance tests. 2. The test is to prove the correct interaction of all sensing, processing and action devices. 3. Develop a test plan and parameters for the purpose of evaluating the performance of the system. 4. Perform the following tests:

a. Verify the correct operation of all interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function.

b. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms and indicating devices. 5. Systems to be tested:

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16110 - 1 Raceways Boxes and Supports

SECTION 16110

RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers the furnishing and installation of electrical conduits, wireways, pull boxes, cable vault, cable trays, fittings, and supports. Raceways shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, power, control, fire alarm, HVAC, instrumentation, signaling, and grounding systems.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated ASTM A48 REV A Gray Iron Castings ASTM A193/A193M REV C Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High

Temperature Service ASTM F512 Smooth-Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings for

Underground Installation FEDSPEC WW-C-581E Conduit, Metal, Rigid and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow,

and Nipple, Electrical Conduit; Zinc Coated FEDSPEC W-C-1094A Conduit and Conduit Fitting Plastic, Rigid NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures NEMA RN1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) externally Coated Galvanized Rigid

Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit NEMA TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC 40 and EPC

80) NEMA TC6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation NEMA VE-1 Metal Cable Tray Systems NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit UL 651 Rigid Nonmetal Electrical Conduit

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Include manufacturer’s catalog cuts as specified by Section 16000. Include general information and detailed specifications for the products specified in this Section.

C. Certifications and calculations that raceway supports meet the seismic requirements specified in Sections 16000, 01031, and this section.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAY

A. General requirements for raceway materials specified in this Section are listed in the RACESPECS sheets at the end of this Section. The type of raceway to be used for any given area and application shall conform to the requirements of Table A in this Section.

2.02 BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. Pull Boxes and Wiring Gutters: 1. Device and junction boxes less than 6 inches square shall be Type FD galvanized cast

ferrous. Boxes larger than FD boxes shall be constructed of sheet steel, galvanized after fabrication, or NEMA 4X stainless steel of nonmetallic.

2. Outdoor boxes and enclosures shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors or removable covers.

3. Conduit bodies shall be ferrous alloy with screw taps for fastening covers. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene.

4. Boxes and enclosures in corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic. 5. Boxes in classified areas shall be NEMA Class 7 galvanized cast ferrous. 6. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and grounding shall comply with the National Electrical

Code. 7. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have a

rigid handle. 8. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet shall be split.

B. Terminal Cabinets: 1. Terminal cabinets located indoors shall be NEMA 4. 2. Cabinets located outdoors and in corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X. 3. Cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors. 4. Adjustable terminal strip mounting accessories shall be provided. 5. Cabinets shall be provided with channel mounted terminal blocks rated 30 A, 600 Vac. 6. Terminals shall be No. 8 minimum strap-screw type, suitable for ring tongue or locking spade

terminals.

C. Pull / Junction Boxes: 1. Indoor boxes above grade and in unclassified areas to be NEMA 12 with hinged doors. 2. Similar enclosures for below grade and outdoors to be rated NEMA 4X (stainless steel) with

hinged doors. 3. Boxes in hazardous classified areas to be rated for classification, NEMA 7. 4. Pull and junction boxes for use in raceway systems with conduits 1-1/4” or larger to be hinged

boxes with 2 screw driver operable or quick release hatches. Minimum depth of box to be 5.3”, the minimum size to be as shown on the drawings or as required for the application or NEC. Hoffman type CH, or equal.

5. For damp, below grade, outdoor, or corrosive applications, provide Hoffman type CHFNFSS, or equal.

6. For hazardous areas, provide cast copper free aluminum box with neoprene gasketed screw on cover, Crouse Hinds GUE, GUB, or equal.

7. Fire alarm junction and pull boxes to be externally and internally painted red.

D. Conduit Seals: 1. Install conduit seals for use in classified areas where shown in all conduit runs leaving the

space. They shall be of the EYS or EZS type with male and female hubs. 2. Use PVC-coated fittings with urethane interior coating for PVC-coated RGS; use copper free

cast aluminum for rigid aluminum.


3. The sealing compound shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer of the sealing conduit body.

4. Use the sealant, such as Chico, in areas that are defined as classified and meet the NEC requirements for Article 500.

E. Box and Enclosure Support Brackets and Hardware: 1. Use galvanized steel brackets and stainless steel hardware. 2. Follow Section 05500 requirements.

2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. Conduit Supports: 1. Provide hot-dip galvanized framing channel with end caps to support groups of conduit. 2. Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with

galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required. 3. Conduit supports for PVC-coated rigid steel (PGRS) and PVC conduit systems to be one-

hole PVC-coated rigid steel clamps or conduit wall hangers.

B. Ceiling Hangers: 1. Ceiling hangers to be adjustable galvanized carbon steel rod hangers as specified. Straps or

hangers of plumber’s perforated tape are not acceptable. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rods to be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM

A193. 3. Hanger rods in corrosive areas and those exposed to weather or moisture to be stainless

steel.

C. Suspended Raceway Supports (Racks): 1. Suspended raceway supports to consist of concrete inserts, galvanized carbon steel rod

hangers, and jamb nuts supporting hot-dip galvanized framing channel or lay-in pipe hangers as required.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rods to be 1/2-inch all-thread rod meeting ASTM A193. 3. Brace all suspended raceway supports at 30-foot intervals (alternating from one side to the

other) to meet specified seismic requirements.

D. Design by Professional Engineer: 1. Raceway and cable tray supporting systems, structures, and elements shall be designed to

meet seismic and other building structural requirements and to support the static and dynamic load of the wiring and raceways that they will carry. Systems to be installed shall be reviewed and sealed by a Washington State Registered Professional Structural Engineer to ensure conformance with IBC seismic, building, and load requirements.

2.04 NAMEPLATES

A. Provide nameplates for all boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000. Nameplate wording shall be as indicated on the drawings.

B. Where no wording is specified, the Contractor shall provide the functional description of the device on the nameplate.


2.05 FIRESTOPS

A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Flamemastic 77. 2. Vimasco No. 1-A. 3. Or equal.

C. Products which are affected by water are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Specific raceway types and applications are indicated on the drawings and/or in the raceway schedule. When not indicated on the drawings and/or in the schedule Table A specifies the type of raceway required for each location and application by RACESPEC sheet. Use fittings, hubs and boxes as specified by the raceway type in RACESPEC. Unless otherwise indicated, in Table A, unscheduled conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel, RACESPEC type GRS.

TABLE A Location Application/Condition RACESPEC Indoor noncorrosive Exposed GRS Indoor corrosive Exposed PGRS Outdoor Exposed PGRS Concealed Embedded in concrete structure or beneath

slab-on-grade GRS

Underground Instrumentation, communications and data signals encased in concrete, duct bank

GRS

Non-Classified Final connection to equipment and light fixtures

LFS

Architecturally finished areas

Final connection to light fixtures FLEX

Indoor Classified PGRS

3.02 RACEWAY NUMBERING SYSTEM

A. General: 1. Identify each conduit and rack shall be identified by a unique number shown in the drawings.

B. Conduit Identification: 1. Pressure stamp conduit numbers into a non-corrosive metal tag. Fix a tag with number to

each end of each conduit and at each manhole, pullbox and handhole with Type 304 Stainless Steel wire.

3.03 CONDUIT

A. General 1. The number of directional changes of a conduit shall be limited to 270 degrees in any run

between pull boxes. 2. Conduit runs shall be limited to a maximum of 400 feet, less 100 feet or fraction thereof, for

every 90 degrees of change in direction.


B. Indoor and Outdoor Conduit Systems: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, in general, conduit inside structures shall be exposed. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor is responsible for determining conduit routing that

conforms to the installation requirements set forth herein. 3. Install conduit to conform to the requirements of the RACESPEC sheets and the following:

a. Install exposed conduit either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces.

b. Two or more exposed conduits in the same general routing shall be in parallel with symmetrical bends.

c. Run exposed conduit on supports spaced not more than 8 feet apart. d. Where three or more conduits are located in parallel run, space them out from the wall

using framing channel. e. Where conduits are suspended from the ceiling, support systems shall comply with the

requirements of this Section, Paragraph 2.03.C. f. Provide stainless steel hanger rods in corrosive areas and where exposed to weather or

moisture. g. Secure conduit rack supports to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast-in-place

anchors or framing channel concrete inserts. h. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues with

temperatures higher than 90 degrees C. i. Install conduits between the reinforcing steel in walls or slabs which have reinforcing in

both faces. In slabs which have only a single layer of reinforcing steel, place conduits under the reinforcement.

j. Route conduit clear of structural openings and indicate future openings. k. Flash and seal watertight those conduits which pass through roofs or metal walls. l. Neatly group conduit into any openings cut into concrete and masonry structures, and

grout using non-shrink type grout. m. During construction, cap conduits to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water. n. Terminate exposed conduit stubs for future use with galvanized pipe caps. o. Determine concealed conduit stubup locations from the manufacturer’s shop drawings. p. Terminate concealed conduit for future use in equipment or by galvanized couplings

plugged flush with structural surfaces. q. Where the drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired hereunder, provide

concealed portions of conduits for future equipment. r. Conduit installed horizontally shall allow headroom of at least 7 feet except where it may

be installed along structures, piping, and equipment, or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained because of other considerations.

s. Terminate all conduits that enter enclosures by fittings that ensure that the NEMA rating of the enclosure is not affected or changed.

t. Use conduit seals in conduit runs leaving hazardous area spaces. u. Connect underground metallic or nonmetallic conduit that turns out of concrete, masonry

or earth to a 90-degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before emergence. v. Transitions from concealed or underground or embedded locations to exposed or

aboveground or above-grade locations shall be made using type PGRS conduit for a distance of at least 12 inches on either side of transition.

w. Conduit across structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall have an OZ-Gedney “Type DX” or Crouse-Hinds “Type XD,” bonded, weathertight expansion and deflection fitting of that conduit size.

4. Install pullboxes between conduit runs. 5. Size pullboxes in accordance with the NEC.

C. Raceway Routing: Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when the runs are greater than 30FT: 1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 IN. 2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc, 2 IN.


3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN. 4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 5. Between telecommunication and 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc, 2 IN. 6. Between telecommunication and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN. 7. Between telecommunication and greater than 600 Vac power: 12 IN. 8. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc and 600 V and less AC power or control: 2 IN. 9. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc and greater than 600 Vac power: 2 IN. 10. Between 600 V and less AC and greater than 600 Vac: 2 IN. 11. Between process, gas, air and water pipes: 6 IN.

3.04 RACEWAY NUMBERING

A. Provide each new and reused conduit with a number tag at each end and in each pull box. Identify cable trays by stencils at intervals not exceeding 50 feet, at intersections, and at each end to identify power cable tray voltage, control cable tray, or instrument cable tray.

3.05 CONDUIT AND CABLE SCHEDULE

A. General: The Conduit and Cable Schedule is shown on the drawings.

B. Unscheduled Raceway: With the exception of lighting, communication, paging, fire alarm, security and receptacle circuits, the type and size of raceway shall be as specified on the drawings or schedules. 1. Unscheduled lighting and receptacle raceways shall be sized by the Contractor in

accordance with the NEC. Minimum size raceway shall be ¾ inch for exposed and 1 inch for embedded raceway.

2. The number and size of communication, paging, fire alarm, and security raceways shall be as required for the particular equipment provided subject to the minimum sizes specified herein.

C. Scheduled Raceway: The size and type of raceway shall be as specified in the Conduit and Cable Schedule.

3.06 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION (RACESPEC) SHEETS

A. The following RACESPECS are included in this Section:

RACESPEC Symbol Raceway Description FLEX Flexible steel conduit GRS Galvanized rigid steel conduit LFS Liquidtight flexible steel conduit PGRS PVC coated rigid steel conduit PVC8 Schedule 80 PVC conduit TRAY Cable tray WW Wireway and auxiliary gutter XPFS Explosion-proof flexible steel conduit


Raceway Identification: FLEX Description: Flexible steel conduit. Application: Final connection to lighting fixtures in architecturally finished areas only. Compliance: UL 1. Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions

securely interlocked. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch. Fittings: Compression type. Other: FLEX shall be provided with an internal ground wire. Installation Flexible steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive

“coppershield” thread compound. Raceway Identification: GRS Description: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth

finished surfaces. Manufacturers: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., or equal. Minimum Size: Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch for exposed, 1 inch for

embedded, encased, or otherwise inaccessible. Fittings: Hubs: Insulated throat with bonding locknut, hot-dip galvanized. The

hubs shall utilize a neoprene O-ring and shall provide a watertight connection. O-Z Gedney, CHM-XXT, or equal.

Unions: Electrogalvanized ferrous alloy type Appleton UNF or UNY, Crouse-Hinds UNF or UNY, or equal. Threadless fittings are not acceptable.

Boxes: Indoor: Type FD cast ferrous for all device boxes and for junction boxes less

than 6 inches square. NEMA 12 welded steel 6 inches square and larger. Door shall have hinges with clamp locks. Boxes in process areas shall be NEMA 4 watertight.

Conduit Bodies: Ferrous alloy type with screw taps for fastening covers. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene.

Outdoor and Wet Areas: Type FD cast ferrous for all devices and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic for 6 inches square and larger.

Corrosive: NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic. Classified: NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous.

Elbows: 3/4″ through 1-1/2″: Factory fabricated or field bent. 2″ through 6″: Factory fabricated only.

Conduit Bodies: 3/4″ through 4″: Malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted. Neoprene

gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for all conduit entrances. 5″ and 6″: Electrogalvanized iron or cast iron box.

Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight and shall be provided with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall be neoprene and shall allow for 3/4-inch movement in any direction.

Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbel, O.Z. Gedney, or equal.


Installation: Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive “coppershield” thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions. Steel conduit shall be supported away from the structures using hot-dip galvanized malleable iron straps with nesting backs.

Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub with a grounding bushing.

Exposed male threads on galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be coated with zinc-rich paint.

Raceway Identification: LFS Description: Liquidtight flexible steel conduit. Application: Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or adjustment. Compliance: UL 360. Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions

securely interlocked and jacketed with liquidtight plastic cover. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch. Fittings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut with cast-in lug,

brass grounding ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral. O-ring seals around the conduit and box connection and insulated throat. Provide forty-five and 90-degree fittings where applicable. Provide PVC coated flexible conduit and fittings where the conduit system is PVC coated.

Installation: The length of flexible liquidtight conduit shall not exceed 15 times the trade diameter of the conduit and not exceed 36 inches in length. Use conductive thread compound.

Raceway Identification: PGRS Description: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, corrosion-resistant, polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) coated. Provide factory made and coated elbows.

Compliance: ANSI, ETL and UL 6. The PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be stamped with the ETL Verification Mark “ETL Verified to PVC-001”.

Finish: PGRS shall be hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit with a PVC Coating. The PVC coating shall be gray, minimum of 40 mils thick, bonded to the outside and continuous over the entire length of the conduit except at the threads, and be free of blisters, bubbles, or pinholes. Thread protectors shall be used on the exposed threads of the PVC coated conduit. A 2-mil coat of urethane enamel coating shall be bonded to the inside. Coating shall be free of pinholes. Bond strength shall exceed the tensile strength of the PVC coat.

Minimum Size: 3/4 inch. Fittings: Similarly coated to the same thickness as the conduit and provided

with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. Conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by the same company. Male threads on elbows and nipples, and female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be protected by application of urethane coating.

Covers:

PVC coated covers shall have V-groove seal and stainless steel hardware.


Hubs: Hubs for connection of conduit to junction, device, pull or terminal boxes shall be threaded cast ferrous alloy. Hubs shall be galvanized steel and have insulating bushings with bonding locknuts. Hubs shall utilize a neoprene “O” ring and shall provide a watertight connection.

Boxes: Non-Hazardous: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic. Hazardous:

Manufacturers: NEMA 250, Type 7 cast ferrous. PVC coated conduit that bears the ETL Verified PVC-001 label by Robroy Industries, Plasti-Bond, Perma-Cote, KorKap or equal.

Installation: Training:

Plastic coated conduit shall be made up tight, threaded, and installed using tools approved by the PVC-coated conduit manufacturer. Exposed conduit threads shall be covered by a plastic overlap coated and sealed per manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipe wrenches and channel locks shall not be used for tightening plastic coated conduits. Damaged areas shall be patched, using manufacturer’s recommended material. The area to be patched shall be built up to the full thickness of the coating. Painted fittings are not acceptable. PVC coated conduit shall be supported away from the structure using PVC coated conduit wall hangers or PVC coated conduit mounting hardware. Damaged work shall be replaced. Installers shall be trained and certified in the proper installation techniques provided by the PVC-coated conduit system manufacturer. Proof of certification shall be provided.

Raceway Identification: PVC8 Description: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, extra heavy wall thickness for all locations

including direct bury under roadways and where exposed to physical damage.

Compliance: NEMA TC2, UL 651. Construction: Schedule 80, high-impact, polyvinylchloride (PVC). Minimum Size: 3/4 inch exposed; 1 inch embedded or encased. Fittings: PVC solvent weld type. Boxes:

Indoor: NEMA Class 4, nonmetallic. Outdoor and Corrosive: NEMA Class 4X, nonmetallic.

Installation: Exposed PVC conduit shall be run on supports spaced not more than 3 feet apart for conduits up to 1 inch 5 feet apart for conduits 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches and 6 feet apart for conduits 2-1/2 inches and larger. PVC conduit shall not be provided where it will be damaged by heat.

PVC conduit shall have bell ends where terminated at walls and boxes.

Raceway Identification: TRAY Description: Cable tray, steel, ladder type with rungs and side rails. Bottom to side

rail connections shall be positive mechanical joints to assure lateral and longitudinal stability. Rung spacing to be 9 inches on center.

Compliance: NEMA VE-1. Loading and Deflection Requirements:

The trays shall be designed and constructed to support a uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds per linear foot with a maximum deflection


of 0.57 inch when tested as a single 10-foot span, simple beam. Dimensions: 3-inch minimum interior depth. 4-inch maximum outside depth. Width

shall be as specified. Tray components shall be fabricated to a 1/16-inch tolerance.

Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Smooth finished surfaces. Accessories: Fittings, barriers and covers shall be of the same materials, finish and

construction as the straight trays. The minimum radius of side rails on horizontal elbows, vertical risers, tees and crosses shall be 12 inches except where specified otherwise.

Covers: Ventilated flanged cover. Length shown on drawings. Application: As indicated on the drawings.

Install barriers within cable tray to separate signal cables from power and control cables.

Grounding: Cable trays shall be connected to the plant Grounding Grid and grounded throughout their length by a continuous #3/0 bare copper conductor routed along the outside of the side rail and bonded at regular intervals.

Design and Installation: Cable trays shall be supported directly from the building structure using suitable hangers, rods, brackets, seismic bracing, and anchors with a safety factor of at least two times the cable tray design weight when filled with cables to rated tray capacity. Indirect support from other materials such as ductwork, piping or suspended ceilings is not permitted. Manufacturer shall provide design drawings of the complete cable tray system including a bill of material. Structural and seismic calculations shall be provided by the cable tray manufacture. Manufacturer shall furnish all supporting materials and anchors, or clearly specify in a detail any materials that the Contractor must purchase for installation.

Submittals: Manufacturers:

A complete set of shop drawings is required for all cable tray runs and shall include all support locations and supporting and anchoring materials. B-Line, T.J. Cope, Husky/Burndy, P-W Industries, or equal.

Raceway Identification: WW Description: Wireway and auxiliary gutter: Match the conduit or raceway system

specified and shown on the drawings. Minimum: Flanged, oiltight type with hinged covers.

Application: Compliance:

As shown on the drawings. JIC EMP-1.

Sizes as shown: 4-inch by 4-inch, 6 inch by 6 inch, 8 inch by 8 inch. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth

finished surfaces. Indoor non-corrosive area: NEMA-1, NEMA-12, NEMA-4 or as shown on the drawings. Outdoor and corrosive area: NEMA-3R, NEMA-4X or as shown on the drawings. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hoffman Engineering Company, Wiegmann, Square D,or equal.

Raceway Identification: XPFS Description: Explosion-proof Flexible Steel Conduit. Application: XPFS Conduit coupling shall be used for final connections to motors

and other equipment subject to vibration or adjustment in Class I Division 1 hazardous areas and shall be watertight.


Size: ½-inch – 4-inch.

Length:: 4-inch – 36-inch.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16120 - 1 600 Volt Conductors and Cables

SECTION 16120

600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies conductors and cables rated 600 volts used for power, lighting, receptacle, signal, and control circuits.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft ASTM B33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes ASTM B189 Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy-Coated Soft Copper Wire for Electrical

Purposes IEEE 383 Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for

Nuclear Power Generating Stations NEMA WC57/ICEA S-73-532

Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension and Instrumentation Cable

NEMA WC70/ICEA S-95-658

Power Cables rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy

NEC 310-12 General Conductors Color Code NFPA 820 Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables UL 1277 Type TC Power and Control Tray Cable UL 1569 Metal-Clad Cables UL 1581 Referenced Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Catalog cuts showing general information of the conductors and cable.

C. Operations and Maintenance Manual – Applicable operation and maintenance per Section 01730.

D. Factory Test Reports.

E. Field Test Reports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


A. Unscheduled Conductors and Cables: 1. With the exception of lighting, communication, paging, security and receptacle circuits, the type,

size and number of conductors shall be as specified on the drawings. 2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors are not shown on the drawings and shall be sized by

the Contractor in accordance with the NEC to limit voltage drop to 3 percent. 3. Minimum size of lighting and receptacle circuits shall be 12 AWG. 4. Number and types of communication, paging, and security cables shall be as required for the

particular equipment provided. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide lighting and receptacle circuit conductors in accordance with

CABLESPEC "XHHW-2".

B. Cable Specification Sheets (CABLESPEC): General requirements for conductors and cables specified in this Section are listed on CABLESPEC sheets in paragraph 16120-3.07.

C. With the exception of lighting, receptacles, communication, paging, security, and fire alarm circuits, the type, size, number and routing of conductions shall be as indicated in the Conduit and Cable Schedule.

2.02 COLOR CODING

A. General: 1. Multiconductor power and control cable colors shall be manufacturer's standard. 2. Single conductor control conductor color shall be yellow, except for the grounded conductor

which shall be white.

B. Power Conductors: 1. Single-conductor power conductors shall be color coded in accordance with the following:

Use Cable Color

Three-phase, 480-volt power or 480/277

Phase A Brown

Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Ground Green Neutral Gray Three-phase, 120/208-volt power

Phase A Black

Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green Single-phase, 120/240-volt power

Line 1 Red

Line 2 Black Neutral White Ground Green

2. Cables sized No. 4 AWG and larger may be black with colored 3/4-inch vinyl plastic tape applied in 3-inch lengths around the cable at each end.

3. Tag the cables at terminations and in pull boxes, handholes, and manholes.

C. Signal Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, cables shall be color coded black and white for pairs or black, red, and white for triads.

D. Control Conductors: 1. Control conductors color coding for factory installed and manufactured equipment shall be

manufacturer's standard.


2. Control conductors interconnecting between devices, instruments, panel and equipment shall be the systems integrator standard.

E. Signal Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, cables shall be color coded black and white for pairs or black, white, and red for triads.

2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE, 600 VOLT

A. Single Conductor: 1. Stranded and used in conduits for power and control circuits. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide in accordance with CABLESPEC "XHHW-2". 3. Provide power circuits for equipment specified in Section 11000 and 17000 in compliance with

the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Multiconductor Cable: 1. Used for power and control circuits routed in cable tray. 2. Cables shall be UL labeled, Type TC, designed for cable tray installation in accordance with

NEC 336. 3. The type of insulation, number of conductors, and size of conductor shall be as specified. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide multiconductor power and control cable in accordance with

CABLESPEC "MC". 5. Power Cable: Containing three or four conductors, as specified, plus an equipment grounding

conductor. 6. Control Cable: Unless otherwise indicated, shall be size 14 AWG. 7. Provide power circuits for equipment specified in Section 11000 and 17000 in compliance with

the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.04 DIRECT BURIAL

Not Used.

2.05 SIGNAL CABLES

A. General: 1. Provide signal cable for instrument signal transmission, alarm, communication and other circuits

as specified. Circuit shielding shall be provided in addition to cable shielding. 2. Provide circuits for Type a and b signals specified in Section 17000 in compliance with the

instrument manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single circuit signal cable in accordance with CABLESPEC

"SIC”. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide multicircuit signal in accordance with CABLESPEC "MIC”.

B. Communication, Paging, and Security System Cables: Communication, paging, and security system cables shall be as specified in Division 17.

2.06 PORTABLE CORD

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide portable cord in accordance with CABLESPEC "CORD”.

B. Cords shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2.07 SPLICING AND TERMINATING MATERIALS

A. Splicing is not allowed without prior approval from the Project Representative.

B. Connectors: 1. Tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application. 2. Tin-plated high conductivity copper.


3. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller: Nylon self-insulated, ring tongue or locking-spade terminals.

4. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger: One-hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole or four-hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger.

5. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors are not acceptable.

C. Motor Connection Kits: 1. Shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and a

high dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and contamination. 2. Shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations. 3. Shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Identify each power and control conductor at each terminal to which it is connected. The marking system shall comply with Section 16000.

B. Provide and leave a pull string in each empty conduit installed

C. Wire Pulling: 1. Complete the pulling of wire and cable into conduit or trays without damaging or putting undue

stress on the cable insulation. 2. Soapstone, talc or UL listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and

cable. 3. Grease is not acceptable. 4. Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before cable is

placed.

D. Whenever a cable leaves a raceway, provide a cable support.

E. When flat bus bar connections are made with unplated bar, the Contractor shall scratch-brush the contact areas. Torque bolts to the bus manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Feeder, branch, control and instrumentation circuits shall not be combined in a raceway, cable tray, junction or pull box, except as permitted in the following: 1. Where specifically indicate on the Drawings. 2. Where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer. 3. Control circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and instrumentation circuits, but

combining of control circuits with power is permitted as noted below. a. The combinations shall comply with the following:

1) 12 Vdc, 24 Vdc and 48 Vdc may be combined. 2) 125 Vdc shall be isolated from all other DC circuits. 3) AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC circuits. 4) Control (discrete) conductors are allowed to be routed in the same conduit with power

conductors or cable where the power conductors are less than or equal to #8AWG and both must homerun to the same panel. A maximum of eight (8) control conductors and four (4) power conductors sized at #8AWG may be combined in a single conduit.

4. Instrumentation circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch panel and control circuits, but combining instrumentation circuits is permitted. a. The combinations shall comply with the following:

1) Analog signal circuits may be combined. 2) Digital signal circuits may be combined but isolated from analog signal circuits.

5. Multiple branch circuits for lighting, receptacles and other 120 Vac circuits are allowed to be combined into a common raceway.


a. Contractor is responsible for making the required adjustments in conductor and raceway size, in accordance with all requirements of the NEC, including but not limited to: 1) Up sizing conductor size for required ampacity de-ratings for the number of current

carrying conductors in the raceway. 2) The neutral conductors may not be shared. 3) Up sizing raceway size for the size and quantity of conductors.

3.02 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE

A. Lacing and Bundling: 1. Lace and bundle conductors in panels and electrical equipment, No. 6 AWG and smaller, at

intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. 2. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties. 3. Lacing is not necessary in plastic panel wiring duct. 4. Bundle conductors crossing hinges into groups not exceeding 12 and arrange so that they will be

protected from chafing when the hinged member is moved.

B. Slack: 1. Provide slack in junction and pull boxes. 2. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls of the box. 3. Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the box. 4. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for wire runs, lacing is not required..

C. Stranded Conductors: 1. Terminate as described in Section 16120, except where terminals will not accept such

terminations. 2. In these cases, terminate the conductors directly on the terminal block. 3. Install compression lugs and connectors using manufacturer's recommended tools.

D. Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following: 1. Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with derating

requirements of the NEC. 2. However, lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power or control

conductors.

E. Make terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices provided with pigtail leads using self-insulating tubular compression connectors.

3.03 SIGNAL CABLE

A. Circuits: 1. Run as individually shielded twisted pairs or triads. 2. Do not, in any case, make up a circuit using conductors from different pairs or triads. 3. Use triads wherever 3-wire circuits are required. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide terminal blocks at instrument cable junctions, and identify

circuits at such junctions. 5. Run signal circuits without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.

B. Shields are not acceptable as a signal path, except for circuits operating at radio frequencies and utilizing coaxial cables.

C. Common ground return conductors for two or more circuits are not acceptable.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, bond shields to the signal ground bus at the control panel and isolated from ground and other shields at other locations. Provide terminals for running signal leads and shield drain wires through junction boxes.

E. Shield Drain Wire:


1. Terminate spare circuits and the shield drain wire on terminal blocks at both ends of the cable run and cause to be electrically continuous through terminal boxes.

2. Do not ground shield drain wires for spare circuits at either end of the cable run.

F. Terminal Boxes: 1. Provide at instrument cable splices. 2. If cable is buried or in raceway below grade at splice, provide an instrument stand as specified

with terminal box mounted approximately 3 feet above grade.

G. Install and terminate cable for paging, telephone, and security systems in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 PORTABLE CORD

A. Portable cord feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords, pumps, cranes, hoists, and portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to take the tension from the cable termination.

B. Connect portable cords to permanent wiring with the use of terminals.

C. Use in-line taps and splices only where specified.

3.05 TESTING

A. General: The Contractor shall test conductors and cable in accordance with Section 16000 and Section 16030.

B. Signal Cable: 1. Test each signal pair or triad for electrical continuity. 2. Test each shield drain conductor for continuity. Shield drain conductor resistance shall not

exceed the loop resistance of the pair or triad. 3. Test each conductor (signal and shield drain) for insulation resistance with all other conductors in

the cable grounded. 4. Instruments used for continuity measurements shall have a resolution of 0.1 ohms and an

accuracy of better than 0.1 percent of reading plus 0.3 ohms. Use a 500 volt megohmmeter for insulation resistance measurements.

3.06 SCHEDULES

A. Cables are scheduled in the Conduit and Cable Schedules on the drawings.

3.07 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC)

A. General: 1. Conductor and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are

specified on individual cable specification sheets (CABLESPECS). a. MC Multiconductor power and control cable. b. TC Multiconductor power and control tray cable. c. XHHW-2 Single conductor power and control cable. d. SIC Single twisted, shielded pair or triad, No. 16 AWG, instrumentation. e. MIC Multiple twisted, shielded pairs or triads, No. 16 AWG, instrumentation cable. f. CORD Cord, No. 10 AWG and smaller, UL listed, type SO; larger than No. 10 AWG,

UL listed type G. g. VFD Variable Frequency Drive Cable.

2. Install scheduled and unscheduled conductors and cables in accordance with the CABLESPECS.

B. CABLESPEC SHEETS: CABLESPEC sheets follow.


Cable System Identification: MC Description: Multiconductor power and control cable, No. 1/0

AWG and larger, approved for tray installation and in accordance with UL 1569.

Voltage: 600 volts. Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with

ASTM B8. Insulation: XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet,

crosslinked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA WC57 / ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA WC70 / ICEA S-95-658 (Power Cable), and UL 44.

Assembly: Individual conductors cabled together with nonhydroscopic fillers and binding tape.

Sheath: : Impervious, continuous, corrugated aluminum welded over cable core. Sheath shall meet the grounding conductor requirements of NEC table 250-122.

Jacket: 50 mil minimum, polyvinylchloride (PVC) in accordance with UL 1277.

Flame Resistance: IEEE 383. Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Houston Wire & Cable, or equal. Uses Permitted: Cable tray, direct burial, encased in concrete in

normal or Class 1, Division 2 atmospheres. Execution: Installation:

Install in accordance with Section 16120.

Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16000 and Section 16030.

Cable System Identification: TC Description: Multiconductor power and control cable, No. 14

AWG minimum through No. 1 AWG, approved for tray installation and in accordance with UL 1581.


ASTM B8. Insulation: XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet,

crosslinked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA WC57 / ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA WC70 / ICEA S-95-658 (Power Cable), and UL 44.

Assembly: Individual conductors cabled together with nonhydroscopic fillers and binding tape.

Jacket: 50 mil minimum, polyvinylchloride (PVC) in accordance with UL 1581.

Flame Resistance: IEEE 383. Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Houston Wire & Cable, or equal. Uses Permitted: Cable tray, direct burial, encased in concrete in

normal or Class 1, Division 2 atmospheres. Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with Section 16120. Testing:

Test in accordance with Section 16000 and Section 16030.


Cable System Identification: XHHW-2 Description: Single conductor Cross-linked polyethylene power

and control cable for sizes No. 14 AWG through No. 1 AWG.


ASTM B8. Insulation: XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet, cross-

linked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA WC57/ ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA WC70/ ICEA S-95-658 (power cable).

Jacket: None. Flame Resistance: N/A. Manufacturer(s): Okonite, X-Olene; Cablec, Durasheath XLP; or

equal. Execution: Installation:



Cable System Identification: SIC Description: Single twisted, shielded pair or triad, 16 AWG,

instrumentation cable, UL listed. NEC type TC. Voltage: 600 volts. Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with

ASTM B8. Insulation: 15 mil, 90°C Dry / 75°C Wet, Polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) with 4 mil nylon conduit or jacket. Lay: Twisted on a 2-inch lay. Shield: 100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with 18

AWG 7-strand tinned copper drain wire Jacket: 45 mil polyvinylchloride (PVC). Flame Resistance: UL 1277. Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Okoseal-N type P-OS; or equal. Execution: Installation


Testing Test in accordance with Section 16120.

Cable System Identification: MIC Description: Multiple twisted, shielded pairs or triads, 16 AWG,

instrumentation cable, UL listed. Voltage: 600 volts. Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with

ASTM B8. Insulation: 15 mil, 90°C Dry / 75°C Wet, Polyvinyl chloride

(PVC) with 4 mil nylon conduit or jacket. Lay: Twisted on a 2-inch lay. Shield: 100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with 18

AWG 7-strand tinned copper drain wire. Overall Shield: 2.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with a No. 20 AWG 7-

strand tinned copper drain wire. Jacket: 45 mil polyvinylchloride (PVC). Flame Resistance: UL 1277. Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Okoseal-N type SP-OS; or equal.


Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with Section 16120. Testing:

Test in accordance with Section 16120.

Cable System Identification: CORD Description: Portable Cord, 3-conductor with ground, extra hard

usage, oil, weather and water resistant. 10 AWG and smaller, UL listed, type SOOW; larger than 10 AWG, UL listed type G.

Voltage: 600 volts. Conductor Material: Type G - Flexible rope stranded per ASTM B189

and B33. Type SOOW – Soft bare annealed copper per ASTM B-3, flexible bunch strand per ASTM B-174.

Insulation: Insulation shall be ethylene propylene (EPR) as per ICEA S-68-516 and rated for continuous operation at 90 degrees C.

Jacket: Heavy-duty neoprene as perNEMA WC70/ICEA S-95-658.

Manufacturer(s): Type SOOW – Houston Wire HW250, Southwire Viper, or equal Type G – Houston Wire HW258, Southwire Type G, or equal.

Execution: Installation:



Cable System Identification: VFD Description: Variable frequency drive cable, No. 14 AWG

minimum through No. 1 AWG, approved for tray installation and in accordance with UL 1581. Four conductors (three power and one full sized ground), overall 100% aluminum tape shield, 85% tinned copper braid shield, and tin copper drain wire.

Voltage: 600 volts. Conductor Material: Tinned copper, stranded. Insulation: Assembly

90 degrees C dry and wet, crosslinked polyethlylene (XLPE) in accordance with UL 1277 type TC-ER, XHHW-2, RHW-2. Individual conductors cabled together with nonhydroscopic fillers and binding tape.

Jacket: Black sunlight and oil-resistant polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket in accordance with UL 1581, IEEE 383.

Manufacturer(s): Belden Variable Frequency Drive Cable, AmerCable, approved equal.

Execution: Installation:

Install in accordance with this Section.



C. Sizing Cables: Cables shall be sized for loads to be served.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16140 - 1 Wiring Devices

SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies wiring devices consisting of receptacles, plugs, switches, and device plates and cover plates.

B. Related Sections: the work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Manufacturers’ responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 16000: General Requirements for Electrical Work


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum) NEMA WD-1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices NEMA WD-6 Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) UL 5 Safety; Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 20 Safety; General Use Snap Switches UL 231 Safety; Power Outlets UL 467 Safety; Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 498 Safety; Attachment Plugs and Receptacles UL 514A Safety; Metallic Outlet Boxes UL 894 Safety; Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations UL 943 Safety; Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters UL 1010 Safety; Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified)

Locations

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data – furnish product data for devices being provided.

C. Catalog cuts for all materials – provide catalog cut sheets for lighting controls, switches, receptacles, and cover plates.

D. Operations and Maintenance Manuals – Applicable operation and maintenance per Section 01730.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. UL-list wiring devices for the current, voltage, and frequency specified and complying with NEMA WD-1 and WD-6. Use devices containing provisions for back wiring and side wiring with captively held metallic binding screws.

B. Provide devices colored to conform to manufacturer’s or industry standard for special use such as orange for isolated ground receptacles, blue for surge suppression receptacles, and red for emergency power receptacles. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, normal use devices are to be brown, except those located in finished areas are to be ivory.

C. All to be supplied by a single manufacturer.

D. Enclosures shall meet or exceed requirements of NEMA 250.

2.02 RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS

A. General: Grounding type. 1. Receptacles to be grounding type. 2. Provide outdoor receptacles with weatherproof lift covers.

B. 120V Receptacles: 1. Indoor, clean areas:

a. Duplex 20 amp NEMA 5-20R that accept NEMA 5-15P or 5-20P plug caps. b. Acceptable manufacturer:

1) Hubbell 5362. 2) Arrow Hart equivalent. 3) Or equal.

2. Where the manufacturer of cord connected equipment requires an isolated ground, provide a receptacle with isolated ground.

3. Isolated ground receptacles: a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Hubbell IG-5362. 2) Arrow Hart 6766. 3) Or equal.

4. GFCI receptacles: a. Duplex 20 Ampere, 125V AC, NEMA 5-20R. b. Trip level – 4 to 6mA. c. Trip timing – 0.25 sec. nominal. d. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Hubbell GFR 5253. 2) General Electric equivalent. 3) Or equal.

5. Classified Areas: a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Crouse Hinds, FSQ 20 Amps 600 VAC. 2) Appleton, FSQX Series 3) Or equal suitable for classified areas.

C. 250V receptacles: 1. Duplex 15-amp NEMA 6-15R that accept NEMA 6-15P plug caps. 2. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Hubbell 5662 b. Arrow Hart equivalent. c. Approved equal.


D. Three Phase Receptacles and Plugs: 1. Receptacles:

a. Suitable for 480V, 3-phase, 4-wire service, with ampere ratings as specified. b. Provided complete with cast back box, angle adapter, gaskets, and a gasketed screw-type,

weathertight cap with chain fastener. c. Provide each receptacle with one plug.

2. Receptacles and plugs: Designed so that the grounding pole is permanently connected to the housing.

3. Contacts: a. The grounding pole shall make contact before the line poles are engaged when the plug is

connected to the receptacle housing. b. The plug sleeve shall make contact with the receptacle housing before the line and load

poles make contact. 4. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Crouse-Hinds "Arktite”. b. Appleton "Powertite". c. Approved equal.

E. Receptacles for hazardous areas: 1. Rate receptacles for use in hazardous areas in accordance with NEC for the area in which they

are to be located and factory seal. 2. Design receptacles so the plug must be inserted and turned before load is energized. 3. Provide receptacles with mounting box, sealing chamber and compatible plug. 4. Voltage and current ratings to be as specified. 5. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Appleton "U-Line" b. Crouse Hinds c. Approved equal.

F. Male plug caps for 120V and 250V receptacles: 1. Cord grip armored type with heavy phenolic housing, of the same manufacture as the receptacle. 2. Rate plug caps at 15 amps. 3. Provide one plug cap for every 4 receptacles, with a minimum of 2 plug caps. 4. Plug caps to be delivered to the Owner’s Representative.

2.03 SWITCHES

A. General Purpose (Indoor, Clean Areas): 1. General purpose switches: Quiet AC type, specification grade, with rated capacities as required. 2. Match receptacles in color. 3. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Arrow Hart. b. Hubbell. c. Or equal, as follows:

15A, 120-277V 20A, 120-277V Arrow Hart Hubbell Arrow Hart Hubbell Single: 1891 1201 1991 1221 Three-way 1893 1203 1993 1223 Four-way 1894 1204 1994 1224 SPST momentary

1895 1995

B. Protected low-voltage control switches: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Sierra b. Hubbell c. Or equal, with standard boxes and cover plates.


C. Switches for hazardous areas: 1. Switches for control of lighting and small single-phase power loads in hazardous areas: Factory

assembled and sealed combination general purpose type switch in an explosion proof housing. 2. Rate the switch in accordance with NEC for the area in which it is to be installed. 3. External operating mechanism: wing-type handle having the "ON" and "OFF" positions visible

from the front. 4. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Crouse Hinds Cat. No. EFS2129, 20 AMP, 277 VAC. b. Appleton, EDS SeriesEFSC175-F1. c. Or equal.

D. Switches for outdoor and corrosive areas: 1. Maintained contact switches:

a. Press switch type with a weatherproof hypalon or neoprene cover. b. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) Arrow Hart 2) Hubbell 3) Or equal.

2. Momentary contact switches: sealed contact pushbutton switches, rated NEMA 4X, mounted on a NEMA 4X control station.

2.04 DEVICE PLATES

A. Provide with switches.

B. Non-corrosive indoor areas: 1. Type 302 stainless steel device plates on sheet metal boxes. Sheet steel, zinc electroplated with

chrome finish in all other indoor areas. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer:

a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. Or equal.

C. Corrosive or outdoor areas: Impact resistant, marine grade fiberglass.

D. Device plates for explosion-proof equipment to be provided with the equipment.

E. Provide device plates for instrumentation power supply disconnect switches with general purpose switches and a lockoff feature with provision for a single padlock.

F. Nameplates: 1. Provide with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with 1/8-inch white characters on black

background as specified in Section 16000. 2. Switches: Identify panel and circuit number and area served. 3. Receptacles: Identify circuit and also voltage if other than 120V, single phase. 4. Indoor nameplates may be secured by epoxy glue. 5. Secure outdoor or corrosive area nameplates with Type 304 stainless steel screws.

G. Plug Strips 1. Plug strips shall be manufactured of sheet steel with the receptacles mounted in the front cover.

The front cover to be removable. 2. Plug strips for office and laboratory areas to have single 3-wire, 20-ampere grounding type

receptacles mounted along the strip. Space outlets every 12” on center in laboratory areas. Provide sufficient circuits for outlets (no more than 6 outlets per circuit).


3. Plug strips for work benches in shop and laboratory areas shall have 3-wire, 20-ampere grounding type duplex receptacles mounted along the strip on the circuits specified. Sufficient space to be provided behind the receptacles for ten No. 12 AWG conductors in accordance with NEC space rules.

4. Manufacturer of plug strips: Wiremold Plugmold, or equal.

2.05 MOTION SENSORS

A. Non-hazardous Areas 1. Features

a. Ceiling mount 360 degree sensor. b. Interfaces directly with EMS or HVAC system through internal isolated relay. c. User adjustable time delay and sensitivity via DIP switch.

1) Two levels of sensitivity (minimum and maximum). d. Four-level Fresnel lens. e. ASIC technology. f. Pulse Count Processing. g. Detection Signature Analysis. h. Digital time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. i. LED to indicate occupancy detection.

2. Ratings and Requirements a. Dual-element, temperature compensated pyroelectric sensor. b. Time delay adjustment for 30 seconds to 30 minutes. c. Isolated relay with normally open and normally closed outputs. d. Operate at 12V DC. e. UL and CUL listed. f. Five-year warranty.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. The Watt Stopper Model C1-12. b. Or equal.

B. Hazardous and Explosion-proof Areas: 1. Flamable gasses or vapors, combustible dusts or easily ignitable fibers or flyings caused

hazardous locations. 2. Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group C, D; Class II, Division 1 and @, Groups E, F, G; Class III. 3. Features

a. Stereo Doppler microwave detector. b. Microprocessor controlled, digital. c. Digital Range Control. d. Digital Sensitivity Control. e. Enhanced Bird/Animal Immunity Control.

4. Dual LEDs. 5. All solid-state relay. 6. Ratings:

a. Input Voltage: 8.5 – 20V DC. b. Current Consumption: 150mA at 12V DC (LEDs off). c. RF Power Density: 120µw/cm2 max. at the face of the unit. d. Weight: 40 pounds. e. Operation Temperature: -30 degree F to 130 degree F. f. Relay Contact Rating: 0.1 Ampere, 50 Volts. g. Frequency: 10,525 MHz

7. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Protechn Technologies Inc. Model SDI-77XL2-EX b. Or equal.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Boxes: 1. Independently support boxes by galvanized brackets, expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or machine or

wood screws as appropriate. 2. Do not use wooden or plastic plugs inserted in masonry or concrete as a base to secure boxes.

Do not use welding or brazing for attachment.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, flush mount receptacles and switches installed in sheet steel boxes. Locate flush-mounted receptacles 18 inches above the finished floor.

C. Mount switch boxes 48 inches above the floor. Locate receptacles installed in cast device boxes 48 inches above the finished floor.

D. Wire all 480V receptacles to suit the plant's standard phase rotation.

E. Test wiring devices for correct connections. 1. Check for absence of shorts and grounds. 2. Check control devices for proper operation.

F. Perform all work in accordance with NFPA 70 and these specifications.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16158 - 1 480 VAC VFD 5-500 Horsepower

SECTION 16158

480 VAC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) 5 - 500 HORSEPOWER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies variable frequency drive (VFD) controllers, 5 to 500 horsepower. The controllers are to include converters, inverters, control functions, instrumentation, filters, harmonic analysis, protective equipment and accessories necessary to provide the specified functions and features. The County has a sole source waiver for this equipment. Refer to Part 2 for the requirements.

B. Unit Responsibility: This equipment shall be supplied under a unit responsibility requirement specified in Section 11000.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI C37.90 ETL

Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus ETL Testing Laboratories

NEMA ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems NEMA ST20 IEEE C62.41 IEEE 399

Dry Type Transformers for General Applications Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits Recommended Practice for Power System Analysis

IEEE 519 IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems

UL 508 UL 508A ANSI/NETA

Industrial Control Equipment Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications

NFPA 70 NRTL OSHA

National Electrical Code National Recognized Testing Laboratory Occupational Safety and Health Administration

B. Source Quality Control: 1. Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ETL, or Canadian Standards

Association. 2. All upgrades to specified requirements per UL 508 or ETL.

C. Stand Alone Factory Test: The project representative reserves the right to observe factory tests on the VFD controller at the Project Representative's option and expense.

D. Compatibility: VFD controller's performance shall be compatible with and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD controllers and not interfere with each other.

E. Harmonics: 1. All line side harmonic suppression devices used to eliminate or deal with harmonics in any way

shall be contained within the VFD enclosure and shall be integral with the VFD controller.


2. Passive harmonic filters are mandated for use with VFDs. The passive harmonic filters are to mitigate harmonics from VFDs and are to be fully compatible with the site electrical with the site electrical system and shall not create any noise, interference or resonance issue. Passive filter shall be based on HP size of motor.

3. Use of input line filters external to the VFD shall not be permitted to meet the specified harmonic levels contained in this specification.

4. Output filters, used to protect motors from high voltage reflections, may be installed external to the VFD.

5. VFD controller's performance shall be in compliance with the latest version of IEEE 519.

F. Maintainability: VFD controller's parts shall be interchangeable and modular for all controllers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Catalog and technical data indicating the equipment meets the specifications.

C. Engineered design for equipment specific mounting base and pad per Specification 01031

D. Installation instructions, outline dimensions and weights including filters and/or isolation transformers, front view drawing identifying control and monitoring devices, nameplate engravings, shipping section dimensions, weight, and foundation requirements or wall mounting requirements for all assemblies.

E. External connection diagram showing function and identification of all terminals requiring field connections.

F. Operations and Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01730.

G. Schematics and wiring diagrams.

H. Plan drawings showing conduit entry locations.

I. Calculations of efficiency and power factor: 1. Efficiencies of the VFD controller including the auto-transformer (where applicable), ventilation

fans, control power and all VFD losses. 2. Displacement and total power factor including filter. 3. Perform calculations at 100, 75, and 50 percent speed. 4. Include first 36 harmonics.

J. Calculations of current and voltage distortion: 1. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) is the main distribution panel 480 volt bus. 2. Include first 36 odd current and voltage harmonics: Voltage calculated on line to line basis 3. Provide distortion figures for each harmonic and the total demand distortion. 4. Provide plots of voltage and current waves. 5. Perform calculations for the following criteria:

a. One (1) 10 hp VFD operating at full load on utility power b. Two (2) 10 hp VFDs operating at full load on utility power

K. Calculations of cooling and ventilation requirements.

L. Provide letters of certification from the VFD manufacturer and the motor manufacturer that the specific application has been reviewed and that the motor and drive combination will satisfy the torque and drive requirements under all conditions of operation and that VFD high voltage ringing on motor cables will not be detrimental to the motors.

M. Certified final factory test procedure and results for each drive.


N. Location and description of service center and spare parts stock.

O. Recommended spare parts list.

P. Certified copies of all material test reports.

Q. Training schedule and materials.

R. Manufacturer's certification that the controller can withstand fault conditions on the load side based on the assumption that an infinite bus and 5 percent impedance on a 1000kVA delta-to-wye service transformer exists on the supply side of the controller.

S. Test instruments used to perform factory testing, including documentation of calibration.

T. Test documentation from post installation field testing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Allen Bradley Type PowerFlex family of configured drives with integral Human Machine Interface Module (HIM), Rockwell Automation. Contact Bill Kounellas (206) 852-5992

B. No substitutions allowed.


A. General: 1. Minimum Continuous Current Ratings: 1.15 nameplate current of driven motor at full voltage,

torque and speed or 110% of continuous current rating for one minute (normal duty), whichever is greater.

2. Torque Requirements: Variable. 3. Enclosure:

a. Freestanding or wall-mount. b. NEMA 1. c. Internal heatsink.

4. The use of isolation transformers is not allowed.

B. Equipment List: 1. VFD900301A Variable Frequency Drive Odor Control Exhaust Fan A (in MOCU900301) 2. VFD900301B Variable Frequency Drive Odor Control Exhaust Fan B (in MOCU900301) 3. VFD900302A Variable Frequency Drive Odor Control Exhaust Fan A (in MOCU900302) 4. VFD900302B Variable Frequency Drive Odor Control Exhaust Fan B (in MOCU900302) 5. VFD900303A Variable Frequency Drive Odor Control Exhaust Fan A (in MOCU900303) 6. VFD900303B Variable Frequency Drive Odor Control Exhaust Fan B (in MOCU900303)

2.03 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirements: 1. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) drive design suitable for use with NEMA design B squirrel-cage

induction motors rated for inverter duty at 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz with 1.15 service factor. 2. Converters:

a. For 6-pulse drives VFDs: 6-Pulse, multiple full wave, 3 phase, solid state rectifier bridge to convert incoming fixed voltage and frequency to a fixed DC voltage. All components for converters shall be integral to the VFD enclosure.


b. For Allen-Bradley VFDs: 18-Pulse, multiple full wave, 3 phase solid state rectifier bridge with phase shifting auto-transformer to convert incoming fixed voltage and frequency to a fixed DC voltage. All components for converters shall be integral to the VFD enclosure.

3. Inverter: a. Output voltage: Adjustable and controlled by the value of output frequency to maintain a

constant ratio of Volts per Hertz throughout the operating range. The Volts per Hertz shall be internally field adjustable.

b. Capable of varying the speed of any standard NEMA B or NEMA E design, squirrel cage, induction motor with a 1.15 service factor.

c. A single unit, with no paralleling of smaller inverters. d. Suppresses output dV/dT high voltage spikes and shall be compatible with the pump motors

provided under specification Sections 11060, 11340 and 11347. 4. Telephone Interference Requirements: Limit the I-T product at any harmonic as defined in IEEE

519 to 10,000 at the primary of the station supply transformer for 2 pumps running. 5. General Features:

a. Inverter output shall be conditioned to prevent high voltage ringing on motor leads. Output filters are acceptable.

b. Microprocessor controlled pulse width modulation output voltage control strategy. c. Utilize pulse width modulation control techniques such that the maximum root mean square

motor line current at rated voltage, torque and speed is less than 1.05 times that motor nameplate current.

d. Power transistor output circuitry shall use insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT). An essential 12-pulse design combining two 6-pulse inverters to achieve a 12-pulse output will not be accepted. Input phase shifting transformer shall be specifically designed for equal current sharing in VFD applications.

e. Power devices to have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line current. f. Input power devices shall have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line voltage. g. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.

6. Ratings: a. Rated Input Power: 460 Volt, plus 10 percent or minus 10 percent, 3 phase, 48 - 62 Hertz

incoming voltage imbalance of plus or minus 0.5 percent. b. Rated Output Power: 0-460 Volt, plus or minus 1 percent, 3 phase, 1-90 Hertz. c. Frequency Drift: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. d. Voltage Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent rated value no load to full load. e. Speed Regulation: 3 percent. f. Ambient Temperature Range: 0-40 degrees Celsius. g. Atmosphere: Non-condensing relative humidity to 95 percent. h. VFD Efficiency: A minimum of 95 percent at 100-percent speed and torque at 40 degrees

Celsius ambient based upon measurement of input power versus output power with all specified components in system.

i. Displacement Power Factor: The minimum displacement power factor the VFD controller shall present to the AC system shall be 95 percent at all speeds. The unit shall be designed to inherently provide this minimum power factor.

j. Speed Range: 40:1. k. Input Speed Signal: A 4-20 mA DC from an external source and a remote pot. Circuitry shall

be isolated. l. Output Contacts: Three electrically isolated, programmable auxiliary status contacts, 5 amp

at 120 VAC, for Ready, Run, and Fault. 7. Frequency control and regulation:

a. Range: 4 mA DC at minimum equipment speed and 20 mA DC at maximum equipment speed.

b. Accuracy: 1.0 percent of span. c. Deadband: 0.5 percent of span. d. Repeatability: 0.5 percent of span. e. Input signal impedance: 100 Ohms minimum, with isolated two-wire signal follower. f. Adjustable minimum and maximum output frequency limits. g. Independent timed linear acceleration and deceleration functions adjustable from 3 to 300

seconds.


8. Provide program to prevent operation of the VFD at a minimum of two critical speeds. 9. Disconnects:

a. For 6-pulse drives VFDs: Provide input fused disconnects or circuit breaker and current limiter combinations.

b. For Allen-Bradley VFDs: Provide fused input disconnects or circuit breaker and current limiter combinations.

c. Provide disconnects or circuit breakers with through-the-door or flange-mounted handle and include door interlocks with defeater mechanisms.

d. Provide these disconnect switch and circuit breakers as integral components of the VFDs that are factory built into the VFD assemblies.

10. VFD overload capacity: 110 percent of continuous current rating for one minute.

B. Microprocessor Digital Control: 1. Drive operating parameters programmable. 2. Sealed keypad with pushbuttons or sealed membrane type keypad with LED or LCD display,

mounted on door when VFD is inside a NEMA 1 enclosure. 3. Operating parameters, fault, and diagnostic data maintained in non-volatile memory with historic

log of fault and diagnostic data for a minimum of the four most recent events, and is accessible via keypad and RS232/RS422 serial port.

4. Utilize English messages and engineering units. 5. Menu driven. 6. Password security. 7. Computer Interface via RS232/RS422 Serial Communication Port:

a. Adjust drive-operating parameter. b. Fault and diagnostic data accessible. c. Isolated from pump station ground so that no connection of a computer powered by the pump

station power can cause damage to the computer or the VFD serial communication ports. 8. Display fault and diagnostic data.

C. Basic Drive Features and Functions: 1. Automatic Restart Feature:

a. Field selectable. b. Faults:

1) Overload. 2) Overvoltage. 3) Undervoltage. 4)

c. Final fault, requiring manual reset, if restart is not successful after three attempts at 30-second intervals between restart attempts.

d. Provide drive with the ability to start into a motor that is spinning in the forward direction and assume normal operation upon auto restart of the drive.

2. Upon restoration of AC power after a loss of utility or standby power, the VFD controller shall not attempt to restart until an external start signal is received. The drive shall not require any type of reset command after a power outage.

3. 30 percent voltage dip ride through capability for one cycle. 4. Controllers shall be compatible and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD controllers

and shall not interfere with each other.

D. Adjustments: 1. Maximum frequency: Adjustable 60-90 Hertz. 2. Minimum frequency: Adjustable 6-40 Hertz. 3. Speed: Frequency maximum and frequency minimum. 4. Independent acceleration and deceleration rates: Field adjustable with minimum range of 3-300

seconds. 5. Voltage parameters: Minimum and maximum voltage and Volts/Hertz. 6. Current limit: 50 to 150 percent of drive limit for 1 minute. 7. Inverse time overload: NEMA Class 10. 8. Speed shedding: Automatic upon low voltage.


9. Speed profile: Starting ramp, stopping ramp, minimum speed, and maximum speed. 10. Starting boost: 4%.

E. Protective Features and Functions: 1. Current limiting fuses, regulators, or other techniques for both internal and external fault

protection. 2. Overvoltage protection on the incoming AC line. 3. Ground fault protection. 4. Single-phase fault or 3-phase short-circuit on VFD output terminals without damage to any power

component. 5. Over-speed (over-frequency). 6. Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip with inverse time overcurrent protection. 7. Single phase and undervoltage trip. 8. Power unit over-temperature. 9. Electronic motor overload protection. 10. De-saturation circuit protection for the following conditions:

a. VFD fault. b. Motor protection interlock. c. Emergency stop.

11. DC bus discharge circuit for protection of operator and service personnel with indicator lamp. 12. Transistor assembly overcurrent protection. 13. Provides safe drive shutdown on following faults:

a. Loss of input power. b. Sustained input undervoltage (minus 15 percent). c. Sustained gradual overload. d. Instantaneous severe overload. e. Power transistor over-temperature. f. Blown fuse. g. Logic power supply failure.

14. Voltage transients: Provide solid state line transient protection up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991.

15. Overcurrent protection: a. The VFD system shall provide adjustable electronic current limit. Current shall be accurate to

within 1.0 percent and shall smoothly limit motor speed at whatever value is necessary to limit motor current to that value.

b. The VFD shall provide motor running overcurrent protection in compliance with NFPA-70. 16. Short-circuit protection:

a. The VFD shall be fully protected against load faults. b. Bolted, phase to phase, or phase to ground faults shall not damage the unit. c. Fault protection shall be based on a power source short circuit capacity of 65,000 Amps RMS

symmetrical at the VFD power input terminals. Any impedance or other current limiting necessary to meet this requirement shall be provided as part of the VFD system, and any losses caused by current limiting devices shall be included in efficiency calculations for the VFD system.

17. Line voltage: The VFD shall be protected against high and low line voltage on one or more phases.

18. Internal faults: The VFD shall incorporate an internal fault monitoring system to detect malfunctions. This system shall be designed to protect the VFD from transient and sustained faults and to limit damage that may be caused by these faults.

19. Motor overtemperature: a. The VFD shall interface to motor temperature switches and shall shut down if the motor

becomes overheated. b. The VFD shall include all components necessary to sense a contact opening and shutdown

the affected motor if the motor winding temperature exceeds maximum rated operating temperature.

c. Drive must be manually reset after a motor over-temperature trip. 20. Annunciator:


a. The VFD shall be provided with a fault annunciation system that shall indicate the cause of any shutdown.

b. Annunciation shall identify the first fault in those cases where multiple faults occur between manual or automatic resets and shall be visible without opening the VFD cabinet.

c. The annunciation language shall be English. d. As a minimum, the following faults shall be annunciated:

1) Motor overtemperature. 2) Motor overcurrent. 3) VFD overtemperature. 4) Line over/under voltage. 5) VFD overvoltage.

F. Special Features and Functions: 1. Phase-Shifting Auto-Transformer for the existing pump station VFDs:

a. Minimum impedance: 5 percent. b. Current overload: 150 percent for 1 minute. c. Insulation: 180 degrees Celsius. d. Copper windings. e. Saturation current rating: 3.5 to 5.0 times rated current. f. Hi-potential rating (one minute): 2,500 VAC line to ground and line to line. g. Transformer temperature rise: 80 degrees Celsius.

2. Operator interface devices on door of VFD: a. Elapsed time meter (non re-settable). b. Indication of output voltage in volts. c. Indication of output currents in amps. d. Indication of motor speed in RPM. e. Local/Off/Auto selector switch. When in Auto, the speed is controlled from an external 4 to

20 mA DC signal. In Local, the speed is controlled from a keypad module. f. Start, Stop pushbuttons (keypad) active in Local mode. g. VFD off but ready indication light (green). h. VFD running indication light (red). i. Power indication light (white). j. VFD failure indication light (amber). k. Emergency stop mushroom head maintained contact pushbutton. l. Reset pushbutton.

3. Control power transformer: a. 120 VAC secondary; 100 VA minimum. b. Two primary fuses and one secondary fuse with non-fused secondary leg grounded. c. Door mounted “Control Power On” pilot light. d. Independent transformer utilized for internal VFD electronic controls.

4. Remote local control interface requirements: a. Remote run signal from PLC contact closure, two-wire control. b. Remote: Isolated 4-20 mA DC speed reference input signal; preset speed input is active. c. Local: 4-20 mA DC inactive; preset speed inactive; reference from interface module. May be

keypad operated. d. Drive running: 1 form C isolated contacts, 120V, 5 amps (typical). e. Drive off and ready to run: 1 form C isolated contacts. f. Drive fault: 1 form C isolated contacts. g. Drive in remote mode: 1 form C isolated contacts.

5. Preset speed: The drives shall ramp to a pre-programmed speed upon a contact closure, ignoring the 4 to 20 mA DC normal speed reference signal.

G. Noise Data: Free field noise generated by the VFD shall not exceed 85 dBa at 3 feet from any point of the VFD cabinet under any normal operating condition.

H. Enclosures: 1. For Allen-Bradley controllers: Free-standing units. Provide removable lifting angles or lifting

eyes.


2. Standard IP 20 NEMA 1 with fan and ventilation provisions that are necessary for equipment cooling and coordinated with the cooling ductwork provided by others in the pump station building.

3. Painted parts: a. To undergo phosphatizing, prepaint treatment for rust resistance and paint bond. b. Paint and process color: Manufacturer's color. c. Paint: Applied by electrostatic process and baked to a durable hard finish.

4. Nameplates: a. Provide laminate phenolic nameplates showing the controller designations as specified. b. Design: Black, with minimum 3/16-inch high white letters. Nominal size shall be 1 inch high

by 3 inches long. c. Abbreviations: If required because of space limitations, abbreviations shall be submitted to

the Engineer for approval. 5. Seismic bracing: The entire assembly, including electronics and controls, shall be braced for the

latest Uniform Building Code Seismic Zone 4. 6. Audible noise requirements: See Spec. 11030 and 16158-2.03G. 7. All components shall be accessible and removable from the front only. 8. Doors:

a. Open at least 90 degrees and shall be provided with 4 point hinges. b. Door handles: Capable of accepting a padlock with a 3/8-inch shackle to lock the VFD

enclosure closed and the input breaker open. 9. Drive enclosures:

a. Provided with external framework for housing the air filters. b. Access to the filter media for purposes of replacement or cleaning shall be possible from the

exterior of the drive without the need to open doors on the drive enclosure or otherwise gain interior access to the drive.

2.04 SPARE PARTS

A. The VFD manufacturer shall provide one complete set of all plug-in controller components as spare parts for the VFDs supplied.

B. Label spare parts and package in a sturdy container suitable for storage.

C. As a minimum, the spare parts include: 1. One set of 3 of each type of power fuse. 2. One set of 12 of each type of control fuse. 3. One set of indicating lights. 4. One main control board. 5. One inverter module. 6. One inverter base controller module. 7. One elapsed time meter. 8. One input ammeter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install equipment level and plumb and anchor to wall in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and as indicated herein.

C. Provide earthquake resistant attachments and supports for equipment. Provide fastenings that are adequate to resist a horizontal force of 50 percent of the equipment weight applied to the center of gravity without displacing the equipment or its fastenings.


D. The mounting requirements in Parts A through E of 16158. The mounting base shall be designed by a licensed civil/structural engineer and a stamped drawing submitted to King County prior to construction.

E. The Contractor shall provide written verification to the Project Representative that the factory installed wiring, busing, metering, relaying, and related equipment are properly connected, aligned, phased and identified.

3.02 HARMONIC ANALYSIS CALCULATIONS

A. Calculate total harmonic distortion at the common node switchgear bus for the controller units based on the specified impedances and system configuration. Unless otherwise indicated, determine distortion in accordance with IEEE 519-1992.


A. Employ and pay for services of the equipment manufacturer's field service representative to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these specifications. 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 3. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks; provide a checklist of all

inspections. 4. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed and

properly adjusted and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.

3.04 TRAINING

A. Job Site Training: Provide coordinated training course, approved by the Project Representative, to instruct ten Owner personnel on variable frequency drives. The job site training shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Conduct one day of training at the King County as specified in section 01660 and cover general

variable frequency drive theory and operation. 2. Conduct one day of training at the King County as specified in section 01660 on operation and

maintenance of the variable frequency drives specific to the supplied VFDs 3. The instructor shall be approved by the Project Representative prior to the training.

3.05 FACTORY TEST

A. Perform standard factory tests on each drive provided.

B. Verify proper operation of all controls, instrumentation, and protective functions. Document testing and submit documentation.

C. Provide certified copies of the test reports.

3.06 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

A. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Provide manufacturer’s representative as needed for adjustments and supervision during installation, delivering and commissioning until unit is performing satisfactorily as required.


3.07 TESTING AND STARTUP

A. Test Procedure: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare the test

procedure and to conduct tests in accordance with the procedure to demonstrate to the Project Representative the accuracy of the wiring, control, and proper functioning of the equipment in accordance with these specifications. The Contractor shall submit its proposed test procedure to the Project Representative for approval at least two weeks prior to the demonstration.

2. All equipment and systems shall be demonstrated by the Contractor as operating properly prior to acceptance of the work. All protective devices shall be operative during the demonstration.

3. If the demonstration indicates unsatisfactory operation as determined by the Project Representative or inspecting authorities, defects shall be corrected by the Contractor and the demonstration shall be repeated at no additional expense to King County.

B. Phase Relationship Tests: 1. Check connection to all equipment for proper phase relationship. 2. During such check, disconnect all devices that could be damaged by the application of voltage of

reversed phase sequence.

C. Insulation Resistance Tests: 1. Perform insulation resistance tests on conductors, cables, and equipment, signal circuits

excepted. 2. Make tests using 1,000-volt Biddle hand cranked megger insulation resistance tester. 3. Disconnect all equipment that may be damaged by such tests before the tests are made. 4. Tests shall measure insulation resistance from line to ground. 5. Test conductors and cables after placement and the completion of the terminations, but before

connection to equipment. 6. Test 600-volt class circuits and equipment. Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance

of circuits and equipment shall be 10 megohms. 7. The Contractor shall provide for King County the test reports listing test equipment used, person

or persons performing the tests, the date tested, the circuits or equipment tested, and the results of all tests. These tests shall be witnessed by King County. The Contractor shall notify King County one week in advance of testing.

D. High Voltage Ringing on Motor Leads: 1. The contract requires VFDs, or VFDs with output filters, which control the phenomenon of high

voltage reflected voltage waves on motor cable, produced by the high speed switching to PWM drives.

2. Use an oscilloscope with a 5,000-volt test probe at the motors with the longest length able to record the amplitude of the voltage at the motor.

3. Voltage spikes plus base 480 volts: Not to exceed 1488 Volts peak, per NEMA..

E. Test Equipment: All test instrumentation equipment used during testing shall be NIST traceable and certified.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16421 - 1 Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices

SECTION 16421

LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD'S)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies a transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) system.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI/IEEE C62.11 IEEE Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. ANSI/IEEE C62.45 IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to

Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. NEC Article 280 Surge Arresters, Over 1kV. NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). NFPA 75 Standard for Protection of Information Technology Equipment NFPA 780 NFPA 780: Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection

Systems. UL 1283 Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. UL 1449, Third Edition Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data.

PART 2

2.01 TVSS SYSTEM

A. Provided by the panelboard suppliers specified in Section 16470.

B. An integrally mounted TVSS system shall be included for the protection of all AC circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients, and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching.

C. Modular with the following features: 1. Suppression element: Each to be metal oxide varistor (MOV) based and have each phase fused

with 200 kAIC surge rated fuses. 2. Surge current diversion paths:

a. Provided between each phase conductor and neutral, between each phase conductor and ground and between the neutral conductor and ground.

b. For delta configured systems: Having components connected between each phase conductor and between each phase conductor and ground. Copper bus bars incorporated for the surge current path.

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16421 - 2 Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices

c. Do not use plug in connections and round wire in the surge current path. d. Directly connected to the bus bars of the panelboard to provide a low impedance surge

current path. 3. Provide UL-approved disconnect switch as a means of disconnect. 4. Event surge counter:

a. Mounted on the dead front of the panelboard. b. Containing battery to retain memory during power outages. c. Equipped with a manual reset push button

5. Equip with visual and audible diagnostic monitoring: a. Indicating lights: To provide full-time monitoring of each phase of the surge current diversion

module. b. Alarm: Activates upon a fault condition and has acknowledge, test, and reset push buttons. c. C-Form dry contacts: One set which change state during an alarm condition to be provided. d. Alarm contacts: Remain in alarm condition until the fault has cleared and the alarm has been

manually reset.

D. Meets or exceeds the following criteria: 1. Maximum surge current capability of 250kAIC per phase. 2. Capable of surviving 5,000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 transients without failure or

degradation of UL 1449 Suppression Voltage Rating by more than 10 percent. 3. Designed to withstand a continuous operating voltage of not less than 115 percent of nominal

RMS voltage. 4. Has a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of -50dB at 100kHz with an insertion ratio of 50:1 using MIL

STD. 220A methodology. 5. Has a response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond for any of the individual protection modes. 6. Recognized Component Suppression Voltage Ratings: Not to exceeding the requirements of UL

1449. 7. Category C3 Let Through Voltages: Not exceeding the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.41.

E. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. TPS Series. 2. Cutler Hammer CPS Series. 3. Square D Surgebreaker Series. 4. General Electric GEH Series. 5. Approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installed by the original equipment manufacturer at the manufacturer's factory.

END OF SECTION

December 20017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16450 - 1 Grounding System

SECTION 16450

GROUNDING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the system for grounding electrical equipment, exposed nonenergized

metal surfaces of equipment, and metal structures.


documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and

Earth NEC National Electrical Code Article 250 Grounding and Bonding NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

B. Qualifications: Not Used.

C. Comply with requirements of NEC Article 250.


B. Product Data.

C. Grounding System Test Results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND CABLE A. Annealed bare copper, concentric stranded as specified. If cable sizes are not indicated, the

minimum sizes shall be as follows: 1. 15kV - 480V transformer: 250 MCM. 2. 15kV Load Interrupter: 4/0 AWG. 3. 480V switchgear: 4/0 AWG. 4. 480V MCC and switchboards: 2/0 AWG. 5. Lighting panels: 1/0 AWG. 6. Exposed metal: 2 AWG.

2.02 GROUND RODS A. Copper covered steel, 3/4-inch diameter and ten feet long.

B. Rods shall have threaded type removable caps so that extension rods of same diameter and length may be added where necessary.


2.03 COMPRESSION CONNECTORS A. Cast copper.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Thomas and Betts. 2. Burndy. 3. Or Approved Equal.

2.04 BOLTED CONNECTORS A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. Burndy. 2. O. Z. Gedney. 3. Or Approved Equal.

2.05 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Thermoweld. 2. Cadweld. 3. Or Approved Equal.

2.06 GROUNDING PLATE – CAST IN CONCRETE A. Cast copper plate for use with future two-hole lug connection. Flush mounted in concrete.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Burndy. 2. Erico. 3. Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL A. Make embedded and buried ground connections by compression connectors utilizing diamond or

hexagon dies. Use a hand compression tool for wire sizes 2/0 AWG and smaller and a hydraulic pump and compression head for wire sizes larger than 2/0 AWG.

B. Tools and dies: 1. Approved for purpose used. 2. Dimple compressions are not acceptable.

C. Prepare compression connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, make exposed ground connections to equipment by bolted clamps.

E. Do not use solder in any part of the ground circuits.

F. Cables: 1. Securely attach embedded ground cables and fittings to concrete reinforcing steel with tie

wires and prevented from displacement during concrete placement. 2. As each part of the grounding system below finished grade is completed, notify the Project

Representative a minimum of four hours prior to backfilling.

G. Extensions: 1. Extend grounding conductors that are extended beyond concrete surfaces for equipment

connection a sufficient length to reach the final connection point without splicing. 2. Minimum extensions: 3 feet.


H. Conductors: 1. Locate grounding conductors that project from a concrete surface as close as possible to a

corner of the equipment pad, protected by conduit, or terminated in a flush grounding plate. 2. Terminate grounding conductors for future equipment using a two-hole copper flush mounted

grounding plate. 3. Support exposed grounding conductors by non-corrosive metallic hardware at 4-foot intervals

or less. 4. Ground conductors, except signal conductor shields entering enclosures:

a. Bonded together to the enclosure if it is metallic and to metallic raceways within or terminating at the enclosure.

5. Grounding conductor shall not be used as a system neutral.

I. Use compression-type lugs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

J. Directly connect lightning arresters to the ground system using copper conductors, sized as specified.

K. Metallic sheaths or shields of shielded power cable: 1. Terminated by a copper grounding strip provided with cable connection for connection to the

grounding system.

L. Prior to making ground connections or bonds, clean metal surface at the point of connection.

M. For all control devices with sealed cable connection, include a ground conductor in the control cable.

N. Prior to burying of the ground conductors, record location for Record Drawings.

3.02 RACEWAY GROUND A. Metallic conduits:

1. Assembled to provide a continuous ground path and bonded using insulated grounding bushings.

2. Bond using insulated grounding bushings.

B. Non-metallic conduits: Insulated ground conductor sized in compliance with the NEC.

C. Grounding bushings: Connected to the grounding system using conductors sized in compliance with NFPA 70.

D. Cable trays: 1. No. 2/0 AWG bare copper ground conductor run on the outside of each tray. 2. Conductor to be connected to each section or fitting using a carriage bolt and clamp.

E. Every conduit shall contain an insulated green ground conductor sized in compliance with NEC.

F. Duct Banks: 1. Run along the duct bank a continuous No. 2/0 AWG minimum bare copper conductor. 2. Bond using insulated grounding bushings.

3.03 EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE GROUND A. Connect electrical and distribution equipment to the grounding system. Cables sized as

indicated.

B. Connect non-electrical equipment with metallic enclosures to the grounding system.

C. Securely bond transformer yard fences and gates as specified.

3.04 ISOLATED GROUNDING


A. Where the manufacturer of equipment supplied from 120 volt instrument power panels requires an isolated ground, provide an additional isolated ground conductor from the equipment through the instrument power panel for connection to a single point ground bus in the automatic transfer switch enclosure.

B. Conductor: Green insulation with a yellow stripe and run in the same raceway as the power and neutral conductors.

C. Neutral conductor from the ultra-isolation transformers: 1. Grounded only at the single point ground bus in the automatic transfer switch.

3.05 GROUNDING SYSTEM TESTS

A. Test per IEEE 81 each grounding connection to determine the ground resistance.

B. Submit a plot of ground resistance readings for each isolated ground rod or ground mat on 8-1/2 by 11 inch size graph paper.

C. Current reference rod: At least 100 feet from the ground rod or grid under test.

D. Make measurements at 10-foot intervals beginning 25 feet from the test electrode, and ending 75 feet from it, in direct line between the ground rod or center of grid and the current reference electrode.

E. Consider a grounding system that shows greater than 2-ohm resistance for the flat portion of the plotted data inadequately grounded. Add additional parallel-connected ground rods and deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurements meet the 2-ohm or less requirement.

F. Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the indicated ground resistance is not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16460 - 1 Dry-Type Transformers

SECTION 16460

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies dry-type transformers rated 600 volts and less used for power distribution,

lighting, and control purposes.

B. Equipment List: EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT NO. LOCATION

480 to 120V Transformer TFR 900301 MOCU900301 480 to 120V Transformer TFR 900302 MOCU900302 480 to 120V Transformer TFR 900303 MOCU900303


documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title IEEE C57.12.01 General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power

Transformers UL 506 Specialty Transformers NEMA ST20 Dry-Type Transformers for General Application NEMA TP-1 Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution

Transformers



B. Product Technical Data: 1. Manufacturer's verification that the unit has been built and tested in accordance with the

specified standards. 2. Manufacturer's verification of the sound levels of each unit if different from the specified

NEMA ST20 standards. 3. Manufacturer's product literature. 4. Applicable operation and maintenance information per Section 01730.

C. Completed test report Form 16000-C.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Transformers rated 10 KVA and smaller: Unless otherwise indicated, single phase.

B. Transformers rated 15 KVA and greater: Unless otherwise indicated, 3-phase.

C. Transformers shall conform to IEEE C57.12.01 and UL 506.

D. The voltage, frequency, number of phases, and KVA rating shall be as specified.

E. Acceptable Manufacturer:


1. General Electric. 2. Square D. 3. Eaton: Cutler-Hammer. 4. Or Approved Equal.

2.02 INSULATION A. Transformers 15 KVA and greater: Class 220 insulation system in accordance with NEMA ST20.

B. Transformers 2 KVA and smaller: Designed not to exceed 80 ºC temperature rise.

C. Transformers 3 KVA and greater: Designed not to exceed 115 ºC temperature rise.

D. Transformers shall be rated with a minimum efficiency that complies with NEMA TP-1.

2.03 TRANSFORMER COILS A. Copper wound coils.

B. 15 KVA and greater: Impregnated with varnish.

C. Transformer coils 10 KVA and smaller: Encapsulated.

2.04 WINDING CONFIGURATION A. Transformers with electrically isolated primary and secondary windings with winding

configurations as specified.

B. Make provisions to permit separate grounding of the neutral conductor and the enclosure.

C. Single-phase transformers: Four-winding type.

2.05 TRANSFORMER TAPS A. Transformers 15 KVA and above shall have two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above normal

voltage and four 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps below rated voltage on the primary winding.

2.06 TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS A. Sized to permit termination of cables specified.

B. Copper and sized for the cable specified.

C. Make terminal connections in the bottom third of the enclosure.

2.07 ENCLOSURES A. Transformers rated 15 KVA and smaller: Provide with drip-proof, ventilated enclosures.

B. Indoor transformers rated greater than 15 KVA: Provide with drip-proof, ventilated enclosures.

C. Outdoor transformers: Provide with weatherproof enclosures.

2.08 MOUNTING A. Transformers 25 KVA and smaller: Suitable for wall mounting.

B. Transformers 37 KVA and greater: Floor-mounting type.

2.09 NAMEPLATES A. Per Section 16000.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL A. Bond together and ground transformer enclosures and neutrals.

3.02 TESTING A. Test per Section 16030.

B. Complete test report Form 16000-C.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16470 - 1 Lighting and Power Distribution Panelboards

SECTION 16470

LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies panelboards for lighting and power distribution.

B. Equipment List: EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT NO. LOCATION

480V Distribution Panel A PNL900301A MOCU900301 120V Distribution Panel A PNL900301B MOCU900301 480V Distribution Panel A PNL900302A MOCU900302 120V Distribution Panel B PNL900302A MOCU900302 480V Distribution Panel A PNL900303A MOCU900303 120V Distribution Panel B PNL900303B MOCU900303


documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and

Circuit Breaker Enclosures



B. Product Technical Data: 1. Manufacturer's certification that bus bracing is capable of withstanding the specified short

circuit condition. 2. Quantity and rating of circuit breakers for each panelboard. 3. Applicable operation and maintenance information: Section 01730.

1.04 PANELBOARDS A. As indicated on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Panelboards: Circuit breaker, dead front type, with bus bar construction.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Square D. 2. Eaton: Cutler-Hammer. 3. Or Approved Equal.


2.02 ARRANGEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Panel Front: Concealed trim clamps and hinges.

B. Locks: Flush with cylinder, tumbler-type with spring loaded door pulls.

C. Non-removable fronts with doors in the locked position.

D. Panelboard Locks: Keyed alike.

E. Gutter space on all sides of the breaker assembly to neatly connect and arrange incoming wiring.

F. Panelboard: Composed of individually-mounted circuit breakers designed to be removable without disturbing other breakers.

G. Mount a directory holder with clear plastic plate and metal frame on the inside of the door.

2.03 BUS A. Tin-plated copper with current ratings as indicated on the panelboard schedules and sized in

accordance with UL 67.

B. Determine ratings by temperature rise test.

C. Minimum Size: 100 amperes.

D. Panel fault withstand rating: Equal to the interrupting rating of the smallest circuit breaker in the panel.

E. Other Buses: 1. Panelboards shall be provided with a separate ground bus and, where indicated, with a full

capacity neutral bus. 2. Mount neutral bus of instrument power panels on insulated stand-offs.

2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded-case type provided for the current ratings and pole configurations indicated on the panelboard schedule.

B. Rated 120/208 volt and 120/240 VAC: Minimum interrupting current rating of 18,000 amperes (symmetrical) at 240 VAC.

C. Rated 480 VAC: Unless otherwise indicated on the panelboard schedule, a minimum interrupting current rating of 25,000 amperes (symmetrical) at 480 VAC.

D. Bolt-on Type.

E. Listed in accordance with UL 489 for the service indicated.

F. Load Terminals: Solderless connectors.

2.05 PANELBOARD FINISH

A. Cabinet: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with UL 50.

B. Fronts: ANSI 61 - gray, baked enamel finish.

2.06 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SYSTEM A. Per Section 16421.

2.07 NAMEPLATES A. Provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL A. Type in the circuit description on the circuit directory or panelboard schedule.

3.02 TESTING A. Test for proper operation and function per Section 01660 and Section 16030.

END OF SECTION

December 2017 ITB # 1204-17 Exhibit A Specifications Mobile Odor Control Unit 16500 - 1 Lighting Fixtures

SECTION 16500

LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies lighting fixtures.


A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Reference Title ANSI /IEEE C62.11 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits IES LM-79-08 Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting

Products NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop drawings and equipment data: Section 16000.

C. Large scale photometric charts for each fixture type.

D. Catalog information describing fixture make, materials, and dimensions.

E. Ballast data.

F. Lamp data.

G. Product Data:

1. Polar plots on 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper providing candlepower vs. angle and foot-lamberts (brightness) vs. angle for longitudinal and transverse axes.

2. Table of utilization factors for calculation of illumination levels by the zonal cavity method.

H. Operation and maintenance information: Section 01730.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, lighting materials, including fixtures, accessories, and hardware conform with LIGHTING FIXTURE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (LIGHTSPECs) in this Section and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Ballasts: 1. LED

a. LED Drive shall be installed in an electrical enclosure. b. Maximum case temperature: 75 degrees C. c. Minimum ambient operating temperature: -40 degrees C. d. Typical output current: 350mA, 525mA or 700mA. e. Total harmonic distortion: less than Approved Equal to 20 percent. f. Minimum power factor: 0.90. g. Minimum surge protection: 2.5kV. h. Sound rating: Class A or quieter. i. Reduces output power to LEDs if max allowable case temperature is exceeded. j. Minimum life expectancy of 50,000 hours at temperature case ≤70 degrees C. k. Maximum failure rate of ≤0.01% per 1,000 hours at case temperature ≤70 degrees C. l. Standard: Complies with UL standard UL1012. m. Regulation: Complies with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Title 47 CFR

part 15 Non-Consumer (Class A). n. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Philips “Xitanium”. 2) Acuity Brands: Holophane, Lithonia. 3) Approved Equal.

C. Lamps:

1. General: a. Lamps: Per LIGHTSPECs.

a) Acceptable Manufacturers: b. General Electric. c. North American Philips (Norelco). d. Osram Sylvania. e. Venture Lighting International. f. Approved Equal.

D. Photoelectric Cell Units: 1. Cadmium sulfide cell housed in a plug receptacle assembly. 2. Plug receptacle assembly: Three-prong polarized locking type, suitable for outdoor mounting and

rated for 1800 VA at 120V maximum capacity. 2.2 SPARE PARTS

A. Lamps: 1 of each lamp type and size specified.

B. Requirements per Section 01740.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. The location, type, and number of fixtures and receptacles are shown on the Drawings. Unless

specifically detailed, the information is diagrammatic.

B. Raceways and wire from the fixtures, switches, and receptacles to the lighting panel per the NEC.

C. Raceways: Per Section 16110.

D. Wire: Per Section 16120.

E. Splice circuit conductors in a separately mounted junction box for fixtures labeled to require conductors with a temperature rating exceeding 75 degrees C.

F. Connect fixture to junction box using flexible conduit with a temperature rating equal to that of the

fixture.

G. Photoelectric cells: Orient toward the north.

H. Remove labels and marks, except the UL label, from exposed parts of the fixtures.

I. Clean fixtures per Section 01710.

J. Align and direct fixture to illuminate an area as specified.

K. Directly and rigidly mount on supporting structures.

L. Unless otherwise indicated, do not use fixtures to support conduit system.

M. Treat weld area with rust-resistant primer and finish paint where brackets or supports for lighting fixtures are welded to steel members.

N. Underground and outdoor wire splices per Section 16120.


A. Provide a lighting system test plan.

B. Test lighting system including operation and controls in accordance with Section 16030.

3.3 FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A. General:

1. Manufacturer's catalog numbers listed are examples of the basic model, or series, and the overall quality required.

2. While the referenced catalog numbers attempt to be as definitive as available literature permits, such items as voltage, mounting style, modifications, and other special features may not be included.

3. Verify and provide all of the specified requirements.

B. LIGHTSPEC


1. Lamp codes specified on LIGHTSPEC sheets are Osram Sylvania designations. 2. Do not use catalog numbers given on the LIGHTSPECs for selection of mounting hardware, but

only as a reference to the type of fixture required. 3. Contains the following Family groups of fixtures:

a. L - LED b. LH – LED, classified location. c. LR – LED, recessed-mounted.

Family group: L – LED. Group description: Array of LED’s with thermal management system. Family member: C: Silicone type gasket to withstand harsh environments.

Type 4X enclosure with IP66 ingress protection. Fabrication: Housing: Low copper aluminum alloy.

Finish: Polyester powder paint. Lighting: Distribution: Symmetric.

Reflector: Endural borosilicate glass. Lamps: LED light engine. 98 LED’s total. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V.

LED Driver: Electronic. Mounting: Ceiling mount. Acceptable manufacturers: Holophane LED Petrolux, Approved Equal.

Family member: H: Outdoor LED with full cut-off. Flow through thermal

management. IP66 rated. Sealed against moisture and environmental contaminants.

Fabrication: Housing: Low-copper aluminum, single piece die cast. Finish: Zinc-infused super durable TGIC thermoset powder coat. Resistance to corrosion and weathering.

Lighting: Distribution: Type III. Reflector: N/A

Lamps: 2 LED light engines. 4000K, 65CRI. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V.

LED Driver: 700ma Electronic driver. Mounting: Building mount. Acceptable manufacturers: Lithonia CSX1 LED, Approved Equal.

Family member: J: Outdoor LED with full cut-off. Flow through thermal

management. IP66 rated. Sealed against moisture and environmental contaminants. Photocell provided with fixture.

Fabrication: Housing: Rugged, die cast, single piece aluminum. Resistance to corrosion and weathering. Finish: Zinc-infused super durable TGIC thermoset powder coat.

Lighting: Distribution: Type IV forward throw. Reflector: N/A

Lamps: 1 LED light engine. 4000K, 65 CRI. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V.

LED Driver: 700ma Electronic driver. Mounting: Building mount. Acceptable manufacturers: Lithonia CSXW LED, Approved Equal.

Family member: M: 1 foot Linear exterior wall grazing fixture. Fabrication: Housing: Low-profile aluminum housing.


Lighting: Distribution: Beam angle between 30Deg – 60Deg. Reflector: N/A

Lamps: Color range: 4000K. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V. Mounting: Mounted on metal sill behind glass. Acceptable manufacturers: Philips Color Kinetics eW, Approved Equal.

Family member: N: 2 foot Linear exterior wall grazing fixture. Fabrication: Housing: Low-profile aluminum housing. Lighting: Distribution: Beam angle between 30Deg – 60Deg.

Reflector: N/A Lamps: Color range: 4000K. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V. Mounting: Mounted on metal sill behind glass. Acceptable manufacturers: Philips Color Kinetics eW, Approved Equal.

Family group: LH – LED, classified location. Group description: Array of LED’s with thermal management system. Class

I, Div 2 Family member: C: Silicone type gasket to withstand harsh environments.

Type 4X enclosure with IP66 ingress protection. Rated for classified locations class I, Div 2.

Fabrication: Housing: Low copper aluminum alloy. Finish: Polyester powder paint.

Lighting: Distribution: Symmetric. Reflector: Endural borosilicate glass.

Lamps: 98 LED array. Family group: LH – LED, classified location. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V.

LED Driver: Electronic. Mounting: Ceiling mount. Acceptable manufacturers: Holophane PLED Petrolux Haz location Approved Equal.

Family group: LR – LED, recessed-mounted. Group description: Recessed into concrete for step lighting. Family member: K: Recessed into concrete step light. Outdoor wet

location. Internal splice area behind lamp plate. Fabrication: Housing: Die cast low copper aluminum alloy with clear

anodized finish. Finish: Black

Lighting: Distribution: Asymmetrical step lighting. Lens: Tempered prismatic glass with silicone gasket.

Lamps: 3 LED emitters. Electrical: Input voltage: 120V.

LED Driver: Electronic Mounting: Recessed into concrete. Acceptable manufacturers: Kim lighting EL807, Approved Equal.

Mounting: Recessed into concrete. Acceptable manufacturer: Kim lighting EL807, Approved Equal.


END OF SECTION

Mobile Odor Control Unit

Documents

Transcript of Mobile Odor Control Unit